Honda 2011 Accord Coupe Owners Manual

Honda-2011-Accord-Sedan-Owners-Manual-107014 honda-2011-accord-sedan-owners-manual-107014

Honda-2011-Accord-Sedan-Owners-Manual-762435 honda-2011-accord-sedan-owners-manual-762435

Owners Manual Pdf TA1111OM 2011 Honda Accord Owners Manual Pdf | Owner's Manual Pdf

2015-10-23

: Honda Honda-2011-Honda-Accord-Coupe-Owners-Manual-816703 honda-2011-honda-accord-coupe-owners-manual-816703 honda pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 454

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

10/06/18 15:41:11 31TA5630_002

Introduction
Congratulations! Your selection of a 2011 Honda Accord was a wise
investment. It will give you years of driving pleasure.
One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new vehicle is to
read this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls and
convenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner’s manual in your vehicle so
you can refer to it at any time.

As you read this manual, you will
find information that is preceded by
a
symbol. This
information is intended to help you
avoid damage to your vehicle, other
property, or the environment.

Several warranties protect your new vehicle. Read the warranty booklet
thoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rights
and responsibilities.
Maintaining your vehicle according to the Maintenance MinderTM shown in
the instrument panel helps to keep your driving trouble-free while it
preserves your investment. When your vehicle needs maintenance, keep in
mind that your dealer’s staff is specially trained in servicing the many
systems unique to your vehicle. Your dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction
and will be pleased to answer any questions and concerns.

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 15:41:15 31TA5630_003

Introduction
California Proposition 65 Warning
WARNING: This product contains or emits chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth
defects or other reproductive harm.
Event Data Recorders
This vehicle is equipped with one or more devices commonly referred to as event data recorders. These
devices record front seat belt use, front passenger seat occupancy, airbag deployment data, and the failure
of any airbag system component. This data belongs to the vehicle owner and may not be accessed by anyone else
except as legally required or with the permission of the vehicle owner.
Service Diagnostic Recorders
This vehicle is equipped with service-related devices that record information about powertrain performance. The data
can be used to verify emissions law requirements and/or help technicians diagnose and solve service problems. It may
also be combined with data from other sources for research purposes, but it remains confidential.
California Perchlorate Contamination Prevention Act
The airbags, seat belt tensioners, and CR type batteries in this vehicle may contain perchlorate materials − special
handling may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 15:41:24 31TA5630_004

A Few Words About Safety
Your safety, and the safety of others,
is very important. And operating this
vehicle safely is an important
responsibility.
To help you make informed
decisions about safety, we have
provided operating procedures and
other information on labels and in
this manual. This information alerts
you to potential hazards that could
hurt you or others.
Of course, it is not practical or
possible to warn you about all the
hazards associated with operating or
maintaining your vehicle. You must
use your own good judgement.

You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,
including:
Safety Labels − on the vehicle.
and one of
Safety Messages − preceded by a safety alert symbol
three signal words: DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION.
These signal words mean:
You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
You CAN be HURT if you don’t follow
instructions.
Safety Headings − such as Important Safety Reminders or Important
Safety Precautions.
Safety Section − such as Driver and Passenger Safety.
Instructions − how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.
This entire book is filled with important safety information − please read it
carefully.

iii

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 15:41:36 31TA5630_006

2011 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual

Contents

Owner's Identification Form
Your Vehicle at a Glance (main controls) ................................................................................................ 3
Driver and Passenger Safety (seat belts, SRS, and child protection) ............................................................. 5
Instruments and Controls (indicators, gauges, dashboard, and steering column) ........................................... 53
Features (climate control, audio, steering wheel, security, cruise control, HomeLink , and other convenience items)............... 121
Before Driving (fuel, vehicle break-in, and cargo loading) ........................................................................ 295
Driving (engine and transmission operation).......................................................................................... 315
Maintenance (minder, fluid checking, minor services, and vehicle storage).................................................. 341
Taking Care of the Unexpected (flat tire, jump starting, overheating, and fuses) ......................................... 391
Technical Information (vehicle specifications, tires, and emissions controls)............................................... 417
Warranty and Customer Relations (U.S. and Canada only) (warranty and contact information)................... 435
Authorized Manuals (U.S. only) (how to order) ................................................................................... 439
Index ................................................................................................................................................. I
Service Information Summary (fluid capacities and tire pressures)

00X31-TA5-6300 (AOM46996)
© 2010 American Honda Motor Co., Inc. - All Rights Reserved

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 15:41:52 31TA5630_007

Overview of Contents
Contents
A convenient reference to the
sections in this manual.
Your Vehicle at a Glance
A quick reference to the main
controls in your vehicle.
Driver and Passenger Safety
Important information about the
proper use and care of your vehicle’s
seat belts, an overview of the
supplemental restraint system, and
valuable information on how to
protect children with child restraints.
Instruments and Controls
Explains the purpose of each
instrument panel indicator and gauge,
and how to use the controls on the
dashboard and steering column.
Features
How to operate the climate control
system, the audio system, and other
convenience features.

Before Driving
What gasoline to use, how to breakin your new vehicle, and how to load
luggage and other cargo.
Driving
The proper way to start the engine,
shift the transmission, and park; plus
what you need to know if you’re
planning to tow a trailer.
Maintenance
The Maintenance MinderTM shows
you when you need to take your
vehicle to the dealer for maintenance
service. There is also a list of things
to check and instructions on how to
check them.

Technical Information
ID numbers, dimensions, capacities,
and technical information.
Warranty and Customer
Relations
(U.S. and Canada only)
A summary of the warranties
covering your new vehicle, and how
to contact us for any reason. Refer to
your warranty manual for detailed
information.
Authorized Manuals
(U.S. only)
How to order manuals and other
technical literature.
Index

Taking Care of the Unexpected
This section covers several problems
motorists sometimes experience,
and details how to handle them.

2011 Accord Sedan

Service Information Summary
A summary of the information you
need when you pull up to the fuel
pump.

10/06/18 15:42:02 31TA5630_008

Your Vehicle at a Glance
MOONROOF SWITCH＊
(P.110)

HOMELINK BUTTONS＊
(P.266)

MIRROR CONTROL
AUTO BUTTON＊
(P.104)

DRIVER’S FRONT
AIRBAG (P.9, 23)

CLOCK (P.254)
COMPASS＊ (P.259)

DRIVING POSITION
MEMORY SYSTEM
BUTTONS＊ (P.101)

PASSENGER’S
FRONT AIRBAG
(P.9, 23)

MIRROR CONTROLS
(P.105)

HEATING/COOLING
CONTROLS (P.122)
CLIMATE CONTROL
SYSTEM (P.128)

POWER DOOR LOCK
MASTER SWITCH
(P.79)

AUDIO SYSTEM
(P.136)

POWER WINDOW
SWITCHES
(P.106)

MANUAL
TRANSMISSION
(P.318)
AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
(P.320)

HOOD RELEASE
HANDLE (P.300)
TRUNK RELEASE
LEVER (P.90)
FUEL FILL DOOR RELEASE
LEVER (P.297)
USB ADAPTER CABLE＊
ACCESSORY POWER
SOCKET (P.114)
(P.176, 185, 226, 235)
U.S. EX-L V6 model without navigation system is shown.

＊:

Your Vehicle at a Glance

INSTRUMENT PANEL
INDICATORS (P.55)
GAUGES (P.63)

AUXILIARY INPUT
JACK (P.252)

ACCESSORY
POWER SOCKET
(P.115)

If equipped

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 15:42:10 31TA5630_009

Your Vehicle at a Glance

INSTRUMENT PANEL BRIGHTNESS
(P.72)

WINDSHIELD WIPERS/WASHERS
(P.68)

HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS/
FOG LIGHTS＊2
(P.69, 72)

PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR
(P.30)
HAZARD WARNING
BUTTON
(P.73)
INTERFACE DIAL＊3
(P.194)

REMOTE AUDIO CONTROLS
(P.250)

VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST
(VSA) SYSTEM OFF SWITCH
(P.330)

BLUETOOTH
HANDSFREELINK VOICE
CONTROL BUTTONS＊2
(P.270)

REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER/
HEATED MIRROR BUTTON＊2
(P.74, 105)
HORN＊1
SEAT HEATER SWITCHES＊2 (P.100)

NAVIGATION SYSTEM VOICE
CONTROL BUTTONS＊3

CRUISE CONTROL BUTTONS(P.263)
STEERING WHEEL ADJUSTMENTS(P.75)

＊1 : To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel.
＊2 : If equipped
＊3 : Only on vehicles equipped with navigation system. Refer to the navigation system manual.

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 15:42:15 31TA5630_010

Driver and Passenger Safety

Important Safety Precautions .......... 6
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features........ 7
Seat Belts ........................................ 8
Airbags ............................................ 9
Protecting Adults and Teens.......... 11
1. Close and Lock the Doors ...... 11
2. Adjust the Front Seats ............ 11
3. Adjust the Seat-Backs ............. 12
4. Adjust the Head Restraints .... 13
5. Fasten and Position the
Seat Belts .............................. 14
6. Maintain a Proper Sitting
Position ................................. 15
Advice for Pregnant Women...... 16
Additional Safety Precautions .... 17

Additional Information About
Your Seat Belts ........................ 18
Seat Belt System Components ... 18
Lap/Shoulder Belt ....................... 19
Automatic Seat Belt
Tensioners ................................ 19
Seat Belt Maintenance ................ 20
Additional Information About
Your Airbags ............................ 21
Airbag System Components ....... 21
How Your Front Airbags
Work.......................................... 23
How Your Side Airbags Work.... 27
How Your Side Curtain Airbags
Work.......................................... 29
How the SRS Indicator Works ... 29
How the Side Airbag Off
Indicator Works ....................... 30
How the Passenger Airbag Off
Indicator Works ....................... 30
Airbag Service .............................. 31
Additional Safety Precautions .... 32
Protecting Children − General
Guidelines ................................. 33
All Children Must Be
Restrained ................................ 33

All Children Should Sit in a
Back Seat .................................. 34
The Passenger’s Front Airbag
Can Pose Serious Risks .......... 34
If You Must Drive with Several
Children .................................... 36
If a Child Requires Close
Attention ................................... 36
Additional Safety Precautions .... 36
Protecting Infants and
Small Children.......................... 38
Protecting Infants ........................ 38
Protecting Small Children .......... 39
Selecting a Child Seat ...................... 40
Installing a Child Seat ..................... 41
With LATCH ................................ 42
With a Lap/Shoulder Belt .......... 44
With a Tether ............................... 46
Protecting Larger Children ............ 47
Checking Seat Belt Fit ................ 47
Using a Booster Seat ................... 48
When Can a Larger Child Sit in
Front .......................................... 49
Additional Safety Precautions .... 50
Carbon Monoxide Hazard .............. 51
Safety Labels .................................... 52

2011 Accord Sedan

Driver and Passenger Safety

This section gives you important
information about how to protect
yourself and your passengers. It
shows you how to use seat belts. It
explains how your airbags work. And
it tells you how to properly restrain
infants and children in your vehicle.

10/06/18 15:42:25 31TA5630_011

Important Safety Precautions
You’ll find many safety
recommendations throughout this
section, and throughout this manual.
The recommendations on this page
are the ones we consider to be the
most important.
Always Wear Your Seat Belt
A seat belt is your best protection in
all types of collisions. Airbags are
designed to supplement seat belts,
not replace them. So even though
your vehicle is equipped with airbags,
make sure you and your passengers
always wear your seat belts, and
wear them properly (see page 14 ).
Restrain All Children
Children age 12 and under should
ride properly restrained in a back
seat, not the front seat. Infants and
small children should be restrained
in a child seat. Larger children
should use a booster seat and a lap/
shoulder belt until they can use the
belt properly without a booster seat
(see pages 33 − 50 ).

Be Aware of Airbag Hazards
While airbags can save lives, they
can cause serious or fatal injuries to
occupants who sit too close to them,
or are not properly restrained.
Infants, young children, and short
adults are at the greatest risk. Be
sure to follow all instructions and
warnings in this manual.
Don’t Drink and Drive
Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Even
one drink can reduce your ability to
respond to changing conditions, and
your reaction time gets worse with
every additional drink. So don’t drink
and drive, and don’t let your friends
drink and drive, either.
Pay Appropriate Attention to the
Task of Driving Safely
Engaging in mobile phone
conversation or other activities that
keep you from paying close attention

2011 Accord Sedan

to the road, other vehicles and
pedestrians could lead to a crash.
Remember, situations can change
quickly, and only you can decide
when it is safe to divert attention
away from driving.
Control Your Speed
Excessive speed is a major factor in
crash injuries and deaths. Generally,
the higher the speed, the greater the
risk, but serious injuries can also
occur at lower speeds. Never drive
faster than is safe for current
conditions, regardless of the
maximum speed posted.
Keep Your Vehicle in Safe
Condition
Having a tire blowout or a
mechanical failure can be extremely
hazardous. To reduce the possibility
of such problems, check your tire
pressures and condition frequently,
and perform all regularly scheduled
maintenance (see page 349 ).

10/06/18 15:42:31 31TA5630_012

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
(8) (6) (9)

(12) (3)

(9)
(4)
(7)

(7)

(8)
(10)
(11)
(5)
(1)

(2)

(1) Safety Cage
(2) Crush Zones
(3) Seats and Seat-Backs
(4) Head Restraints
(5) Collapsible Steering Column
(6) Seat Belts
(7) Front Airbags
(8) Side Airbags
(9) Side Curtain Airbags
(10) Door Locks
(11) Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners
(12) Occupant Position Detection
System (OPDS) Sensors

Some features do not require any
action on your part. These include a
strong steel framework that forms a
safety cage around the passenger
compartment, front and rear crush
zones, a collapsible steering column,
and tensioners that tighten the front
seat belts in a crash.
However, you and your passengers
can’t take full advantage of these
features unless you remain sitting in
the correct position and always wear
your seat belts. In fact, some safety
features can contribute to injuries if
they are not used properly.
The following pages explain how you
can take an active role in protecting
yourself and your passengers.

2011 Accord Sedan

Driver and Passenger Safety

(10)

Your vehicle is equipped with many
features that work together to
protect you and your passengers
during a crash.

10/06/18 15:42:43 31TA5630_013

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
Seat Belts
Your vehicle is equipped with seat
belts in all seating positions.
Your seat belt system also includes
an indicator on the instrument panel
and a beeper to remind you and your
passengers to fasten your seat belts.
Why Wear Seat Belts

Seat belts are the single most
effective safety device for adults and
larger children. (Infants and smaller
children must be properly restrained
in child seats.)
Not wearing a seat belt properly
increases the chance of serious
injury or death in a crash, even
though your vehicle has airbags.
In addition, most states and all
Canadian provinces and territories
require you to wear seat belts.

Not wearing a seat belt properly
increases the chance of serious
injury or death in a crash, even
though your vehicle has airbags.
Be sure you and your
passengers always wear seat
belts and wear them properly.
When properly worn, seat belts:
Keep you connected to the vehicle
so you can take advantage of the
vehicle’s built-in safety features.
Help protect you in almost every
type of crash, including:
− frontal impacts
− side impacts
− rear impacts
− rollovers

2011 Accord Sedan

Help keep you from being thrown
against the inside of the vehicle
and against other occupants.
Keep you from being thrown out
of the vehicle.
Help keep you in a good position
should the airbags ever deploy. A
good position reduces the risk of
injury from an inflating airbag and
allows you to get the best
advantage from the airbag.
Of course, seat belts cannot
completely protect you in every
crash. But in most cases, seat belts
can reduce your risk of serious
injury.
What You Should Do:

Always wear your seat belt, and
make sure you wear it properly.

10/06/18 15:42:51 31TA5630_014

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
Airbags

Your vehicle also has side airbags to
help protect the upper torso of the
driver or a front seat passenger
during a moderate to severe side
impact (see page 27 for more
information on how your side airbags
work).

In addition, your vehicle has side
curtain airbags to help protect the
heads of the driver, front passenger,
and passengers in the outer rear
seating positions during a moderate
to severe side impact (see page 29
for more information on how
your side curtain airbags work).

CONTINUED

2011 Accord Sedan

Driver and Passenger Safety

Your vehicle has a supplemental
restraint system (SRS) with front
airbags to help protect the heads and
chests of the driver and a front seat
passenger during a moderate to
severe frontal collision (see page 23
for more information on how
your front airbags work).

10/06/18 15:42:57 31TA5630_015

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
The most important things you need
to know about your airbags are:
Airbags do not replace seat belts.

They are designed to supplement
the seat belts.
Airbags offer no protection in rear
collisions, or minor frontal or side
collisions.

What you should do: Always wear
your seat belt properly, and sit
upright and as far back from the
steering wheel as possible while
allowing full control of the vehicle. A
front passenger should move their
seat as far back from the dashboard
as possible.

Airbags can pose serious hazards.

To do their job, airbags must
inflate with tremendous force. So
while airbags help save lives, they
can cause minor injuries or more
serious or even fatal injuries if
occupants are not properly
restrained or sitting properly.

2011 Accord Sedan

The rest of this section gives more
detailed information about how you
can maximize your safety.
Remember, however, that no safety
system can prevent all injuries or
deaths that can occur in a severe
crash, even when seat belts are
properly worn and the airbags deploy.

10/06/18 15:43:07 31TA5630_016

Protecting Adults and Teens

See pages 33 − 50 for important
guidelines on how to properly
protect infants, small children, and
larger children who ride in your
vehicle.
1.Close and Lock the Doors
After everyone has entered the
vehicle, be sure the doors are closed
and locked.
Your vehicle has a door and
trunk open indicator on the
instrument panel to indicate when a
specific door or the trunk is not
tightly closed.

Locking the doors reduces the
chance of someone being thrown out
of the vehicle during a crash, and it
helps prevent passengers from
accidentally opening a door and
falling out.

2.Adjust the Front Seats

Driver and Passenger Safety

Introduction
The following pages provide
instructions on how to properly
protect the driver, adult passengers,
and teenage children who are large
enough and mature enough to drive
or ride in the front.

Locking the doors also helps prevent
an outsider from unexpectedly
opening a door when you come to a
stop.
See page 79 for how to lock the
doors, and page 60 for how the door
and trunk open monitor system
works.
Your vehicle has a programmable
auto door locking/unlocking feature.
For more information, see page 80.

Adjust the driver’s seat as far to the
rear as possible while allowing you to
maintain full control of the vehicle.
Have a front passenger adjust their
seat as far to the rear as possible.

CONTINUED

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 15:43:16 31TA5630_017

Protecting Adults and Teens
If you sit too close to the steering
wheel or dashboard, you can be
seriously injured by an inflating front
airbag, or by striking the steering
wheel or dashboard.
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport
Canada recommend that drivers
allow at least 10 inches (25 cm)
between the center of the steering
wheel and the chest. In addition to
adjusting the seat, you can adjust the
steering wheel up and down, and in
and out (see page 75 ).
If you cannot get far enough away
from the steering wheel and still
reach the controls, we recommend
that you investigate whether some
type of adaptive equipment may help.

3.Adjust the Seat-Backs
Sitting too close to a front
airbag can result in serious
injury or death if the front
airbags inflate.
Always sit as far back from the
front airbags as possible.
On manual adjustable seats

Once your seat is adjusted correctly,
rock it back and forth to make sure
the seat is locked in position.
See page 92 for how to adjust a
front seat (power adjustment) and
page 93 for a manual adjustment.

Adjust the driver’s seat-back to a
comfortable, upright position,
leaving ample space between your
chest and the airbag cover in the
center of the steering wheel.
Passengers with adjustable seatbacks should also adjust their
seat-back to a comfortable,
upright position.

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 15:43:27 31TA5630_018

Protecting Adults and Teens
4.Adjust the Head Restraints

Adjust the seat-back to an
upright position, and sit well
back in the seat.
Reclining a seat-back so that the
shoulder part of the belt no longer
rests against the occupant’s chest
reduces the protective capability of
the belt. It also increases the chance
of sliding under the belt in a crash
and being seriously injured. The
farther a seat-back is reclined, the
greater the risk of injury.
See page 93 for how to adjust the
manual adjustable seat-back, and
page 92 for the power adjustable
seat-back.

Make sure head restraints are
in place and positioned properly
before driving.

Adjust the driver’s head restraint so
the center of the back of your head
rests against the center of the
restraint.
Have passengers adjust their head
restraints properly as well. Taller
persons should adjust their restraint
as high as possible.

Properly adjusted head restraints
will help protect occupants from
whiplash and other crash injuries.
See page 95 for how to adjust the
head restraints and how the driver’s
and front passenger’s active head
restraints work.

2011 Accord Sedan

Driver and Passenger Safety

Improperly positioning head
restraints reduces their
effectiveness and you can be
seriously injured in a crash.

Reclining the seat-back too far
can result in serious injury or
death in a crash.

10/06/18 15:43:34 31TA5630_019

Protecting Adults and Teens
This spreads the forces of a crash
over the strongest bones in your
upper body.

5.Fasten and Position the Seat
Belts
Insert the latch plate into the buckle,
then tug on the belt to make sure the
belt is securely latched. Check that
the belt is not twisted, because a
twisted belt can cause serious
injuries in a crash.

Improperly positioning the seat
belts can cause serious injury
or death in a crash.
Make sure all seat belts are
properly positioned before
driving.
Position the lap part of the belt as
low as possible across your hips,
then pull up on the shoulder part of
the belt so the lap part fits snugly.
This lets your strong pelvic bones
take the force of a crash and reduces
the chance of internal injuries.
If necessary, pull up on the belt again
to remove any slack, then check that
the belt rests across the center of
your chest and over your shoulder.

2011 Accord Sedan

If the seat belt touches or crosses
your neck, or if it crosses your arm
instead of your shoulder, you need to
adjust the seat belt anchor height.

10/06/18 15:43:42 31TA5630_020

Protecting Adults and Teens
RELEASE BUTTON

Never place the shoulder portion of a
lap/shoulder belt under your arm or
behind your back. This could cause

If a seat belt does not seem to work
properly, it may not protect the
occupant in a crash.
No one should sit in a seat with an
inoperative seat belt. Using a seat

The front seats have adjustable seat
belt anchors. To adjust the height of
an anchor, press and hold the release
button and slide the anchor up or
down as needed (it has four
positions).

belt that is not working properly can
result in serious injury or death.
Have your dealer check the belt as
soon as possible.
See page 18 for additional
information about your seat belts
and how to take care of them.

Sitting improperly can increase the
chance of injury during a crash. For
example, if an occupant slouches,
lies down, turns sideways, sits
forward, leans forward or sideways,
or puts one or both feet up, the
chance of injury during a crash is
greatly increased.

CONTINUED

2011 Accord Sedan

Driver and Passenger Safety

very serious injuries in a crash.

6.Maintain a Proper Sitting
Position
After all occupants have adjusted
their seats and head restraints, and
put on their seat belts, it is very
important that they continue to sit
upright, well back in their seats, with
their feet on the floor, until the
vehicle is safely parked and the
engine is off.

10/06/18 15:43:49 31TA5630_021

Protecting Adults and Teens
In addition, an occupant who is out of
position in the front seat can be
seriously or fatally injured in a crash
by striking interior parts of the
vehicle or being struck by an
inflating front airbag.

Advice for Pregnant Women

This will reduce the risk of injuries
to both you and your unborn child
that can be caused by a crash or an
inflating front airbag.

Sitting improperly or out of
position can result in serious
injury or death in a crash.
Always sit upright, well back in
the seat, with your feet on the
floor.

When driving, remember to sit
upright and adjust the seat as far
back as possible while allowing full
control of the vehicle. When riding
as a front passenger, adjust the seat
as far back as possible.

If you are pregnant, the best way to
protect yourself and your unborn
child when driving or riding in a
vehicle is to always wear a seat belt,
and keep the lap part of the belt as
low as possible across the hips.

2011 Accord Sedan

Each time you have a checkup,
ask, your doctor if it’s okay for you
to drive.

10/06/18 15:43:56 31TA5630_022

Protecting Adults and Teens
Additional Safety Precautions

could be very seriously injured in
a crash.
Do not put any accessories on seat
belts. Devices intended to improve

occupant comfort or reposition the
shoulder part of a seat belt can
reduce the protective capability of
the belt and increase the chance of
serious injury in a crash.
Do not place hard or sharp objects
between yourself and a front
airbag. Carrying hard or sharp

objects on your lap, or driving with
a pipe or other sharp object in
your mouth, can result in injuries
if your front airbag inflates.

hands or arms are close to an
airbag cover, they could be injured
if the airbag inflates.
Do not attach or place objects on
the front airbag covers. Objects on

Do not cover or replace front seatback covers without consulting
your dealer. Improperly replacing

or covering front seat-back covers
can prevent your side airbags from
inflating during a side impact.

the covers marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’
could interfere with the proper
operation of the airbags or be
propelled inside the vehicle and
hurt someone if the airbags inflate.
Do not attach hard objects on or
near a door. If a side airbag or a

side curtain airbag inflates, a cup
holder or other hard object
attached on or near the door could
be propelled inside the vehicle and
hurt someone.

2011 Accord Sedan

Driver and Passenger Safety

Two people should never use the
same seat belt. If they do, they

Keep your hands and arms away
from the airbag covers. If your

10/06/18 15:44:05 31TA5630_023

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Seat Belt System Components
Your seat belt system includes lap/
shoulder belts in all seating positions.
The front seat belts are also
equipped with automatic seat belt
tensioners.
The seat belt system
includes an indicator on the
instrument panel and a beeper to
remind you and your passengers to
fasten your seat belts.
This system monitors the front seat
belts. If you turn the ignition switch
to the ON (II) position before your
seat belt is fastened, the beeper will
sound and the indicator will flash. If
your seat belt is not fastened before
the beeper stops, the indicator will
stop flashing but remain on.

If a front passenger does not fasten
their seat belt, the indicator will
come on about 6 seconds after the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
(II) position.
If either the driver or a front
passenger does not fasten their seat
belt while driving, the beeper will
sound and the indicator will flash
again at regular intervals.
When no one is sitting in the front
passenger’s seat, or a child or small
adult is riding there, the indicator
should not come on and the beeper
should not sound.

2011 Accord Sedan

If the indicator comes on or the
beeper sounds when the driver’s seat
belt is latched and there is no front
seat passenger and no items on the
front seat, something may be
interfering with the monitoring
system. Look for and remove:
Any items under the front
passenger’s seat.
Any object(s) hanging on the seat
or in the seat-back pocket.
Any object(s) touching the rear of
the seat-back.
If no obstructions are found, have
your vehicle checked by a dealer.

10/06/18 15:44:15 31TA5630_024

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

To fasten the belt, insert the latch
plate into the buckle, then tug on the
belt to make sure the buckle is
latched (see page 14 for how to
properly position the belt).
To unlock the belt, press the red
PRESS button on the buckle. Guide
the belt across your body so that it
retracts completely. After exiting
the vehicle, be sure the belt is out
of the way and will not get closed
in the door.

All seat belts have an emergency
locking retractor. In normal driving,
the retractor lets you move freely in
your seat while it keeps some
tension on the belt. During a collision
or sudden stop, the retractor
automatically locks the belt to help
restrain your body.

Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners

Driver and Passenger Safety

Lap/Shoulder Belt
The lap and shoulder belt goes over
your shoulder, across your chest,
and across your hips.

The seat belts in all positions except
the driver’s have a lockable retractor
that must be activated to secure a
child seat (see page 44 ).
If the shoulder part of the belt is
pulled all the way out, the lockable
retractor will activate. The belt will
retract, but it will not allow the
passenger to move freely.

For added protection, the front seat
belts are equipped with automatic
seat belt tensioners. When activated,
the tensioners immediately tighten
the belts to help hold the driver and
a front passenger in position.

To deactivate the lockable retractor,
unlatch the buckle and let the seat
belt fully retract. To refasten the
seat belt, pull it out only as far as
needed.
CONTINUED

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 15:44:22 31TA5630_025

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
The tensioners can be activated
during a collision in which the front
airbags do not deploy. In this case, the
airbags would not be needed, but the
additional restraint could be helpful.
If the tensioner is activated, the SRS
indicator comes on and the tensioner
must be replaced.

Seat Belt Maintenance
For safety, you should check the
condition of your seat belts regularly.
Pull each belt out fully, and look for
frays, cuts, burns, and wear. Check
that the latches work smoothly and
the belts retract easily. If a belt does
not retract easily, cleaning the belt
may correct the problem (see
page 375 ). Any belt that is not in
good condition or working properly
will not provide good protection
and should be replaced as soon
as possible.
Honda provides a limited warranty
on seat belts. See your Honda
Warranty Information booklet for
details.
If a seat belt is worn during a crash,
it must be replaced by the dealer. A
belt that has been worn during a
crash may not provide the same level
of protection in a subsequent crash.

2011 Accord Sedan

The dealer should also inspect the
anchors for damage and replace
them if needed. If the automatic seat
belt tensioners activate during a
crash, they must be replaced.

Not checking or maintaining
seat belts can result in serious
injury or death if the seat belts
do not work properly when
needed.
Check your seat belts regularly
and have any problem
corrected as soon as possible.

10/06/18 15:44:28 31TA5630_026

Additional Information About Your Airbags
Airbag System Components

(9)

(8)

(11)

(2)

Driver and Passenger Safety

(13)

(14)

(1)
(8)

(5)
(3)

(1) Driver’s Front Airbag
(2) Passenger’s Front Airbag
(5)
(3) Control Unit
(4) Front Seat Belt Tensioners
(5) Side Airbags
(6) Driver’s Seat Position Sensor
(6)
(7) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors
(8) Front Impact Sensors
(9) Passenger Airbag Off Indicator
(10) Side Impact Sensors (First)
(11) Occupant Position Detection System (OPDS) Sensors
(12) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors Control Unit/
OPDS Sensors Control Unit
(13) SRS Indicator
(14) Side Curtain Airbags
(15) Safing Sensor
(16) Side Impact Sensors (Second)

(4)
(16)
(7) (12)
(10)

(15)
(4)

(14)

(16)
CONTINUED

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 15:44:37 31TA5630_027

Additional Information About Your Airbags
Your airbag system includes:
Two SRS (supplemental restraint
system) front airbags. The driver’s
airbag is stored in the center of
the steering wheel; the front
passenger’s airbag is stored in the
dashboard. Both are marked ‘‘SRS
AIRBAG’’ (see page 23 ).
Two side airbags, one for the
driver and one for a front
passenger. The airbags are stored
in the outer edges of the seatbacks. Both are marked ‘‘SIDE
AIRBAG’’ (see page 27 ).
Two side curtain airbags, one for
each side of the vehicle. The
airbags are stored in the ceiling
above the side windows. The front
and rear pillars are marked ‘‘SIDE
CURTAIN AIRBAG’’ (see page 29).

Automatic front seat belt
tensioners (see page 19 ).
Sensors that can detect a
moderate to severe front impact or
side impact.
Sensors that can detect whether a
child is in the passenger’s side
airbag path and signal the control
unit to turn the airbag off (see
page 28 ).
Sensors that can detect whether
the driver’s seat belt and the front
passenger’s seat belt are latched
or unlatched (see page 18 ).
A driver’s seat position sensor that
monitors the distance of the seat
from the front airbag. If the seat is
too far forward, the airbag will
inflate with less force (see page 26).

2011 Accord Sedan

Weight sensors that monitor the
weight on the front passenger’s
seat. If the weight is about 65 lbs
(29 kg) or less (the weight of an
infant or small child), the
passenger’s front airbag will be
turned off (see page 26 ).
A sophisticated electronic system
that continually monitors and
records information about the
sensors, the control unit, the
airbag activators, the seat belt
tensioners, and driver and front
passenger seat belt use when the
ignition switch is in the ON (II)
position.
An indicator on the instrument
panel that alerts you to a possible
problem with your airbag system
components (see page 29 ).

10/06/18 15:44:45 31TA5630_028

Additional Information About Your Airbags
How Your Front Airbags Work

During a frontal crash, your seat belt
restrains your lower body and torso,
and the front airbag helps protect
your head and chest.

An indicator on the dashboard that
alerts you that the passenger’s
front airbag has been turned off
(see page 30 ).

Although both airbags normally
inflate within a split second of each
other, it is possible for only one
airbag to deploy.

Emergency backup power in case
your vehicle’s electrical system is
disconnected in a crash.

This can happen if the severity of a
collision is at the margin, or
threshold, that determines whether
or not the airbags will deploy. In
such cases, the seat belt will provide
sufficient protection, and the
supplemental protection offered by
the airbag would be minimal.

If you ever have a moderate to
severe frontal collision, sensors will
detect the vehicle’s rapid
deceleration.
If the rate of deceleration is high
enough, the control unit will inflate
the driver’s and front passenger’s
airbags, at the time and with the
force needed.

CONTINUED

2011 Accord Sedan

Driver and Passenger Safety

An indicator on the instrument
panel that alerts you that the
passenger’s side airbag has been
turned off (see page 30 ).

10/06/18 15:44:50 31TA5630_029

Additional Information About Your Airbags
After a crash, you may see what
looks like smoke. This is actually
powder from the airbag’s surface.
Although the powder is not harmful,
people with respiratory problems
may experience some temporary
discomfort. If this occurs, get out
of the vehicle as soon as it is safe
to do so.

Only the driver’s airbag can deploy if
there is no passenger in the front
seat, or if the advanced airbag
system has turned the passenger’s
airbag off (see page 25 ).

After inflating, the front airbags
immediately deflate, so they won’t
interfere with the driver’s visibility,
or the ability to steer or operate
other controls.
The total time for inflation and
deflation is one-tenth of a second, so
fast that most occupants are not
aware that the airbags deployed until
they see them lying in their laps.

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 15:44:58 31TA5630_030

Additional Information About Your Airbags
Dual-Stage, Multiple-Threshold
Front Airbags (SRS)

Failure to follow these instructions
could damage the sensors or prevent
them from working properly.
Driver and Passenger Safety

Your vehicle is equipped with dualstage, multiple-threshold front
airbags (SRS). During a frontal crash
severe enough to cause one or both
front airbags to deploy, the airbags
can inflate at different rates,
depending on the severity of the
crash, whether or not the seat belts
are latched, and/or other factors.
Front airbags are designed to
supplement the seat belts to help
reduce the likelihood of head and
chest injuries in frontal crashes.

Advanced Airbags

Your front airbags are also advanced
airbags. The main purpose of this
feature is to help prevent airbagcaused injuries to short drivers and
children or small-statured adults who
ride in front.
For both advanced airbags to work
properly:
Occupants must sit upright and
wear their seat belts properly.
Do not spill any liquids on or
under the seats, cover the sensors,
or put any objects or metal items
under the front seats.
Objects placed or pushed under
the front passenger’s seat may
cause the sensor to malfunction,
increasing the risk of injury in a
crash.

CONTINUED

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 15:45:05 31TA5630_031

Additional Information About Your Airbags
Be aware that objects placed on the
passenger’s seat can also cause the
airbag to be turned off.

The driver’s advanced front airbag
system includes a seat position
sensor under the seat. If the seat is
too far forward, the airbag will
inflate with less force, regardless of
the severity of the impact.

When the passenger airbag gets
turned off by the weight sensors, a
‘‘passenger airbag off’’ indicator in
the center of the dashboard comes
on (see page 30 ).
PASSENGER’S SEAT WEIGHT
SENSORS

DRIVER’S SEAT POSITION SENSOR

If there is a problem with the sensor,
the SRS indicator will come on, and
the airbag will inflate in the normal
manner regardless of the driver’s
seating position.

The passenger’s advanced front
airbag system has weight sensors
under the seat. Although Honda
does not encourage carrying an
infant or small child in front, if the
sensors detect the weight of an
infant or small child (up to about 65
lbs or 29 kg), the system will
automatically turn the passenger’s
front airbag off.

2011 Accord Sedan

If the weight sensors detect there is
no passenger in the front seat, the
airbag is automatically turned off.
However, the passenger airbag off
indicator in this situation will not
come on.

10/06/18 15:45:13 31TA5630_032

Additional Information About Your Airbags
To ensure that the passenger’s
advanced front airbag system will
work properly, do not do anything
This includes:
A rear passenger pushing or
pulling on the back of the front
passenger’s seat.
Moving the front seat or seat-back
forcibly back against cargo on the
seat or floor behind it.

How Your Side Airbags Work

Driver and Passenger Safety

that would increase or decrease the
weight on the front passenger’s seat.

Back seat passengers should not
wedge objects or intentionally
force their feet under the front
passenger seat.
Also, make sure the floor mat
behind the front passenger’s seat
is properly positioned on the floor
(see page 375 ). If it is not, the mat
may interfere with the proper
operation of the front passenger’s
seat and its sensors.

Hanging heavy items on the front
passenger seat, or placing heavy
items in the seat-back pocket.

If you ever have a moderate to
severe side impact, sensors will
detect rapid acceleration and signal
the control unit to instantly inflate
either the driver’s or the passenger’s
side airbag.

Moving the front seat or seat-back
forcibly back against the folded
rear seat.

CONTINUED

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 15:45:20 31TA5630_033

Additional Information About Your Airbags
Only one airbag will deploy during a
side impact. If the impact is on the
passenger’s side, the passenger’s
side airbag will deploy even if there
is no passenger.
To get the best protection from the
side airbags, front seat occupants
should wear their seat belts and sit
upright and well back in their seats.

Side Airbag Cutoff System

Your vehicle has a side airbag
cutoff system designed primarily
to protect a child riding in the front
passenger’s seat.
Although Honda does not
encourage children to ride in front,
if the position sensors detect a
child has leaned into the side
airbag’s deployment path, the
airbag will shut off.
The side airbag may also shut off if a
short adult leans sideways, or a
larger adult slouches and leans
sideways into the airbag’s
deployment path.
Objects placed on the front
passenger seat can also cause the
side airbag to be shut off.

2011 Accord Sedan

If the side airbag off indicator comes
on (see page 30 ), have the
passenger sit upright. Once the
passenger is out of the airbag’s
deployment path, the system will
turn the airbag back on, and the
indicator will go out.
There will be some delay between
the moment the passenger moves
into or out of the airbag deployment
path and when the indicator comes
on or goes off.
A front seat passenger should not
use a cushion or another object as a
backrest. It may prevent the cutoff
system from working properly.

10/06/18 15:45:30 31TA5630_034

Additional Information About Your Airbags
How Your Side Curtain Airbags
Work

One or both side curtain airbags may
inflate in a moderate to severe
frontal collision which causes the
front airbags to deploy.

SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG

To get the best protection from the
side curtain airbags, occupants
should wear their seat belts and sit
upright and well back in their seats.

In a moderate to severe side impact,
sensors will detect rapid acceleration
and signal the control unit to
instantly inflate the side curtain
airbag.

How the SRS Indicator
Works
The SRS indicator alerts you to a
potential problem with your airbag
system components.
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, this indicator
comes on briefly then goes off. This
tells you the system is working
properly.
If the indicator comes on at any
other time, or does not come on at all,
you should have the system checked
by your dealer. For example:
If the SRS indicator does not come
on after you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position.
If the indicator stays on after the
engine starts.

If the indicator comes on or
flashes on and off while you drive.
CONTINUED

2011 Accord Sedan

Driver and Passenger Safety

If the impact is on the passenger’s
side, the passenger’s side curtain
airbag will inflate even if there are no
occupants on that side of the vehicle.

10/06/18 15:45:39 31TA5630_035

Additional Information About Your Airbags
If you see any of these indications,
the airbag system components may
not work properly when you need
them.

Ignoring the SRS indicator can
result in serious injury or death
if the airbag systems or
tensioners do not work properly.
Have your vehicle checked by a
dealer as soon as possible if
the SRS indicator alerts you to
a possible problem.

U.S.

Canada

How the Side Airbag Off
Indicator Works
This indicator alerts you that the
passenger’s side airbag has been
automatically shut off. It does not
mean there is a problem with your
side airbags.
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, the indicator
should come on briefly and then go
out (see page 57 ). If it doesn’t come
on, stays on, or comes on while
driving without a passenger in the
front seat, have the system checked.

2011 Accord Sedan

How the Passenger Airbag Off
Indicator Works

U.S. Canada

PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR

This indicator alerts you that the
passenger’s front airbag has been
shut off because weight sensors
detect about 65 lbs (29 kg) or less
(the weight of an infant or small
child) on the front passenger’s seat.
It does not mean there is a problem
with the airbag.

10/06/18 15:45:48 31TA5630_036

Additional Information About Your Airbags
Be aware that objects placed on the
front seat can cause the indicator to
come on.

The passenger airbag off indicator
may come on and off repeatedly if
the total weight on the seat is near
the airbag cutoff threshold.
If an adult or teenage passenger is
riding in front, move the seat as far
to the rear as possible, and have the
passenger sit upright and wear the
seat belt properly.

Any items under the front
passenger’s seat.
Any object hanging on the seat or
in the seat-back pocket.
Any object(s) touching the rear of
the seat-back.
If no obstructions are found, have
your vehicle checked by a dealer as
soon as possible.

Airbag Service
Your airbag systems are virtually
maintenance free, and there are no
parts you can safely service.
However, you must have your
vehicle serviced if:
An airbag ever inflates. Any airbag
that has deployed must be
replaced along with the control
unit and other related parts. Any
seat belt tensioner that activates
must also be replaced.

Do not try to remove or replace
any airbag by yourself. This must
be done by an authorized dealer or
a knowledgeable body shop.

CONTINUED

2011 Accord Sedan

Driver and Passenger Safety

If no weight is detected on the front
seat, the airbag will be automatically
shut off. However, the indicator will
not come on.

If the indicator comes on with no
front seat passenger and no objects
on the seat, or with an adult riding
there, something may be interfering
with the weight sensors. Look for
and remove:

10/06/18 15:45:54 31TA5630_037

Additional Information About Your Airbags
The SRS indicator alerts you to a
problem. Take your vehicle to an

authorized dealer as soon as
possible. If you ignore this
indication, your airbags may not
operate properly.
If your vehicle has a moderate to
severe impact. Even if your

airbags do not inflate, your dealer
should inspect the driver’s seat
position sensor, the front
passenger’s weight sensors, the
front seat belt tensioners, and all
seat belts and their anchors worn
during a crash to make sure they
are operating properly.

Additional Safety Precautions
Do not attempt to deactivate your
airbags. Together, airbags and

seat belts provide the best
protection.
Do not tamper with airbag
components or wiring for any
reason. Tampering could cause

the airbags to deploy, possibly
causing very serious injury.
Do not expose the front passenger’s
seat-back to liquid. If water or

another liquid soaks into a seatback, it can prevent the side airbag
cutoff system from working
properly.

2011 Accord Sedan

Do not remove or modify a front
seat without consulting your
dealer. This could make the

driver’s seat position sensor or the
front passenger’s weight sensors
ineffective. If it is necessary to
remove or modify a front seat to
accommodate a person with
disabilities, first contact Honda
Automobile Customer Service at
(800) 999-1009 in the US, or
Honda Customer Relations at
1-888-9-HONDA-9 in Canada.

10/06/18 15:46:01 31TA5630_038

Protecting Children − General Guidelines

Children depend on adults to protect
them. However, despite their best
intentions, many adults do not know
how to properly protect child
passengers.
If you have children, or ever need to
drive with a child in your vehicle, be
sure to read this section. It begins
with important general guidelines,
then presents special information for
infants, small children, and larger
children.

To reduce the number of child
deaths and injuries, every state,
Canadian province and territory
requires that infants and children be
properly restrained when they ride in
a vehicle.
Infants and small children must be
restrained in an approved child seat
that is properly secured to the
vehicle (see pages 38 − 46 ).

Children who are unrestrained
or improperly restrained can be
seriously injured or killed in a
crash.
Any child too small for a seat
belt should be properly
restrained in a child seat. A
larger child should be properly
restrained with a seat belt and
use a booster seat if necessary.
Larger children must be restrained
with a lap/shoulder belt and ride on
a booster seat until the seat belt fits
them properly (see pages 47 − 50 ).

2011 Accord Sedan

Driver and Passenger Safety

All Children Must Be Restrained
Each year, many children are injured
or killed in vehicle crashes because
they are either unrestrained or not
properly restrained. In fact, traffic
collisions are the number one cause
of death of children age 12 and
under.

10/06/18 15:46:11 31TA5630_039

Protecting Children − General Guidelines
All Children Should Sit in a Back
Seat
According to crash statistics,
children of all ages and sizes are
safer when they are restrained in a
back seat.
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport
Canada recommend that all children
aged 12 and under be properly
restrained in a back seat. Some
states have laws restricting where
children may ride.
Children who ride in back are less
likely to be injured by striking
interior vehicle parts during a
collision or hard braking. Also,
children cannot be injured by an
inflating front airbag when they ride
in the back.

The Passenger’s Front Airbag
Can Pose Serious Risks
Front airbags have been designed to
help protect adults in a moderate to
severe frontal collision. To do this,
the passenger’s front airbag is quite
large, and it can inflate with enough
force to cause very serious injuries.
Even though your vehicle has an
advanced front airbag system that
automatically turns the passenger’s
front airbag off under certain
circumstances (see page 30 ), please
follow these guidelines:
Infants
Never put a rear-facing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle equipped
with a passenger’s front airbag.

If the airbag inflates, it can hit the
back of the child seat with enough
force to kill or very seriously injure
an infant.

2011 Accord Sedan

Small Children
Placing a forward-facing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle equipped
with a passenger’s front airbag can
be hazardous. If the vehicle seat is

too far forward, or the child’s head is
thrown forward during a collision, an
inflating front airbag can strike the
child with enough force to kill or
very seriously injure a small child.
Larger Children
Children who have outgrown child
seats are also at risk of being injured
or killed by an inflating passenger’s
front airbag. Whenever possible,

larger children should sit in the back
seat, on a booster seat if needed, and
be properly restrained with a seat
belt (see page 47 for important
information about protecting larger
children).

10/06/18 15:46:22 31TA5630_040

Protecting Children − General Guidelines
U.S. Models

DASHBOARD

SUN VISORS

Driver and Passenger Safety

To remind you of the passenger’s
front airbag hazards, and that
children must be properly restrained
in a back seat, your vehicle has
warning labels on the dashboard
(U.S. models) and on the front visors.
Please read and follow the
instructions on these labels.

Canadian Models
SUN VISORS

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 15:46:32 31TA5630_041

Protecting Children − General Guidelines
If You Must Drive with Several
Children
Your vehicle has a back seat where
children can be properly restrained.
If you ever have to carry a group of
children, and a child must ride
in front:
Place the largest child in the front
seat, provided the child is large
enough to wear the lap/shoulder
belt properly (see page 47 ).
Move the vehicle seat as far to the
rear as possible (see pages
92 and 93 ).
Have the child sit upright and well
back in the seat (see page 15 ).
Make sure the seat belt is properly
positioned and secured (see
page 14 ).

If a Child Requires Close
Attention
Many parents say they prefer to put
an infant or a small child in the front
passenger seat so they can watch the
child, or because the child requires
attention.
Placing a child in the front seat
exposes the child to hazards in a
frontal collision, and paying close
attention to a child distracts the
driver from the important tasks of
driving, placing both of you at risk.
If a child requires close physical
attention or frequent visual contact,
we strongly recommend that
another adult ride with the child in a
back seat. The back seat is far safer
for a child than the front.

2011 Accord Sedan

Additional Safety Precautions
Never hold an infant or child on
your lap. If you are not wearing a

seat belt in a crash, you could be
thrown forward and crush the
child against the dashboard or a
seat-back. If you are wearing a
seat belt, the child can be torn
from your arms and be seriously
hurt or killed.
Never put a seat belt over yourself
and a child. During a crash, the

belt could press deep into the child
and cause serious or fatal injuries.
Never let two children use the
same seat belt. If they do, they

could be very seriously injured in
a crash.

10/06/18 15:46:38 31TA5630_042

Protecting Children − General Guidelines

seat belt around their neck, they
can be seriously or fatally injured.
(See pages 44 and 45 for how to
activate and deactivate the
lockable retractor.)
Use the childproof door locks to
prevent children from opening the
rear doors. This can prevent

children from accidentally falling
out (see page 86 ).

Do not leave children alone in a
vehicle. Leaving children without

adult supervision is illegal in most
states, Canadian provinces and
territories, and can be very
hazardous.
For example, infants and small
children left in a vehicle on a hot
day can die from heatstroke. A
child left alone with the key in the
ignition switch can accidentally set
the vehicle in motion, possibly
injuring themselves or others.

Keep vehicle keys/remote
transmitters out of the reach of
children. Even very young

children learn how to unlock
vehicle doors, turn on the ignition
switch, and open the trunk, which
can lead to accidental injury
or death.

Lock all doors and the trunk when
your vehicle is not in use. Children

who play in vehicles can
accidentally get trapped inside.
Teach your children not to play in
or around vehicles. Know how to
operate the emergency trunk
opener and decide if your children
should be shown how to use this
feature (see page 91 ).

2011 Accord Sedan

Driver and Passenger Safety

Make sure any unused seat belt
that a child can reach is buckled,
the lockable retractor is activated,
and the belt is fully retracted and
locked. If a child wraps a loose

10/06/18 15:46:48 31TA5630_043

Protecting Infants and Small Children
Protecting Infants

Two types of seats may be used: a
seat designed exclusively for infants,
or a convertible seat used in the rearfacing, reclining mode.
Do not put a rear-facing child seat in
a forward-facing position. If placed

facing forward, an infant could be
very seriously injured during a
frontal collision.
Rear-facing Child Seat Placement
Child Seat Type

An infant must be properly
restrained in a rear-facing, reclining
child seat until the child reaches the
seat maker’s weight or height limit
for the seat, and the child is at least
one year old.
Only a rear-facing child seat provides
proper support for a baby’s head,
neck, and back.

A rear-facing child seat can be placed
in any seating position in the back
seat, but not in the front. Never put a

moving their seat as far back as
recommended, or from locking their
seat-back in the desired position.
It could also interfere with proper
operation of the passenger’s
advanced front airbag system.
In any of these situations, we
strongly recommend that you install
the child seat directly behind the
front passenger’s seat, move the seat
as far forward as needed, and leave it
unoccupied. Or, you may wish to get
a smaller rear-facing child seat.

rear-facing child seat in the front
seat.

If the passenger’s front airbag
inflates, it can hit the back of the
child seat with enough force to kill or
seriously injure an infant.

Placing a rear-facing child seat
in the front seat can result in
serious injury or death during a
crash.

When properly installed, a rearfacing child seat may prevent the
driver or a front passenger from

Always place a rear-facing child
seat in the back seat, not the
front.

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 15:46:56 31TA5630_044

Protecting Infants and Small Children
Protecting Small Children

and weight are appropriate for a
rear-facing seat.

We also recommend that a small
child use the child seat until the child
reaches the weight or height limit
for the seat.

Placing a forward-facing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle equipped
with a passenger’s airbag can be
hazardous. If the vehicle seat is too

far forward, or the child’s head is
thrown forward during a collision, an
inflating airbag can strike the child
with enough force to cause very
serious or fatal injuries.

Child Seat Type

Many states, Canadian provinces and
territories allow a child one year of
age or older who also meets the
minimum size and weight
requirements to transition from a
rear-facing child seat to a forward
facing seat. Know the requirements
where you are driving and follow the
child seat instructions. Many experts
recommend use of a rear-facing seat
up to age two, if the child’s height

Even with advanced front airbags
that automatically turn the
passenger’s front airbag off (see
page 30 ), a back seat is the safest
place for a small child.

CONTINUED

2011 Accord Sedan

Driver and Passenger Safety

Of the different seats available, we
recommend those that have a fivepoint harness system as shown.

Child Seat Placement

We strongly recommend placing a
forward-facing child seat in a back
seat, not the front.

10/06/18 15:47:03 31TA5630_045

Protecting Infants and Small Children, Selecting a Child Seat
If it is necessary to put a forwardfacing child seat in the front, move
the vehicle seat as far to the rear as
possible, and be sure the child seat is
firmly secured to the vehicle and the
child is properly strapped in the seat.

Selecting a Child Seat
When buying a child seat, you need
to choose either a conventional child
seat, or one designed for use with
the Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren (LATCH) system.

Placing a forward-facing child
seat in the front seat can result
in serious injury or death if the
front airbag inflates.

Conventional child seats must be
secured to a vehicle with a seat belt,
whereas LATCH-compatible seats
are secured by attaching the seat to
hardware built into the two outer
seating positions in the back seat.

If you must place a forwardfacing child seat in front, move
the vehicle seat as far back as
possible, and properly restrain
the child.

Since LATCH-compatible child seats
are easier to install and reduce the
possibility of improper installation,
we recommend selecting this style.

In seating positions and vehicles not
equipped with LATCH, a LATCHcompatible child seat can be installed
using a seat belt.
Whatever type of seat you choose, to
provide proper protection, a child
seat should meet three
requirements:
1. The child seat should meet
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard 213 or Canadian Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard 213.

Look for FMVSS 213 or CMVSS
213 on the box.
2. The child seat should be of the
proper type and size to fit the child.

Rear-facing for infants, forwardfacing for small children.

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 15:47:11 31TA5630_046

Selecting a Child Seat, Installing a Child Seat
3. The child seat should fit the
vehicle seating position (or
positions) where it will be used.

1. Properly secure the child seat to
the vehicle. All child seats must be

secured to the vehicle with the lap
part of a lap/shoulder belt or with
the LATCH (Lower Anchors and
Tethers for CHildren) system. A
child whose seat is not properly
secured to the vehicle can be
endangered in a crash.
2. Make sure the child seat is firmly
secured. After installing a child

seat, push and pull the seat
forward and from side-to-side to
verify that it is secure.
A child seat secured with a seat belt
should be installed as firmly as
possible. However, it does not need
to be ‘‘rock solid.’’ Some side-to-side

movement can be expected and
should not reduce the child seat’s
effectiveness.
If the child seat is not secure, try
installing it in a different seating
position, or use a different style of
child seat that can be firmly secured.
3. Secure the child in the child seat.

Make sure the child is properly
strapped in the child seat
according to the child seat maker’s
instructions. A child who is not
properly secured in a child seat
can be seriously injured in a crash.
The following pages provide
guidelines on how to properly install
a child seat. A forward-facing child
seat is used in all examples, but the
instructions are the same for rearfacing child seats.

2011 Accord Sedan

Driver and Passenger Safety

Before purchasing a conventional
child seat, or using a previously
purchased one, we recommend that
you test the seat in the specific
vehicle seating position or positions
where the seat will be used.

Installing a Child Seat
After selecting a proper child seat
and a good place to install the seat,
there are three main steps in
installing the seat:

10/06/18 15:47:19 31TA5630_047

Installing a Child Seat
Installing a Child Seat with
LATCH
Your vehicle is equipped with
LATCH (Lower Anchors and
Tethers for CHildren) at the outer
rear seats.
The lower anchors are located
between the seat-back and seat
bottom, and are to be used only with
a child seat designed for use with
LATCH.
The location of each lower anchor is
indicated by a small button above the
anchor point.

BUTTON

LOWER ANCHORS

To install a LATCH-compatible child
seat:
1. Move the seat belt buckle or
tongue away from the lower
anchors.
2. Make sure there are no objects
near the anchors that could
prevent a secure connection
between the child seat and the
anchors.

2011 Accord Sedan

Rigid type

3. Place the child seat on the vehicle
seat, then attach the seat to the
lower anchors according to the
child seat maker’s instructions.
Some LATCH-compatible seats
have a rigid-type connector as
shown above.

10/06/18 15:47:27 31TA5630_048

Installing a Child Seat
TETHER STRAP HOOK

Other LATCH-compatible seats
have a flexible-type connector as
shown above.
4. Whatever type you have, follow
the child seat maker’s instructions
for adjusting or tightening the fit.

8. Push and pull the child seat
forward and from side-to-side to
verify that it is secure.
Driver and Passenger Safety

Flexible type

ANCHOR
COVER

ANCHOR

5. Lift the head restraint (see page
95 ), then route the tether strap
through the legs of the head
restraint and over the seat-back,
making sure the strap is not
twisted.
6. Open the anchor cover.
7. Attach the tether strap hook to the
tether anchor, then tighten the
strap as instructed by the child
seat maker.

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 15:47:34 31TA5630_049

Installing a Child Seat
Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/
Shoulder Belt
When not using the LATCH system,
all child seats must be secured to the
vehicle with the lap part of a lap/
shoulder belt.
In addition, the lap/shoulder belts in
all seating positions except the
driver’s have a lockable retractor
that must be activated to secure a
child seat.
1. With the child seat in the desired
seating position, route the belt
through the child seat according
to the seat maker’s instructions,
then insert the latch plate into the
buckle and remove any slack from
the lap portion of the belt.

2011 Accord Sedan

2. To activate the lockable retractor,
slowly pull the shoulder part of the
belt all the way out until it stops,
then let the belt feed back into
the retractor.
3. After the belt has retracted, tug on
it. If the belt is locked, you will not
be able to pull it out. If you can pull
the belt out, it is not locked, and
you will need to repeat these steps.

10/06/18 15:47:40 31TA5630_050

Installing a Child Seat

4. After confirming that the belt is
locked, grab the shoulder part of
the belt near the buckle, and pull
up to remove any slack from the
lap part of the belt. Remember, if
the lap part of the belt is not tight,
the child seat will not be secure.
To remove slack, it may help to
put weight on the child seat, or
push on the back of the seat while
pulling up on the belt.

5. Push and pull the child seat
forward and from side-to-side to
verify that it is secure enough to
stay upright during normal driving
maneuvers. If the child seat is not
secure, unlatch the belt, allow it to
retract fully, then repeat these
steps.

2011 Accord Sedan

Driver and Passenger Safety

To deactivate the lockable retractor
and remove a child seat, unlatch the
buckle, unroute the seat belt, and let
the belt fully retract.

10/06/18 15:47:50 31TA5630_051

Installing a Child Seat
Installing a Child Seat with a
Tether

Using an Anchor

TETHER STRAP HOOK

TETHER STRAP HOOK
TETHER ANCHORAGE POINTS

Center Position
Outer Position

A child seat with a tether can be
installed in any seating position in
the back seat, using one of the
anchorage points shown above.
Since a tether can provide additional
security to the lap/shoulder belt
installation, we recommend using a
tether whenever one is required or
available.

ANCHOR

1. After properly securing the child
seat (see page 44 ), lift the head
restraint, then route the tether
strap through the head restraint
legs.
2. Lift the anchor cover, then attach
the tether strap hook to the
anchor, making sure the strap is
not twisted.

2011 Accord Sedan

ANCHOR

3. Tighten the strap according to the
seat maker’s instructions.

10/06/18 15:47:57 31TA5630_052

Protecting Larger Children
When a child reaches the
recommended weight or height limit
for a forward-facing child seat, the
child should sit in a back seat on a
booster seat and wear the lap/
shoulder belt.

Allowing a child age 12 or under
to sit in front can result in injury
or death if the passenger’s front
airbag inflates.

The following pages give
instructions on how to check proper
seat belt fit, what kind of booster
seat to use if one is needed, and
important precautions for a child
who must sit in front.

If a child must ride in front,
move the vehicle seat as far
back as possible, use a booster
seat if needed, have the child
sit up properly and wear the
seat belt properly.

Checking Seat Belt Fit

Driver and Passenger Safety

To determine if a lap/shoulder belt
properly fits a child, have the child
put on the seat belt, then ask
yourself:
1. Does the child sit all the way back
against the seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend
comfortably over the edge of the
seat?
CONTINUED

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 15:48:05 31TA5630_053

Protecting Larger Children
3. Does the shoulder belt cross
between the child’s neck and arm?

Using a Booster Seat

4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as
possible, touching the child’s
thighs?
5. Will the child be able to stay
seated like this for the whole trip?
If you answer yes to all these
questions, the child is ready to wear
the lap/shoulder belt correctly. If
you answer no to any question, the
child needs to ride on a booster seat.

Some states, Canadian provinces and
territories also require children to
use a booster seat until they reach a
given age or weight (e.g., 6 years or
60 lbs). Be sure to check current
laws in the states, provinces or
territories where you intend to drive.
Booster seats can be high-back or
low-back. Whichever style you select,
make sure the booster seat meets
federal safety standards (see page
40 ) and that you follow the booster
seat maker’s instructions.

A child who has outgrown a forwardfacing child seat should ride in a
back seat and use a booster seat
until the lap/shoulder belt fits them
properly without the booster.

2011 Accord Sedan

If a child who uses a booster seat
must ride in front, move the vehicle
seat as far back as possible and be
sure the child is wearing the seat
belt properly.

10/06/18 15:48:13 31TA5630_054

Protecting Larger Children
When Can a Larger Child Sit in
Front
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport
Canada recommend that all children
age 12 and under be properly
restrained in a back seat.
If the passenger’s front airbag
inflates in a moderate to severe
frontal collision, the airbag can cause
serious injuries to a child who is
unrestrained, improperly restrained,
sitting too close to the airbag, or out
of position.

Of course, children vary widely. And
while age may be one indicator of
when a child can safely ride in front,
there are other important factors you
should consider.
Physical Size

Physically, a child must be large
enough for the lap/shoulder belt to
properly fit (see pages 14 and 47 ). If
the seat belt does not fit properly,
with or without the child sitting on a
booster seat, the child should not sit
in front.
Maturity

A side airbag also poses risks. If
any part of a larger child’s body
is in the path of a deploying side
airbag, the child could receive
possibly serious injuries.

To safely ride in front, a child must
be able to follow the rules, including
sitting properly, and wearing the seat
belt properly throughout a ride.

CONTINUED

2011 Accord Sedan

Driver and Passenger Safety

A child may continue using a booster
seat until the tops of their ears are
even with the top of the vehicle’s or
booster’s seat-back. A child of this
height should be tall enough to use
the lap/shoulder belt without a
booster seat.

10/06/18 15:48:20 31TA5630_055

Protecting Larger Children
If you decide that a child can safely
ride up front, be sure to:
Carefully read the owner’s manual,
and make sure you understand all
seat belt instructions and all safety
information.
Move the vehicle seat to the rearmost position.
Have the child sit up straight, back
against the seat, and feet on or
near the floor.
Check that the child’s seat belt is
properly and securely positioned.
Supervise the child. Even mature
children sometimes need to be
reminded to fasten the seat belts
or sit properly.

Additional Safety Precautions
Do not let a child wear a seat belt
across the neck. This could result

in serious neck injuries during a
crash.
Do not let a child put the shoulder
part of a seat belt behind the back
or under the arm. This could

cause very serious injuries during
a crash. It also increases the
chance that the child will slide
under the belt in a crash and be
injured.
Two children should never use the
same seat belt. If they do, they

could be very seriously injured in a
crash.

2011 Accord Sedan

Do not put any accessories on a
seat belt. Devices intended to

improve a child’s comfort or
reposition the shoulder part of a
seat belt can make the belt less
effective and increase the chance
of serious injury in a crash.

10/06/18 15:48:28 31TA5630_056

Carbon Monoxide Hazard

Have the exhaust system inspected
for leaks whenever:
The vehicle is raised for an oil
change.
You notice a change in the sound
of the exhaust.
The vehicle was in a collision that
may have damaged the underside.

Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.
Breathing it can cause
unconsciousness and even kill
you.
Avoid any enclosed areas or
activities that expose you to
carbon monoxide.
High levels of carbon monoxide can
collect rapidly in enclosed areas,
such as a garage. Do not run the
engine with the garage door closed.
Even with the door open, run the
engine only long enough to move the
vehicle out of the garage.

With the trunk open, airflow
can pull exhaust gas into your
vehicle’s interior and create a
hazardous condition. If you must
drive with the trunk open,
open all the windows and set the
heating and cooling system/ climate
control system as shown below.
If you must sit in your parked vehicle
with the engine running, even in an
unconfined area, adjust the heating
and cooling system/climate control
system as follows:
1. Select the fresh air mode.
2. Select the

mode.

3. Turn the fan on high speed.
4. Set the temperature control to a
comfortable setting.

2011 Accord Sedan

Driver and Passenger Safety

Your vehicle’s exhaust contains
carbon monoxide gas. Carbon
monoxide should not enter the
vehicle in normal driving if you
maintain your vehicle properly and
follow the information on this page.

10/06/18 15:48:46 31TA5630_057

Safety Labels
These labels are in the locations
shown. They warn you of potential
hazards that could cause serious
injury or death. Read these labels
carefully.

SUN VISORS
U.S. models

Canadian models

If a label comes off or becomes hard
to read (except for the U.S.
dashboard label which may be
removed by the owner), contact your
dealer for a replacement.
DASHBOARD

DOORJAMBS

U.S. models only

U.S. models

RADIATOR CAP

2011 Accord Sedan

Canadian models

10/06/18 15:48:50 31TA5630_058

Instruments and Controls
This section gives information about
the controls and displays that
contribute to the daily operation of
your vehicle. All the essential
controls are within easy reach.

Front Seat Manual
Adjustments ............................. 93
Driver’s Seat Manual Height
Adjustment ............................... 94
Head Restraints ........................... 94
Folding Rear Seat ........................ 97
Armrests ....................................... 98
Seat Heaters ................................... 100
Driving Position Memory
System......................................... 101
Mirrors ............................................ 104
Power Windows ............................. 106
Moonroof ........................................ 110
Parking Brake ................................ 112
Interior Convenience Items .......... 113
Beverage Holders ...................... 114
Accessory Power Sockets......... 114
Console Compartment .............. 115
Glove Box ................................... 116
Sunglasses Holder ..................... 116
Sun Visors ................................... 117
Vanity Mirror ............................. 118
Coat Hook ................................... 118
Center Pockets........................... 118
Interior Lights ................................ 119

2011 Accord Sedan

Instruments and Controls

Control Locations ............................ 54
Instrument Panel ............................. 55
Instrument Panel Indicators ........... 56
Gauges .............................................. 63
Information Display..................... 64
Odometer ...................................... 64
Outside Temperature
Indicator .................................... 65

Trip Meter .................................... 65
Check Fuel Cap Message ........... 66
Maintenance MinderTM................ 66
Temperature Gauge .................... 66
Fuel Gauge ................................... 66
Controls Near the Steering
Wheel ............................................ 67
Windshield Wipers and Washers .. 68
Turn Signals and Headlights .......... 69
Fog Lights......................................... 72
Instrument Panel Brightness ......... 72
Hazard Warning Button .................. 73
Rear Window Defogger .................. 74
Steering Wheel Adjustments ......... 75
Keys and Locks ................................ 76
Immobilizer System......................... 77
Ignition Switch ................................. 78
Door Locks ....................................... 79
Auto Door Locking/Unlocking.. 80
Childproof Door Locks ............... 86
Remote Transmitter ........................ 86
Trunk................................................. 90
Emergency Trunk Opener ......... 91
Seats .................................................. 92
Front Seat Power Adjustments .. 92

10/06/18 15:48:59 31TA5630_059

Control Locations

INSTRUMENT PANEL
INDICATORS (P.55)
GAUGES (P.63)

MOONROOF SWITCH＊ (P.110)

HOMELINK BUTTONS＊ (P.266)

MIRROR CONTROL
AUTO BUTTON＊
(P.104)
CLOCK (P.254)
COMPASS＊ (P.259)

DRIVING POSITION
MEMORY SYSTEM
BUTTONS＊
(P.101)

HEATING/COOLING
CONTROLS
(P.122)
CLIMATE CONTROL
SYSTEM
(P.128)

MIRROR CONTROLS
(P.105)
POWER DOOR LOCK
MASTER SWITCH
(P.79)

AUDIO SYSTEM
(P.136)

POWER WINDOW
SWITCHES
(P.106)

MANUAL
TRANSMISSION
(P.318)
AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
(P.320)

HOOD RELEASE
HANDLE
(P.300)
TRUNK RELEASE
LEVER (P.90)
FUEL FILL DOOR
RELEASE LEVER
ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET
USB ADAPTER CABLE＊
(P.297)
(P.114)
(P.176, 185, 226, 235)
U.S. EX-L V6 model without navigation system is shown.

＊ : If equipped

2011 Accord Sedan

AUXILIARY INPUT JACK
(P.252)

ACCESSORY POWER
SOCKET
(P.115)

10/06/18 15:49:09 31TA5630_060

Instrument Panel

DOOR AND TRUNK OPEN INDICATOR (P.60)
MAINTENANCE MINDER INDICATOR (P.62)

DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS INDICATOR (P.61)
PARKING BRAKE AND BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.57)

SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR＊ (P.61)

FOG LIGHT INDICATOR＊ (P.62)

LOW OIL PRESSURE
INDICATOR (P.56, 405)
IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM
INDICATOR (P.62)
MALFUNCTION
INDICATOR LAMP
(P.56, 406)

CRUISE CONTROL
MAIN INDICATOR
(P.62)

LOW TIRE
PRESSURE
INDICATOR
(P.59)

CRUISE CONTROL
INDICATOR
(P.62)

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM (TPMS) INDICATOR (P.59)

SIDE AIRBAG OFF
INDICATOR (P.57)

VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST (VSA) SYSTEM
INDICATOR (P.58)

SEAT BELT REMINDER
INDICATOR (P.56)

VSA OFF INDICATOR (P.58)
FUEL ECONOMY INDICATOR＊ (P.59)
＊: If equipped

LOW FUEL INDICATOR
(P.61)
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM
(ABS) INDICATOR (P.58)

HIGH BEAM INDICATOR (P.61) SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.57)

The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for the Canadian models are noted in the text.

2011 Accord Sedan

Instruments and Controls

LIGHTS ON INDICATOR (P.60)

CHARGING SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.56, 405)

10/06/18 15:49:18 31TA5630_061

Instrument Panel Indicators
The instrument panel has many
indicators to give you important
information about your vehicle.
Seat Belt Reminder
Indicator
This indicator comes on when you
turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position. It reminds you and your
passengers to fasten your seat belts.
A beeper also sounds if you have not
fastened your seat belt.

If your front passenger does not
fasten their seat belt, the indicator
comes on about 6 seconds after the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
(II) position.
If either of you do not fasten your
seat belt while driving, the beeper
will sound and the indicator will flash
again at regular intervals. For more
information, see page 18 .

If you turn the ignition switch to the
ON (II) position before fastening
your seat belt, the beeper sounds
and the indicator flashes. If you do
not fasten your seat belt before the
beeper stops, the indicator stops
flashing but remains on.

Low Oil Pressure
Indicator
The engine can be severely damaged
if this indicator flashes or stays on
when the engine is running. For
more information, see page 405 .
Charging System
Indicator
If this indicator comes on when the
engine is running, the battery is not
being charged. For more information,
see page 405 .
Malfunction Indicator
Lamp
See page 406 .

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 15:49:26 31TA5630_062

Instrument Panel Indicators
Parking Brake and Brake System
Indicator
U.S.

Canada

1. It comes on when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. It is a reminder to check
the parking brake. A beeper
sounds if you drive with the
parking brake not fully released.
Driving with the parking brake not
fully released can damage the
brakes and tires.

Side Airbag Off Indicator
U.S.

Canada

This indicator comes on briefly when
you turn the ignition switch to the
ON (II) position. If it comes on at
any other time, it indicates that the
passenger’s side airbag has
automatically shut off. For more
information, see page 30 .

2. If it remains lit after you fully
release the parking brake while
the engine is running, or if it
comes on while driving, there
could be a problem with the brake
system. For more information, see
page 407 .

2011 Accord Sedan

Instruments and Controls

This indicator has two functions:

Supplemental Restraint
System Indicator
This indicator comes on briefly when
you turn the ignition switch to the
ON (II) position. If it comes on at
any other time, it indicates a
potential problem with your front
airbags. This indicator will also alert
you to a potential problem with your
airbag system components. For
more information, see page 29 .

10/06/18 15:49:34 31TA5630_063

Instrument Panel Indicators
Anti-lock Brake System
(ABS) Indicator
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. If it comes on at any other
time, there is a problem with the
ABS. If this happens, have your
vehicle checked at a dealer. With
this indicator on, your vehicle still
has normal braking ability but no
anti-lock function. For more
information, see page 327 .

Vehicle Stability Assist
(VSA) System Indicator
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position.
This indicator has two functions:
1. It flashes when VSA is active (see
page 329 ).
2. If it comes on and stays on at any
other time, there is a problem with
the VSA system. Take your
vehicle to a dealer to have it
checked. Without VSA, your
vehicle still has normal driving
ability, but will not have VSA
traction and stability enhancement.
See page 329 for more information
on the VSA system.

2011 Accord Sedan

VSA Off Indicator
This indicator comes on as a
reminder that you have turned off
the vehicle stability assist (VSA)
system.
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. For more information, see
page 329 .

10/06/18 15:49:41 31TA5630_064

Instrument Panel Indicators

If this happens, pull to the side of the
road when it is safe, check which tire
has lost pressure, and determine the
cause. If it is because of a flat tire,
replace the flat tire with the compact
spare (see page 393 ), and have the
flat tire repaired as soon as possible.
If two or more tires are underinflated,
call a professional towing service
(see page 415 ). For more
information, see page 331 .

Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) Indicator
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position.

Fuel Economy Indicator
V6 models

While the engine is operating in its
most economical range, this
indicator may come on and stay on.

If this indicator comes on and stays
on at any other time, or if it does not
come on when you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position, there
is a problem with the TPMS. With
this indicator on, the low tire
pressure indicator will not come on
when a tire loses pressure. Take the
vehicle to your dealer to have the
system checked. For more
information, see page 332 .

2011 Accord Sedan

Instruments and Controls

Low Tire Pressure
Indicator
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. If it comes on while driving,
it indicates that one or more of your
vehicle’s tires are significantly low
on pressure.

10/06/18 15:49:51 31TA5630_065

Instrument Panel Indicators
Turn Signal and Hazard Warning
Indicators
The left or right turn signal indicator
blinks when you signal a lane change
or turn. If an indicator does not blink
or blinks rapidly, it usually means
one of the turn signal bulbs is
burned out (see pages 368 and 370 ).
Replace the bulb as soon as possible,
since other drivers cannot see that
you are signaling.

Lights On Indicator
This indicator reminds you that the
exterior lights are on. It comes on
when the light switch is in either the
or
position. If you turn the
ignition switch to the ACCESSORY
(I) or the LOCK (0) position without
turning off the light switch, this
indicator will remain on. A reminder
chime will also sound when you open
the driver’s door.

Door and Trunk Open Indicator
DRIVER’S
DOOR OPEN
INDICATOR

TRUNK
OPEN
INDICATOR

If equipped

When you press the hazard warning
button, both turn signal indicators
and all turn signals on the outside of
the vehicle flash.

This indicator will also come on
when the light switch is in AUTO
and the lights turn on automatically.

The appropriate indicator comes on
if the trunk or any door is not closed
tightly.
All the indicators come on for a few
seconds when you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position.

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 15:50:00 31TA5630_066

Instrument Panel Indicators
Low Fuel Indicator

SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR

High Beam Indicator
This indicator comes on with the
high beam headlights. For more
information, see page 69 .
This indicator also comes on with
reduced brightness when the
daytime running lights (DRL) are on
(see page 71 ).

When the needle reaches E, there
is a very small amount of
fuel in the tank.

If equipped

This indicator comes on when the
security system is set. See page
257 for more information on the
security system.

Daytime Running Lights
Indicator
If this indicator comes on when you
turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position and release the parking
brake, it means there is a problem
with the DRL. There may also be a
problem with the high beam
headlights. Have your vehicle
checked by your dealer.

2011 Accord Sedan

Instruments and Controls

This indicator comes on as a
reminder that you must refuel soon.
When the indicator comes on, there
are about 2.8 U.S. gal (10.5 ) of fuel
remaining in the tank.

Security System Indicator

10/06/18 15:50:14 31TA5630_067

Instrument Panel Indicators
Cruise Control Main
Indicator
This indicator comes on when you
turn on the cruise control system by
pressing the CRUISE button (see
page 263 ).
Cruise Control Indicator
This indicator comes on when you
set the cruise control. See page
263 for information on operating the
cruise control.
Fog Light Indicator

Maintenance Minder
Indicator
This indicator comes on for a few
seconds when you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position. It
reminds you that it is time to take
your vehicle in for scheduled
maintenance. The maintenance main
items and sub items will be displayed
in the information display. See page
343 for more information on the
Maintenance MinderTM.
This indicator goes off when your
dealer resets it after completing the
required maintenance service.

If equipped

This indicator comes on when you
turn on the fog lights. For more
information, see page 72 .

2011 Accord Sedan

Immobilizer System
Indicator
This indicator comes on briefly when
you turn the ignition switch to the
ON (II) position. It will then go off if
you have inserted a properly coded
ignition key. If it is not a properly
coded key, the indicator will blink,
and the engine’s fuel system will be
disabled (see page 77 ) .
Washer Level Indicator
Canadian models only

This indicator comes on when the
washer fluid level is low. Add washer
fluid when you see this indicator
(see page 358 ).

10/06/18 15:50:19 31TA5630_068

Gauges

TACHOMETER

SPEEDOMETER

Instruments and Controls

TEMPERATURE GAUGE

FUEL GAUGE

OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE INDICATOR＊

TRIP METER

SELECT/RESET KNOB

ODOMETER/CHECK FUEL CAP MESSAGE
U.S. model is shown.

INFORMATION DISPLAY

＊: If equipped

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 15:50:26 31TA5630_069

Gauges
INFORMATION DISPLAY
ODOMETER

TRIP METER A

ENGINE OIL
LIFE

OUTSIDE
TEMPERATURE
INDICATOR

TRIP METER B
: Press the select/reset knob.
U.S. model with outside temperature indicator is shown.

Information Display
The information display shows the
odometer, trip meter, engine oil life,
outside temperature (if equipped),
and maintenance item code(s).

To switch the display, press and
release the select/reset knob
repeatedly. When you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position, your last selection is
displayed.

2011 Accord Sedan

Odometer
The odometer shows the total
distance your vehicle has been
driven. It measures miles in U.S.
models and kilometers in Canadian
models. It is illegal under U.S.
federal law and Canadian provincial/
territorial regulations to disconnect,
reset, or alter the odometer with the
intent to change the number of miles
or kilometers indicated.

10/06/18 15:50:37 31TA5630_070

Gauges
Outside Temperature Indicator
If equipped

The temperature sensor is in the
front bumper. Therefore, the
temperature reading can be affected
by heat reflection from the road
surface, engine heat, and the
exhaust from surrounding traffic.
This can cause an incorrect
temperature reading when your
speed is under 19 mph (30 km/h).
The sensor delays the display update
until it reaches the correct outside
temperature. This may take several
minutes.

Trip Meter
The trip meter shows the number of
miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada)
driven since you last reset it.

NOTE: The temperature must be
stabilized before doing this procedure.

There are two trip meters: Trip A
and Trip B. Switch between these
displays by pressing the select/reset
knob repeatedly.

Select the outside temperature
display, then press and hold the
select/reset knob for 10 seconds.
The following sequence will appear
for 1 second each: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, −5,
−4, −3, −2, −1, 0 (U.S.) or 0, 1, 2,
3, −3, −2, −1, 0 (Canada).
When the temperature reaches the
desired value, release the select/
reset knob. You should see the new
outside temperature displayed.

Each trip meter works independently,
so you can keep track of two
different distances.
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, your last
selection is displayed.
To reset a trip meter, display it, and
then press and hold the select/reset
knob until the number resets to ‘‘0.0’’.

In certain weather conditions,
temperature readings near freezing
(32°F, 0°C) could mean that ice is
forming on the road surface.

2011 Accord Sedan

Instruments and Controls

This indicator displays the outside
temperature in Fahrenheit (U.S.
models) or Celsius (Canadian
models). To see the outside
temperature, press and release the
select/reset knob until the
temperature is displayed.

If the outside temperature is
incorrectly displayed, you can adjust
it up to ±5°F in U.S. models (±3°C
in Canadian models) warmer or
cooler.

10/06/18 15:50:44 31TA5630_071

Gauges
Check Fuel Cap Message
If your fuel fill cap is loose or
missing, a ‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’
message appears on the information
display after you start the engine.
For more information, see page 298 .
Maintenance MinderTM
The information display in the
instrument panel shows you the
engine oil life and maintenance
service items when the ignition
switch is in the ON (II) position. This
information helps to keep you aware
of the periodic maintenance your
vehicle needs for continued troublefree driving. Refer to page 343 for
more information.

Temperature Gauge
This shows the temperature of the
engine’s coolant. During normal
operation, the pointer should rise
from the bottom mark to about the
middle of the gauge. In severe
driving conditions, such as very hot
weather or a long period of uphill
driving, the pointer may rise to the
upper zone. If it reaches the red
(hot) mark, pull safely to the side of
the road. Turn to page 403 for
instructions and precautions on
checking the engine cooling system.

2011 Accord Sedan

Fuel Gauge
This shows how much fuel you have.
It may show slightly more or less
than the actual amount. The needle
returns to the bottom after you turn
off the ignition.

Avoid driving with an extremely low
f uel level. Running out of f uel could
cause the engine to misf ire, damaging
the catalytic converter.

10/06/18 15:50:52 31TA5630_072

Controls Near the Steering Wheel
INSTRUMENT PANEL BRIGHTNESS
(P.72)

WINDSHIELD WIPERS/WASHERS
(P.68)

PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR
(P.30)
HAZARD WARNING
BUTTON
(P.73)

Instruments and Controls

HEADLIGHT/TURN SIGNALS/
FOG LIGHTS＊2
(P.69, 72)

INTERFACE DIAL＊3
(P.194)

REMOTE AUDIO CONTROLS
(P.250)
VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST
(VSA) SYSTEM OFF SWITCH
(P.330)

BLUETOOTH
HANDSFREELINK VOICE
CONTROL BUTTONS＊2
(P.270)

REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER/
HEATED MIRROR BUTTON＊2
(P.74, 105)
HORN＊1

NAVIGATION SYSTEM VOICE
CONTROL BUTTONS＊3

SEAT HEATER SWITCHES＊2 (P.100)
CRUISE CONTROL BUTTONS(P.263)
STEERING WHEEL ADJUSTMENTS
(P.75)

＊1 : To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel.
＊2 : If equipped
＊3 : Only on vehicles equipped with navigation system, refer to the navigation system manual.

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 15:51:01 31TA5630_073

Windshield Wipers and Washers
Windshield Wipers

Push the right lever up or down to
select a position.

LO − The wipers run at low speed.
HI − The wipers run at high speed.

MIST − The wipers run at high
speed until you release the lever.
OFF − The wipers are not activated.
INT − The length of the wipe
interval is varied automatically
according to vehicle’s speed.
ADJUSTMENT RING

1. MIST
2. OFF
3. INT − Intermittent
4. LO − Low speed

Vary the delay by turning the
adjustment ring. If you turn it to the
shortest delay (
position), the
wipers change to low speed
operation when the vehicle speed
exceeds 12 mph (20 km/h).

5. HI − High speed
6. Windshield washers

2011 Accord Sedan

Windshield Washer − Pull the
wiper control lever toward you, and
hold it. The washers spray until you
release the lever. The wipers run at
low speed, then complete a few more
sweeps after you release the lever.

10/06/18 15:51:09 31TA5630_074

Turn Signals and Headlights

EX-L V6 model is shown.

1. Turn signal
2. Off
3. Parking and indicator lights
4. AUTO＊
5. Headlights on
6. High beams
7. Flash high beams
＊
8. Fog lights off
9. Fog lights on＊

Headlights − Turning the switch to
the ‘‘
’’ position turns on the
parking lights, taillights, instrument
panel lights, side-marker lights, and
rear license plate lights.
Turning the switch to the ‘‘
’’
position turns on the headlights.
If you leave the lights on with the
key removed from the ignition
switch, you will hear a reminder
chime when you open the
driver’s door.

＊: If equipped

When the light switch is in either of
these positions, the lights on
indicator comes on as a reminder.
This indicator stays on if you leave
the lights on and turn the ignition
switch to the ACCESSORY (I) or
LOCK (0) position.
High Beams − To switch from low
beams to high beams, push the left
lever forward until you hear a click.
The blue high beam indicator will
come on (see page 61 ). Pull it back
to return to low beams. To flash the
high beams, pull the lever back
lightly, then release it. The high
beams stay on as long as you hold
the lever back.

CONTINUED

2011 Accord Sedan

Instruments and Controls

Turn Signal − Push down on the
left lever to signal a left turn and up
to signal a right turn. To signal a lane
change, push lightly on the lever and
hold it. The lever will return to the
center when you release it or
complete a turn.

10/06/18 15:51:16 31TA5630_075

Turn Signals and Headlights
If equipped

AUTO − The automatic lighting
feature turns on the headlights and
all other exterior lights, when it
senses low ambient light.
To turn on automatic lighting, turn
the light switch to AUTO. The lights
will come on automatically when the
outside light level becomes low (at
dusk, for example). The lights on
indicator comes on as a reminder.
The lights and indicator will turn off
automatically when the system
senses high ambient light.

Even with the automatic lighting
feature turned on, we recommend
that you turn on the lights manually
when driving at night or in a dense
fog, or when you enter dark areas
such as long tunnels or parking
facilities.
Do not leave the light switch in
AUTO if you will not be driving the
vehicle for an extended period (a
week or more). You should also turn
off the lights if you plan to leave the
engine idling or off for a long time.

The lights will remain on when you
turn off the ignition switch. They will
turn off automatically when you
remove the key and open the driver’s
door. To turn them on again, either
turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position or turn the light switch
to the
position.

2011 Accord Sedan

LIGHT SENSOR

The automatic lighting feature is
controlled by a sensor located on top
of the dashboard. Do not cover this
sensor or spill liquids on it.

10/06/18 15:51:23 31TA5630_076

Turn Signals and Headlights
If you turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position with the
headlight switch on, but do not open
the door, the lights turn off after 10
minutes (3 minutes, if the switch is
in the ‘‘AUTO’’ position).

The automatic lighting off feature
activates if you leave the headlight
switch in the ‘‘
’’ or ‘‘
’’
position or if the lights are turned on
by setting the switch in the ‘‘AUTO’’
position (if equipped), and you
remove the key, then open and close
the driver’s door.

The lights will turn on again when
you unlock or open the driver’s door.
If you unlock the door, but do not
open it within 15 seconds, the lights
will go off. With the driver’s door
open, you will hear a lights-on
reminder chime.

Daytime Running Lights
With the headlight switch off or in
the
position, the high beam
headlights and the high beam
indicator come on with reduced
brightness when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position and release the parking
brake. They remain on until you turn
the ignition switch off, even if you
set the parking brake.
The headlights revert to normal
operation when you turn them on
with the switch.

2011 Accord Sedan

Instruments and Controls

Automatic Lighting Off Feature
This feature turns off the headlights,
all other exterior lights, and the
instrument panel lights within 15
seconds after you remove the key
and close the driver’s door.

10/06/18 15:51:30 31TA5630_077

Fog Lights, Instrument Panel Brightness
Fog Lights

You can use the fog lights only when
the headlights are on low beam.
With the light switch in the AUTO
position, you can also use the fog
lights when the headlights turn on
automatically. They will go off when
the headlights turn off, or the
daytime running lights are on.

V6 model is shown.

Instrument Panel Brightness

SELECT/RESET KNOB

The select/reset knob on the
instrument panel controls the
brightness of the instrument panel
lights. Turn the knob to adjust the
brightness with the ignition switch in
the ON (II) position and the parking
lights on.

If equipped

Turn the fog lights on and off by
turning the switch next to the
headlight switch.

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 15:51:38 31TA5630_078

Instrument Panel Brightness, Hazard Warning Button

BRIGHTNESS LEVEL

The level of brightness is shown on
the information display while you
adjust it. It goes out about 5 seconds
after you finish adjusting.
To reduce glare at night, the
instrument panel illumination dims
when you turn the light switch to
or
. Turning the select/
reset knob to the right until you hear
a beep will cancel the reduced
brightness.

If you do not insert the key in the
ignition switch after opening the
driver’s door, the illumination turns
off about 30 seconds after you close
the door.
If you insert the key but do not turn
the ignition switch to the ON (II)
position, the illumination turns off in
about 10 seconds.

Hazard Warning Button

U.S. model is shown.

Push the button between the center
vents to turn on the hazard warning
lights (four-way flashers). This
causes all four outside turn signals
and both turn indicators in the
instrument panel to flash. Use the
hazard warning lights if you need to
park in a dangerous area near heavy
traffic, or if your vehicle is disabled.

2011 Accord Sedan

Instruments and Controls

The instrument panel will illuminate
with reduced brightness when you
unlock and open the driver’s door.
The brightness will increase slightly
when you insert the key in the
ignition switch, then go to normal
brightness when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position.

10/06/18 15:51:46 31TA5630_079

Rear Window Defogger

U.S. LX, LX-P, SE

Manual A/C type

Except U.S. LX,
LX-P, SE

The rear window defogger will clear
fog, frost, and thin ice from the
window. Push the defogger button to
turn it on and off. The indicator in
the button comes on to show the
defogger is on. It also shuts off when
you turn off the ignition switch. You
have to turn the defogger on again
when you restart the vehicle.

Auto A/C type

On models with automatic air
conditioning system

The defogger will shut itself off
within about 10 to 30 minutes
according to the outside temperature
(over 32°F, 0°C).

On models with navigation system

The defogger and antenna wires on
the inside of the rear window can be
accidentally damaged. When
cleaning the glass, always wipe side
to side.
Except U.S. LX, LX-P and SE

Make sure the rear window is clear
and you have good visibility before
starting to drive.

2011 Accord Sedan

Pushing this button also turns the
mirror heaters on or off. For more
information, see page 105 .

10/06/18 15:51:52 31TA5630_080

Steering Wheel Adjustments
3. Push the lever up to lock the
steering wheel in position.

Make any steering wheel
adjustments before you start driving.

Adjusting the steering wheel
position while driving may
cause you to lose control of the
vehicle and be seriously injured
in a crash.
Adjust the steering wheel only
when the vehicle is stopped.
1. Push the lever under the steering
column all the way down.

2. Move the steering wheel up or
down, and in or out, so it points
toward your chest, not toward
your face. Make sure you can see
the instrument panel gauges and
indicators.

2011 Accord Sedan

Instruments and Controls

4. Make sure you have securely
locked the steering wheel in place
by trying to move it up, down, in,
and out.

10/06/18 15:51:59 31TA5630_081

Keys and Locks

KEY
NUMBER
TAG

MASTER
VALET KEY
KEY WITH
(Light Grey)
REMOTE
TRANSMITTER

You should have received a key
number tag with your keys. You will
need this key number if you ever
have to get a lost key replaced. Use
only Honda-approved key blanks.

These keys contain electronic
circuits that are activated by the
immobilizer system. They will not
work to start the engine if the
circuits are damaged.
Protect the keys from direct
sunlight, high temperature, and
high humidity.
Do not drop the keys or set heavy
objects on them.
Keep the keys away from liquids.
If they get wet, dry them
immediately with a soft cloth.

The master key fits all the locks on
your vehicle. The valet key works
only in the ignition and the driver’s
door lock. You can keep the trunk
release handle, rear seat trunk
access, and glove box locked when
you leave your vehicle and the valet
key at a parking facility.

The valet key does not contain a
battery. Do not try to take it apart.

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 15:52:06 31TA5630_082

Immobilizer System
The immobilizer system protects
your vehicle from theft. If an
improperly coded key (or other
device) is used, the engine’s fuel
system is disabled.

Do not attempt to alter this system
or add other devices to it. Electrical
problems could result that may make
your vehicle inoperable.
If you lose your key and you cannot
start the engine, contact your dealer.

Always take the ignition key with you
whenever you leave the vehicle alone.

The system may not recognize your
key’s coding if another immobilizer
key or other metal object (i.e. key
chain) is near the ignition switch
when you insert the key.

As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.

2011 Accord Sedan

Instruments and Controls

When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, the immobilizer
system indicator should come on
briefly, then go off. If the indicator
starts to blink, it means the system
does not recognize the coding of the
key. Turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position, remove the key,
reinsert it, and turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position again.

If the system repeatedly does not
recognize the coding of your key,
contact your dealer.

10/06/18 15:52:14 31TA5630_083

Ignition Switch
If the front wheels are turned, the
anti-theft lock may make it difficult
to turn the key. Firmly turn the
steering wheel to the left or right as
you turn the key.
ACCESSORY (I) − You can
operate the audio system and the
accessory power sockets in this
position.

The ignition switch has four
positions: LOCK (0), ACCESSORY
(I), ON (II), START (III)
LOCK (0) − You can insert or
remove the key only in this position.
To turn the key, push it in slightly. If
your vehicle has an automatic
transmission, the shift lever must
also be in Park.

ON (II) − This is the normal key
position when driving. Several of the
indicators on the instrument panel
come on as a test when you turn the
ignition switch from the
ACCESSORY (I) to the ON (II)
position.
START (III) − Use this position
only to start the engine. The switch
returns to the ON (II) position when
you let go of the key.

2011 Accord Sedan

You will hear a reminder beeper if
you leave the key in the ignition
switch in the LOCK (0) or the
ACCESSORY (I) position and open
the driver’s door. Remove the key to
turn off the beeper.
If your vehicle has an automatic
transmission, the shift lever must be
in Park before you can remove the
key from the ignition switch.

Removing the key from the
ignition switch while driving
locks the steering. This can
cause you to lose control of the
vehicle.
Remove the key from the
ignition switch only when
parked.

10/06/18 15:52:21 31TA5630_084

Door Locks
POWER DOOR LOCK MASTER SWITCH

LOCK TAB

Lock
Lock
Unlock

RED INDICATOR

To lock all doors, push the front of
the master door lock switch on
either front door, pull the lock tab
rearward on the driver’s door, or use
the key on the outside lock on the
driver’s door.

The lock tab on any passenger’s door
locks and unlocks that door.
When the door is unlocked, you can
see the red indicator on the lock tab
above the inner door handle.

Pushing the rear of either master
door lock switch will unlock all doors.
Pushing forward the lock tab on the
driver’s door unlocks only that door.

You can open or close the windows
and the moonroof (if equipped) by
using the key in the driver’s door
(see page 108 ).
To lock any passenger’s door
when getting out of the vehicle,
pull the lock tab rearward and
close the door. To lock the
driver’s door, remove the key
from the ignition switch, pull the
lock tab rearward or push the
front of the master switch,
then close the door.
CONTINUED

2011 Accord Sedan

Instruments and Controls

Unlock

All doors can be locked from the
outside by using the key in the
driver’s door. To unlock only the
driver’s door, insert the key, turn it
clockwise, and release it. The
remaining doors unlock when you
turn the key a second time within a
few seconds.

10/06/18 15:52:29 31TA5630_085

Door Locks
Lockout Prevention

If you forget and leave the key
in the ignition switch, lockout
prevention will not allow you to lock
the driver’s door. With any door
open and the key in the
ignition switch, locking with the
master door lock switch is disabled.
If the driver’s door is closed, the
lock tab on the driver’s door is not
disabled. Pulling the driver’s lock
tab rearward will lock all doors. If
you try to lock an open driver’s door
by pulling the lock tab rearward, the
driver’s door lock tab pops out
and unlocks the driver’s door.

Auto Door Locking/Unlocking
Your vehicle has customizable
settings for the doors to
automatically lock and unlock. There
are default settings for each of these
features. You can turn off or change
the settings for these features as
described on the following pages.
When you customize the setting,
make sure your vehicle is parked
safely, the engine is off, and the
parking brake is applied. Make all
settings before you start driving.
U.S. EX-L V6
Canadian EX-L and EX-L V6 with
navigation system

NOTE: When customizing a setting,
use the appropriate remote transmitter
(Driver 1 or Driver 2).
To customize, remove the master key
with the remote transmitter, and press
the UNLOCK button once.

2011 Accord Sedan

Auto Door Locking
The auto door locking feature has
three possible settings:
The auto door locking is
deactivated all the time.
The doors lock whenever you
move the shift lever out of the
Park (P) position (A/T vehicles).
The doors lock when the vehicle
speed reaches 10 mph (15 km/h).
This is the default setting.

10/06/18 15:52:39 31TA5630_086

Door Locks
To turn off the Auto Door Lock
modes:

3. Push and hold the front of the
master door lock switch on the
driver’s door until you hear a click
(after about 5 seconds).

To program the Park Lock mode:
Locks all doors when the shift lever is
moved out of the Park (P) position (A/T
vehicles only).
Instruments and Controls

4. Release the switch, and within 20
seconds, turn the ignition switch
to the LOCK (0) position.

1. Make sure the shift lever is in the
Park (P) position (A/T vehicles).
1. Make sure the shift lever is in the
Park (P) position.

2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position, and open the driver’s
door.

2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position, and make sure to
close the driver’s door.

CONTINUED

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 15:52:49 31TA5630_087

Door Locks
3. Push and hold the front of the
master door lock switch on the
driver’s door. You will hear a click.
Keep holding the switch until you
hear another click (after about 5
seconds).

To program the Drive Lock mode:
Locks all doors when the vehicle’s speed
reaches about 10 mph (15 km/h).

4. Release the switch, and within 20
seconds, turn the ignition switch
to the LOCK (0) position.

4. Push and hold the front of the
master door lock switch on the
driver’s door. You will hear a click.
Keep holding the switch until you
hear another click (after about 5
seconds).
5. Release the switch, and within 20
seconds, turn the ignition switch
to the ACCESSORY (I) position.
On A/T vehicles, move the shift
lever to the Park (P) position.
6. Turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position.

1. Make sure the shift lever is in the
Park (P) position (A/T vehicles).
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position, and make sure to
close the driver’s door.
3. On A/T vehicles, push and hold the
brake pedal, and move the shift
lever out of the Park (P) position.

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 15:52:58 31TA5630_088

Door Locks
Auto Door Unlocking
The auto door unlocking feature
has five possible settings:

On A/T vehicles, the driver’s door
unlocks when you move the shift
lever to the Park (P) position with
the brake pedal depressed.
This is the default setting.

To turn off the Auto Door Unlock
modes:

This is the default setting on M/T
vehicles.

Instruments and Controls

The auto door unlocking is
deactivated all the time.

The driver’s door unlocks
whenever you turn the ignition
switch to the ACCESSORY (I)
position.

All doors unlock whenever you
turn the ignition switch to the
ACCESSORY (I) position.

All doors unlock when you move
the shift lever to the Park (P)
position with the brake pedal
depressed (A/T vehicles).

1. Make sure the shift lever is in the
Park (P) position (A/T vehicles).
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position, and open the driver’s
door.

CONTINUED

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 15:53:07 31TA5630_089

Door Locks
3. Push and hold the rear of the
master door lock switch on the
driver’s door. You will hear a click,
and after about 5 seconds, you will
hear another click.

To program the Park Unlock mode:
Unlocks the driver’s door or all doors
when the shift lever is moved into the
Park (P) position with the brake pedal
depressed (A/T vehicles only).

4. Release the switch, and within 20
seconds, turn the ignition switch
to the LOCK (0) position.

3. Push and hold the rear of the
master door lock switch on the
driver’s door. You will hear a click.
Continue to hold the switch:
Until you hear another click
(after about 5 seconds) to
activate driver’s door unlock
feature.

Or, until you hear two more
clicks (after about 10 seconds)
to activate all doors unlock feature.
4. Release the switch, and within 20
seconds, turn the ignition switch
to the LOCK (0) position.

1. Make sure the shift lever is in the
Park (P) position.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position, and make sure to
close the driver’s door.

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 15:53:17 31TA5630_090

Door Locks
To program the Ignition Switch
Unlock mode:
Unlocks the driver’s door or all doors
when the ignition switch is moved out of
the ON (II) position.

3. On A/T vehicles, push and hold the
brake pedal, then move the shift
lever out of the Park (P) position.

Until you hear another click
(after about 5 seconds) to
activate driver’s door unlock
feature.

Instruments and Controls

4. Push and hold the rear of the
master door lock switch on the
driver’s door. You will hear a click.
Continue to hold the switch:

5. Release the switch, and within 20
seconds, turn the ignition switch
to the ACCESSORY (I) position.
On A/T vehicles, move the shift
lever to the Park (P) position.
6. Turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position.
Even if your vehicle’s battery is
removed or goes dead, the system
keeps the auto door lock/unlock
setting which you selected.

Or, until you hear two more
clicks (after about 10 seconds)
to activate all doors unlock feature.

1. Make sure the shift lever is in the
Park (P) position (A/T vehicles).
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position, and make sure to
close the driver’s door.

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 15:53:25 31TA5630_091

Door Locks, Remote Transmitter
Childproof Door Locks

Remote Transmitter

LEVER

LED

LOCK
BUTTON

Unlock
UNLOCK
BUTTON
Lock

The childproof door locks are
designed to prevent children seated
in the rear from accidentally opening
the rear doors. Each rear door has a
lock lever near the edge. With the
lever in the LOCK position (lever is
down), the door cannot be opened
from the inside regardless of the
position of the lock tab. To open the
door, push the lock tab forward and
use the outside door handle.

PANIC
BUTTON

TRUNK
RELEASE
BUTTON

LOCK − Press this button once to
lock all doors. Some exterior lights
will flash once. When you push
LOCK twice within 5 seconds, you
will hear a beep to verify that the
doors are locked and the security
system (if equipped) has set. You
cannot lock the doors if any door is
not fully closed or the key is in the
ignition switch.

2011 Accord Sedan

UNLOCK − Press this button once
to unlock the driver’s door. Push it
twice to unlock the remaining doors.
Some exterior lights will flash twice
each time you press the button.
The ceiling light and the door
activated spotlights (if equipped)
come on when you press the
UNLOCK button if the lights are in
the door activated position. If you do
not open any door within 30 seconds,
the light(s) will fade out. If you
relock the doors with the remote
transmitter before 30 seconds have
elapsed, the light(s) will go off
immediately.
If you do not open any door within 30
seconds, the doors automatically
relock and the security system (if
equipped) sets.

10/06/18 15:53:33 31TA5630_092

Remote Transmitter
You can also open all power windows
and the moonroof (if equipped) from
outside the vehicle with the remote
transmitter (see page 108 ).

Avoid dropping or throwing the
transmitter.
Protect the transmitter from
extreme temperature.
Do not immerse the transmitter in
any liquid.

Replacing the Transmitter Battery

If it takes several pushes on the
button to lock or unlock the doors,
replace the battery as soon as
possible.
Instruments and Controls

PANIC − Press this button for
about 2 seconds to attract attention:
the horn will sound, and the exterior
lights will flash for about 30 seconds.
To cancel panic mode, press any
other button on the remote
transmitter, or turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position.

Remote Transmitter Care

Battery type: CR1616

If you lose a transmitter, the
replacement needs to be
reprogrammed by your dealer.

TRUNK − Press and hold this
button for about 1 second to open
the trunk. You cannot open the trunk
if the key is in the ignition switch.

CONTINUED

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 15:53:42 31TA5630_093

Remote Transmitter

COIN

BATTERY

SCREW

To replace the battery:
1. Remove the screw at the base of
the transmitter with a small
Phillips-head screwdriver.

3. Inside the transmitter, separate
the inner cover from the keypad
by carefully prying on the edge
with a coin.

NOTE: Be careful when
removing this screw as the
head of the screw can strip out.

4. Remove the old battery, and insert
a new battery into the back of the
cover with the ＋ side facing down.
An improperly disposed of battery
can hurt the environment.
Always confirm local regulations
for battery disposal.
5. Install the parts in reverse order.

2. Separate the transmitter by prying
its middle seam with your
fingernail.

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 15:53:50 31TA5630_094

Remote Transmitter
Recalling a Memorized Driving
Position
U.S. EX-L V6
Canadian EX-L and EX-L V6 with
navigation system

Here are the settings activated with
the remote:

Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.

The driving position memory
activated (Driver 1, Driver 2) is
shown on the back of each
transmitter. Make sure you store
your desired driving position in the
memory that is activated by the
transmitter you normally carry.

Driving position memory
(see page 101 ).
Auto Door Locking/Unlocking
(see page 80 ).

When you unlock the driver’s door
with your remote transmitter, each
remote transmitter activates the
customized settings related to that
remote.

When you unlock and open the
driver’s door with the remote
transmitter, the driver’s seat (except
the power lumbar feature) starts to
move to the positions stored in
memory. The indicator in the related
memory button comes on.

2011 Accord Sedan

Instruments and Controls

10/06/18 15:53:59 31TA5630_095

Trunk

Pull

To close the trunk, press down on
the trunk lid.
Keep the trunk lid closed at all times
while driving to avoid damaging the
lid, and to prevent exhaust gas from
getting into the interior. See Carbon
Monoxide Hazard on page 51 .

TRUNK RELEASE LEVER

MASTER KEY

To protect items in the trunk when
you need to give the key to someone
else:

You can open the trunk in two ways:
Pull up on the trunk release lever
to the left of the driver’s seat.

1. Lock the trunk release lever with
the master key. Also make sure
the trunk pass-through cover is
locked (see page 99 ).

Press and hold the trunk release
button on the remote transmitter.

2. Give the person the valet key.

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 15:54:04 31TA5630_096

Trunk
Even if the trunk release lever is
locked with the master key, you can
open the trunk with the remote
transmitter.

Emergency Trunk Opener

Parents should decide if their
children should be shown how to use
this feature.

Instruments and Controls

For more information about child
safety, see page 36 .

As a safety feature, your vehicle has
a release lever on the trunk latch so
the trunk can be opened from the
inside.
To open the trunk, push the release
lever in the direction indicated by the
arrow.

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 15:54:16 31TA5630_097

Seats
Moves the whole seat up
and forward, or down
and backward. The front
of the seat also tilts up or
down at the same time.
(Driver’s seat only)

Front Seat Power Adjustments
Except LX
See pages 11 − 13 for important safety
information and warnings about how to
properly position the seats and seatbacks.

The controls for the power
adjustable front seats are on the
outside edge of each seat bottom.
You can adjust the seats with the
ignition switch in any position. Make
all seat adjustments before you start
driving.

Driver’s seat
is shown.

Moves the seat forward
and backward.

Moves the front of the
seat up or down.
(Driver’s seat only)

Except EX-L and EX-L V6

The front passenger’s seat adjusts
manually.

Driver’s seat only on SE, EX, EX-L and
V6 models

Increases or decreases
the lumbar support.

EX-L and EX-L V6

The passenger seat has the same
adjustments as the driver’s seat but
without any height and lumbar
adjustments.

Adjusts the seat-back
angle forward or
backward.

Raises or lowers the seat.
(Driver’s seat only)

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 15:54:24 31TA5630_098

Seats
U.S. EX-L V6, and Canadian EX-L and
EX-L V6 with navigation system

Front Seat Manual Adjustments
See pages 11 − 13 for important safety
information and warnings about how to
properly position the seats and seatbacks.

Make all seat adjustments before
you start driving.

Driver’s seat
is shown.

To adjust the seat forward or
backward, pull up on the bar under
the seat cushion’s front edge. Move
the seat to the desired position, and
release the bar. Try to move the seat
to make sure it is locked in position.

To change the seat-back angle, pull
up on the lever on the outside of the
seat bottom.
Once a seat is adjusted correctly,
rock it back and forth to make sure it
is locked in position.

2011 Accord Sedan

Instruments and Controls

The driver’s seat includes a memory
feature. Two seat positions can be
stored in separate memories. You
can then select a memorized position
by pushing the appropriate memory
button. Refer to page 101 for how to
memorize and select the seat
positions.

10/06/18 15:54:31 31TA5630_099

Seats
Driver’s Seat Manual Height
Adjustment
LX

Head Restraints
See page 13 for important safety
information and a warning about
improperly positioning head restraints.

Your vehicle is equipped with head
restraints in all seating positions to
help protect you and your
passengers from the likelihood of
whiplash and other injuries.

They are most effective when you
adjust them so the center of the back
of the occupant’s head rests against
the center of the restraint.

The height of your driver’s seat is
adjustable. To raise the seat,
repeatedly pull up the lever on the
outside of the seat cushion. To lower
the seat, push the lever down
repeatedly.

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 15:54:39 31TA5630_100

Seats
Front

Rear Center

CUSHION

Failure to reinstall the head
restraints can result in severe
injury during a crash.

LEGS

SEAT-BACK

RELEASE
BUTTON

LEGS

SEAT-BACK

Adjusting the Head Restraint

Removing the Head Restraint

The head restraints adjust for height.
You need both hands to adjust a
restraint. Do not attempt to adjust it
while driving. To raise it, pull upward.
To lower the restraint, push the
release button sideways, and push
the restraint down.

To remove a head restraint for
cleaning or repair, pull it up as far as
it will go. Push the release button,
then pull the restraint out of the seatback.

Always replace the head
restraints before driving.
When reinstalling a head restraint,
put the legs back in place. Then
adjust it to the appropriate height
while pressing the release button.
Make sure the head restraint locks
in position when you reinstall it.

CONTINUED

2011 Accord Sedan

Instruments and Controls

RELEASE
BUTTON

10/06/18 15:54:47 31TA5630_101

Seats
Active Head Restraints

against the likelihood of whiplash
and injuries to the neck and upper
spine.
After a collision, the activated
restraint should return to its normal
position.
If the restraints do not return to their
normal position, or in the event of a
severe collision, have the vehicle
inspected by a Honda dealer.

The driver’s and front passenger’s
seats have active head restraints. If
the vehicle is struck severely from
the rear, the occupant properly
secured with the seat belt will be
pushed against the seat-back and the
head restraint will automatically
move forward.
This reduces the distance between
the restraint and the occupant’s head.
It also helps protect the occupants

2011 Accord Sedan

For a head restraint system to work
properly:
Do not hang any items on the head
restraints, or from the restraint
legs.
Do not place any object between
an occupant and the seat-back.
Install each restraint in its proper
location.
Only use genuine Honda
replacement head restraints.

10/06/18 15:54:55 31TA5630_102

Seats
Folding Rear Seat
The back of the rear seat folds down,
giving you direct access to the trunk.
The seat-back is released from inside
the trunk.

RELEASE

GUIDE

When storing cargo, you can move
the rear center shoulder belt out of
the way by removing the belt from
the guide.

To release the seat-back from inside
the trunk, pull the release under the
trunk panel. Push the seat-back
down from inside the trunk, or pull
the seat-back down from inside the
vehicle.

Remove any items from the seat
before you fold down the seat-back.
Make sure the rear seat armrest is
stored.

CONTINUED

2011 Accord Sedan

Instruments and Controls

Pull

10/06/18 15:55:03 31TA5630_103

Seats
Make sure that the folded seat-back
does not press against the front
passenger’s seat, as this could cause
the weight sensors to work
improperly.
If the rear head restraints get caught
on the front seat backs and you
cannot fold down the rear seat-back
fully, you can remove the head
restraints (see page 95 ).
Make sure the removed head
restraints are securely stored.
To lock the seat-back upright, push it
firmly against the trunk panel. Make
sure it is latched in place by pulling
on the top of the seat.

Make sure all rear shoulder belts are
positioned in front of the rear seatback, and the center shoulder belt is
re-positioned in the guide whenever
the seat-back is in its upright position.
Be sure there are no twists in any
shoulder belt.

Armrests
Front

Do not put any heavy items on the
seat-back when it is folded down.
Make sure all items in the trunk, or
items extending through the opening
into the back seat, are secured.
Loose items can fly forward and
cause injury if you have to brake
hard. See Carrying Cargo on
page 309 .
Never drive with the seat-back
folded down and the trunk lid open.
See Carbon Monoxide Hazard on
page 51 .

2011 Accord Sedan

To use the console lid as an armrest,
slide it to one of its three positions.

10/06/18 15:55:10 31TA5630_104

Seats
Rear

Trunk Pass-through Cover
KEY CYLINDER

KNOB

Make sure all items in the trunk and
those extending through the passthrough are secured.

The rear seat armrest is in the
center of the rear seat. Pivot it down
to use it.
A beverage holder is located in the
armrest.

LID

Never drive with this cover open and
the trunk lid open.
See Carbon Monoxide Hazard on
page 51 .

The trunk pass-through cover can be
opened from inside the vehicle; it
folds down onto the center armrest.
Open the cover by sliding the knob
downward and pulling on the cover.
To close the cover, swing it up and
push firmly on the top. Make sure it
latches properly.

2011 Accord Sedan

Instruments and Controls

For security, this cover can be
locked and unlocked only with the
master key. To lock the cover, insert
the key and turn it clockwise.

10/06/18 15:55:18 31TA5630_105

Seat Heaters
In the HI setting, the heater turns off
when the seat gets warm, and turns
back on after the seat’s temperature
drops.

Passenger’s
Seat

In the LO setting, the heater runs
continuously. It does not cycle with
temperature changes.

HEATERS

Follow these precautions whenever
you use the seat heaters:

Driver’s
Seat

U.S. SE, EX-L and EX-L V6
Canadian EX-L and EX-L V6

Both front seats are equipped with
seat heaters. Because of the sensors
for the side airbag cutoff system,
there is no heater in the passenger’s
seat-back. The ignition switch must
be in the ON (II) position to use the
heaters.

Push the right side of the switch, HI,
to rapidly heat up the seat. After the
seat reaches a comfortable
temperature, select LO by pushing
the left side of the switch. This will
keep the seat warm.

100

2011 Accord Sedan

Use the HI setting only to heat the
seats quickly, because it draws
large amounts of current from the
battery.
If the engine is left idling for an
extended period, do not use the
seat heaters even on the LO
setting. It can weaken the battery,
causing hard starting.

10/06/18 15:55:25 31TA5630_106

Driving Position Memory System
U.S. EX-L V6, and Canadian EX-L and
EX-L V6 with navigation system

Your vehicle has a memory feature
for the driver’s seat position.

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position. You cannot add a
new seat position in memory
unless the ignition switch is in the
ON (II) position. You can recall a
memorized position with the
ignition switch in any position.
2. Adjust the seat to a comfortable
position (see page 92 ).

SET BUTTON

MEMORY BUTTONS

3. Press and release the SET button.
You will hear a beep. Immediately
press and hold one of the memory
buttons (1 or 2) until you hear two
beeps. The indicator in the
memory button will come on. The
current position of the driver’s
seat is now stored.

CONTINUED

101

2011 Accord Sedan

Instruments and Controls

Two seat positions can be stored in
separate memories. You select a
memorized position by pushing the
appropriate button or using the
appropriate remote transmitter
(Driver 1 or Driver 2).

Storing a Driving Position in
Memory
Store a driver’s seat position only
when the vehicle is parked.

10/06/18 15:55:33 31TA5630_107

Driving Position Memory System
Each memory button stores only one
driving position. Storing a new
position erases the previous setting
stored in that button’s memory. If
you want to add a new position while
retaining the current one, use the
other memory button.
All stored driving positions will be
lost if your vehicle’s battery goes
dead or is disconnected.

To cancel the storing procedure
after pressing the SET button, do
any of the following:

Selecting a Memorized Position

Press the SET button again within
5 seconds.
Fail to press a memory button
within 5 seconds.
Readjust the seat position.

MEMORY BUTTONS

To select a memorized position, do
this:
1. Make sure the parking brake is set
and the shift lever is in Park
(automatic).
2. Press the desired memory button
(1 or 2) until you hear a beep, then
release the button.

102

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 15:55:40 31TA5630_108

Driving Position Memory System
To stop the system’s automatic
adjustment, do any of these actions:
Press any button on the driver’s
door: SET, memory button 1 or 2.
Push any of the adjustment
switches for the seat.

On vehicles with manual transmission

Shift out of Park (automatic).

If the parking brake is not set, you
must press and hold the memory
button until the adjustment is
complete.

Release the parking brake
(manual).

If desired, you can use the
adjustment switches to change the
seat position after it is in its
memorized position. If you change
the memorized position, the
indicator in the memory button will
go out. To keep this seat position for
later use, you must store it in the
driver’s seat position memory.

103

2011 Accord Sedan

Instruments and Controls

The system will move the driver’s
seat to the memorized position. The
indicator in the selected memory
button will flash during movement.
When the adjustment is complete,
you will hear two beeps, and the
indicator will stay on.

10/06/18 15:55:46 31TA5630_109

Mirrors
Keep the inside and outside mirrors
clean and adjusted for best visibility.
Be sure to adjust the mirrors before
you start driving.

There is also a sensor on the back of
the mirror. Items hung on the mirror
may block this sensor and af f ect its
perf ormance.

SENSOR
INDICATOR
AUTO BUTTON
TAB

LX, LX-P, SE, EX and EX V6

The inside mirror has day and night
positions. The night position reduces
glare from headlights behind you.
Flip the tab on the bottom edge of
the mirror to select the day or night
position.

EX-L and EX-L V6

The inside mirror can automatically
darken to reduce glare. To turn on
this feature, press the button on the
bottom of the mirror. The AUTO
indicator comes on as a reminder.
When it is on, the mirror darkens
when it senses the headlights of a
vehicle behind you, then returns to
normal visibility when the lights are
gone. Press the button again to turn
off this feature.

104

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 15:55:53 31TA5630_110

Mirrors
Adjusting the Power Mirrors
SELECTOR SWITCH

3. Push the appropriate edge of the
adjustment switch to move the
mirror right, left, up, or down.

Power Mirror Heaters
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER/
HEATED MIRROR BUTTON

EX-L V6 without navigation system is
shown.

ADJUSTMENT SWITCH

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position.

Except U.S. LX, LX-P and SE

The outside mirrors are heated to
remove fog and frost. With the
ignition switch in the ON (II)
position, turn on the heaters by
pressing the button. The indicator in
the button comes on as a reminder.
Press the button again to turn the
heaters off. Pressing this button also
turns the rear window defogger on
and off.

2. Move the selector switch to L
(driver’s side) or R (passenger’s
side).

105

2011 Accord Sedan

Instruments and Controls

4. When you finish, move the selector
selector switch to the center (off)
position. This turns the adjustment
switch off to keep your settings.

10/06/18 15:55:58 31TA5630_111

Power Windows
MAIN SWITCH

INDICATOR

Closing a power window on
someone’s hands or fingers can
cause serious injury.
Make sure your passengers are
away from the windows before
closing them.
DRIVER’S
WINDOW
SWITCH

FRONT
PASSENGER’S
WINDOW SWITCH

AUTO − To open either front
window fully (driver’s window only
on LX), push the window switch
firmly down to the second detent,
then release it. The window
automatically goes down all the way.
To stop the window from going all
the way down, pull back on the
window switch briefly.
To close either front window fully
(driver’s window only on LX), pull
back the window switch firmly to the
second detent, then release it. The
window automatically goes all the
way up. To stop the window from
going all the way up, push down on
the window switch briefly.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position to raise or lower any
window. To open a window, push the
switch down and hold it. Release the
switch when you want the window to
stop. Pull back on the switch and
hold it to close the window.

106

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 15:56:03 31TA5630_112

Power Windows

The windows and the main switch
feature will operate for up to 10
minutes after you turn off the
ignition switch. Opening either front
door cancels this function.

AUTO REVERSE − If either front
window (driver’s window only on
LX) senses any obstacle while it is
closing automatically, it will reverse
direction, and then stop. To close the
window, remove the obstacle, then
use the window switch again.

Instruments and Controls

When you push the main switch in,
the indicator comes on and the
passengers’ windows cannot be
raised or lowered. Use the main
switch when you have children in the
vehicle so they do not injure
themselves by operating the
windows unintentionally. To cancel
this feature, push on the switch
again. The switch will pop out and
the indicator will go off.

Auto reverse stops sensing when the
window is almost closed. You should
always check that all passengers and
objects are away from the window
before closing it.
NOTE: The driver’s window auto
reverse function is disabled when
you continuously pull up the switch.

107

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 15:56:12 31TA5630_113

Power Windows
Opening the Windows and
Moonroof with the Remote
Transmitter

UNLOCK
BUTTON

You can open all of the windows and
the moonroof (if equipped) from the
outside with the remote transmitter.

2. Press the UNLOCK button a
second time, and hold it. The
remaining doors unlock, and all
four windows and the moonroof
start to open. To stop the windows
and moonroof, release the button.

Opening/Closing the Windows
and Moonroof with the Key

3. To open the windows and
moonroof further, press the
button again (within 10 seconds of
step 1) and hold it. If the windows
and the moonroof stop before the
desired position, repeat steps 1
and 2.
You cannot close the windows or the
moonroof with the remote
transmitter.

Open

You can open and close the windows
and the moonroof (if equipped) with
the key in the driver’s door lock.
To open:

1. Press the UNLOCK button once
to unlock the driver’s door.

1. Insert the key in the driver’s door
lock.
2. Turn the key clockwise, then
release it.

108

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 15:56:19 31TA5630_114

Power Windows
3. Turn the key clockwise again, and
hold it. All four windows and the
moonroof start to open. To stop
the windows and the moonroof,
release the key.

1. Insert the key in the driver’s door
lock.

NOTE: If the windows and the
moonroof stop before the desired
position, repeat steps 2 and 3.

2. Turn the key counterclockwise,
then release it.

Instruments and Controls

4. To open the windows and the
moonroof further, turn and hold
the key again (within 10 seconds
of step 2).

To close:

3. Turn the key counterclockwise
again, and hold it. All four
windows and the moonroof start to
close. To stop the windows and
the moonroof, release the key.
4. To close the windows and the
moonroof further, turn and hold
the key again (within 10 seconds
of step 2).

109

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 15:56:26 31TA5630_115

Moonroof
MOONROOF SWITCH
Open

Tilt
Close

To tilt up the moonroof, push on the
center of the moonroof switch. To
stop the moonroof from tilting up
fully, push the switch briefly.
To open the moonroof, pull back on
the switch and hold it. Release the
switch when the moonroof reaches
the desired position. To close the
moonroof, push the switch forward
and hold it. Release the switch to
stop the operation.

AUTO − To open the moonroof
fully, pull back the moonroof switch
firmly, then release it. The moonroof
automatically opens all the way. To
stop the moonroof from opening,
push the switch briefly.
To close the moonroof fully, firmly
push the moonroof switch forward,
then release it. The moonroof
automatically closes all the way. To
stop the moonroof from closing,
push the switch briefly.

If equipped

The moonroof can be tilted up in the
back for ventilation, or it can be slid
back into the roof. Use the switch on
the front ceiling to operate the
moonroof. You must turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position to operate the moonroof.

Opening or closing the
moonroof on someone’s hands
or fingers can cause serious
injury.
Make sure all hands and fingers
are clear of the moonroof
before opening or closing it.

110

2011 Accord Sedan

To open or close the moonroof
partially, lightly pull the switch back
or push it forward and hold it. The
moonroof will stop when you release
the switch.

10/06/18 15:56:32 31TA5630_116

Moonroof
You can open and close the
moonroof for up to 10 minutes after
you turn off the ignition switch.
Opening either front door cancels
this function.

Auto reverse stops sensing when the
moonroof is almost closed. You
should always check that all
passengers and objects are away
from the moonroof before closing it.

If you try to open the moonroof in
below-f reezing temperatures, or when
it is covered with snow or ice, you can
damage the moonroof panel or its
motor.

You can use the remote transmitter
or the key to operate the moonroof
from the outside. Refer to page 108
for details.
Instruments and Controls

Auto Reverse
If the moonroof runs into any
obstacle while it is closing
automatically, it will reverse
direction, and then stop. To close the
moonroof, remove the obstacle, then
use the moonroof switch again.

111

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 15:56:36 31TA5630_117

Parking Brake

Driving the vehicle with the parking
brake applied can damage the rear
brakes and hubs. A beeper will sound if
the vehicle is driven with the parking
brake on.

PARKING BRAKE LEVER

To apply the parking brake, pull the
lever up fully. To release it, pull up
slightly, push the button, and lower
the lever. The parking brake
indicator on the instrument panel
should go out when the parking
brake is fully released (see page 57 ).

112

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 15:56:41 31TA5630_118

Interior Convenience Items

SUNGLASSES HOLDER
DOOR POCKETS
COAT HOOK

VANITY MIRROR

SUN VISOR

GLOVE BOX

ACCESSORY POWER
SOCKET
BEVERAGE HOLDER
ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET
AUXILIARY INPUT JACK
USB ADAPTER CABLE＊
TRUNK

BEVERAGE HOLDER in
REAR SEAT ARMREST

CONSOLE COMPARTMENT

＊ : If equipped

113

2011 Accord Sedan

Instruments and Controls

CENTER POCKETS

10/06/18 15:56:49 31TA5630_119

Interior Convenience Items
Beverage Holders

Open the front beverage holder by
pulling up on the lid.

Front

Accessory Power Sockets
Front

Rear

Be careful when you are using the
beverage holders. A spilled liquid
that is very hot can scald you or your
passengers. Liquid can also spill
from the door pocket beverage
holders when you open or close the
doors. Use only resealable
containers in the door pockets.

The rear seat also has a beverage
holder in the center armrest. To use
it, pivot the armrest down.

Your vehicle has two accessory
power sockets; one is at the front of
the center console and the other is in
the console compartment.
To use an accessory power socket,
the ignition switch must be in the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.

Spilled liquids can damage the
upholstery, carpeting, and electrical
components in the interior.

114

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 15:56:56 31TA5630_120

Interior Convenience Items
CONSOLE COMPARTMENT

None of the sockets will power an
automotive type cigarette lighter
element.

Console Compartment
LEVER

CONSOLE COMPARTMENT

Each socket is intended to supply
power for 12 volt DC accessories
that are rated 120 watts or less (10
amps).

To open the console compartment,
pull up on the lever and lift the
armrest.
To close, lower the armrest, and
push it down until it latches.

115

2011 Accord Sedan

Instruments and Controls

Make sure to put the socket cover
back in place to prevent any small
foreign objects from getting into the
socket.

10/06/18 15:57:02 31TA5630_121

Interior Convenience Items
Glove Box

Sunglasses Holder
An open glove box can cause
serious injury to your passenger
in a crash, even if the
passenger is wearing the seat
belt.

To lock

Push

Always keep the glove box
closed while driving.

GLOVE BOX

Open the glove box by pulling the
handle to the left. Close it with a firm
push. Lock or unlock the glove box
with the master key.

To open the sunglasses holder, push
then release the indent. It will
unlatch and swing down. To close it,
push it until it latches. Make sure the
holder is closed while you are driving.

116

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 15:57:08 31TA5630_122

Interior Convenience Items
Sun Visors

Make sure you put the sun visor
back in place when you are getting
into or out of the vehicle.

Instruments and Controls

Slide

Some larger styles of sunglasses
may not fit in the holder.
You may also store small items in
this holder. Make sure they are
small enough to let the holder close
and latch, and that they are not
heavy enough to cause the holder to
pop open while driving.

SUN VISOR

To use the sun visor, pull it down.
When using the sun visor for the
side window, remove the support rod
from the clip, and swing it out.
In this position, the sun visor can be
adjusted by moving it on its slider.
Do not use the extended sun visor
over the inside mirror.

117

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 15:57:17 31TA5630_123

Interior Convenience Items
Vanity Mirror

Coat Hook

Center Pockets

Vehicle without navigation system
is shown.

To use the vanity mirror on the back
of the sun visor, pull up the cover.

To use a coat hook, slide it out
slightly, then pull it down.

The vanity mirror lights come on
when you pull up the cover.

Make sure the coat hook is folded up
when you are not using it. This hook
is not designed for large or heavy
items.

118

2011 Accord Sedan

Pull up the lid to open each pocket.

10/06/18 15:57:26 31TA5630_124

Interior Lights
Ceiling Light
DOOR ACTIVATED POSITION

After all doors are closed tightly, the
light dims slightly, then fades out in
about 30 seconds.

Spotlights

The ceiling light has a three-position
switch: ON, Door Activated, and
OFF. In the Door Activated (center)
position, the light comes on when
you:

If you leave any door open without
the key in the ignition switch, the
ceiling light will go off after about 15
minutes.

LX, LX-P, SE

Turn on a spotlight by pushing the
lens. Push the lens again to turn it
off. You can use the spotlights at all
times.

Open any door.
Unlock the driver’s door with the
key or remote transmitter.
CONTINUED

119

2011 Accord Sedan

Instruments and Controls

The ceiling light (with the switch in
the center position) comes on when
you remove the key from the ignition
switch. If you do not open a door, the
light stays on, then fades out in
about 30 seconds.

10/06/18 15:57:32 31TA5630_125

Interior Lights
OFF POSITION

DOOR ACTIVATED

The spotlights (with the switch in
the DOOR position) also come on
when you unlock the door with the
key or the remote transmitter, and
when you remove the key from the
ignition switch.

SPOTLIGHT

Except LX, LX-P, and SE

The spotlights have a two-position
switch. In the DOOR position, the
lights come on when you open any
door. The lights fade out in about 30
seconds after the doors are closed
tightly. In the OFF position, the
lights do not come on.

120

2011 Accord Sedan

Courtesy Lights
The courtesy light in each front door
comes on when the door is opened,
and goes out when the door is closed.
Your vehicle also has a courtesy light
in the ignition switch. This light
comes on when you open the driver’s
door. It fades out in about 30
seconds after the door is closed.

10/06/18 18:02:48 31TA5630_126

Features
The heating and air conditioning
system in your vehicle provides a
comfortable driving environment in
all weather conditions.

Except LX, LX-P, and SE

Your vehicle has an anti-theft audio
system that requires a code number
to enable it.
Except LX

The security system helps to
discourage vandalism and theft of
your vehicle.

LX, LX-P, and U.S. SE models

Playing the FM/AM Radio ........... 137
Playing a Disc ................................. 144
Disc Player Error Messages ........ 150
EX, EX-L, Canadian SE, and V6
models without navigation system

Audio System ................................. 151
Playing the FM/AM Radio ........... 152
Playing the XM Radio ................. 159
Playing Discs .................................. 165
Disc Changer Error Messages .... 175
Playing an iPod ............................. 176
iPod Error Messages .................. 184
Playing a USB Flash Memory
Device ......................................... 185
USB Flash Memory Device
Error Messages ......................... 193

Playing an iPod ............................. 226
iPod Error Messages .................. 234
Playing a USB Flash Memory
Device ......................................... 235
USB Flash Memory Device
Error Messages ......................... 244
Protecting Your Discs ................... 245
FM/AM Radio Reception ............. 248
Remote Audio Controls................. 250
Auxiliary Input Jack ....................... 252
Radio Theft Protection.................. 253
Setting the Clock ........................... 254
Security System ............................. 257
Compass.......................................... 259
Cruise Control ................................ 263
HomeLink Universal
Transceiver................................. 266
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink ......... 270
Rearview Camera and Monitor .... 294

Models with navigation system

Audio System ................................. 194
Playing the FM/AM Radio ........... 195
Playing the XM Radio ................. 207
Playing Discs .................................. 214
Disc Changer Error Messages .... 225

121

2011 Accord Sedan

Features

The standard audio system has
many features. This section
describes those features and how to
use them.

Vents, Heating, and A/C .............. 122
Climate Control System ................ 128
Audio System ................................. 136

10/06/18 15:57:42 31TA5630_127

Vents, Heating, and A/C
LX, LX-P, SE, U.S. EX, and U.S. EX V6
FAN CONTROL DIAL

RECIRCULATION BUTTON

TEMPERATURE CONTROL DIAL
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER/
HEATED MIRROR BUTTON＊

MAX A/C BUTTON

MODE CONTROL
BUTTONS

REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
BUTTON
AIR CONDITIONING (A/C)
BUTTON

＊ : If equipped

122

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 15:57:56 31TA5630_128

Vents, Heating, and A/C
Fan Control
Turn this dial to increase or decrease
the fan speed and airflow.
Temperature Control
Turning this dial clockwise increases
the temperature of the airflow.

MAX A/C Button
The system automatically
turns on the A/C and switches to
recirculation mode (see page 126 to
use this setting). Air flows from the
center and side vents in the
dashboard. Pressing the
, A/C,
or any of the mode buttons cancels
MAX A/C, but the A/C stays on.

Rear Window Defogger
Button
/
This button turns the rear window
defogger on and off (see page 74 ).
Except U.S. LX, LX-P and SE

Pushing this button also turns the
power mirror heaters on and off.

The outside air intakes for the
heating and cooling system are at
the base of the windshield. Keep this
area clear of leaves and other debris.
The system should be left in fresh
air mode under almost all conditions.
Keeping the system in recirculation
mode, particularly with the A/C off,
can cause the windows to fog up.
Switch to recirculation mode when
driving through dusty or smoky
conditions, then return to fresh air
mode.

123

2011 Accord Sedan

Features

Air Conditioning (A/C) Button
This button turns the air
conditioning on and off. The
indicator in the button is on when
the A/C is on.

Recirculation Button
When the recirculation indicator is
on, air from the vehicle’s interior is
sent throughout the system again.
When the indicator is off, air is
brought in from the outside of the
vehicle (fresh air mode).

10/06/18 15:58:09 31TA5630_129

Vents, Heating, and A/C
Mode Control
Use the mode control buttons to
select the vents air flows from. Some
air will flow from the dashboard
corner vents in all modes.
Air flows from the center
and corner vents in the dashboard,
and the vents on the back of the
center console＊.
Airflow is divided between
the vents in the dashboard and the
back of the center console＊, and the
floor vents.
Air flows from the floor
vents.
＊: If equipped

When you select
, the system
automatically switches to fresh air
mode. If you switch the mode from
or
to
, the system
keeps the A/C on. The A/C
indicator will not come on if it was
off to start with.
To turn off the A/C, press the A/C
button to illuminate the indicator,
then press it again to turn off the
A/C.
When you switch to
or
mode from
, the A/C
turns off. But if it was on to start
with, the A/C stays on.
Airflow is divided between
the floor vents and the defroster
vents at the base of the windshield.
Air flows from the defroster
vents at the base of the windshield.

124

2011 Accord Sedan

When you select
or
,
the system automatically switches to
fresh air mode and turns on the A/C.
You cannot turn the A/C off in this
mode.

10/06/18 15:58:21 31TA5630_130

Vents, Heating, and A/C
Ventilation
The ventilation system draws in
outside air, circulates it through the
interior, then releases it through
vents near the rear window.

2. Make sure the A/C is off.
3. Select

and fresh air mode.

4. Set the fan to the desired speed.
The direction of airflow from the
vents in the center and each side of
the dashboard, and on the back of
the center console is adjustable.

.
1. Select
When you select
, the system
automatically switches to fresh air
mode. If you switch the mode
from
or
, the system
also automatically turns on the
A/C. This helps prevent the
windows from fogging up
unintendedly. The A/C indicator
will not come on if it was off to
start with (see the first column on
this page).
2. Set the fan to the desired speed.
3. Adjust the warmth of the air with
the temperature control dial.

Using the A/C
Air conditioning places an extra load
on the engine. Watch the engine
coolant temperature gauge (see page
66 ). If it moves near the red zone,
turn off the A/C until the gauge
reading returns to normal.
1. Turn on the A/C by pressing the
button. The indicator in the button
comes on when a fan speed is
selected.
2. Make sure the temperature is set
to maximum cool.
3. Select

4. If the outside air is humid, select
recirculation mode. If the outside
air is dry, select fresh air mode.
5. Set the fan to the desired speed.
If the interior is very warm, you can
cool it down more rapidly by partially
opening the windows, turning on the
air conditioning, and setting the fan
to maximum speed in fresh air mode.
CONTINUED

125

2011 Accord Sedan

Features

1. Set the temperature to the lower
limit.

Using the Heater
The heater uses engine coolant to
warm the air. If the engine is cold, it
will be several minutes before you
feel warm air coming from the
system.

10/06/18 15:58:31 31TA5630_131

Vents, Heating, and A/C
To cool the interior with MAX A/C:
1. Set the fan to the desired speed.
2. Select MAX A/C.
The system automatically turns on
the A/C, selects
, and
switches to recirculation mode.
3. Make sure the temperature is set
to maximum cool.
Dehumidify the Interior
Air conditioning, as it cools, removes
moisture from the air. When used in
combination with the heater, it
makes the interior warm and dry and
can prevent the windows from
fogging up.
1. Turn the fan on.
2. Turn on the air conditioning.
and fresh air mode.
3. Select
4. Adjust the temperature to your
preference.

To Defog and Defrost
To remove fog from the inside of the
windows:
1. Set the fan to the desired speed, or
high for faster defrosting.
. The system
2. Select
automatically switches to fresh air
mode and turns on the A/C. The
A/C indicator will not come on if it
was off to start with.
3. Adjust the temperature so the
airflow feels warm.
/
to help
4. Select
clear the rear window.
5. To increase airflow to the
windshield, close the corner vents.

This setting is suitable for all driving
conditions whenever the outside
temperature is above 32°F (0°C).

126

2011 Accord Sedan

When you switch to
, from
or
, the A/C stays on.
This helps prevent the windows from
rapidly fogging up when the air is
suddenly routed away from the
windshield. If you want to turn the
A/C off, press and release the A/C
button twice. The indicator in the
button comes on and then goes off.

10/06/18 15:58:42 31TA5630_132

Vents, Heating, and A/C
To Remove Exterior Frost or Ice
From the Windows

2. Select

3. Set the fan and temperature
controls to maximum level.

Keep the system off for short
periods only.

Rear Ventilation
REAR VENTS
DIAL
Open

To keep stale air and mustiness
from collecting, you should have
the fan running at all times.

Features

. The system
1. Select
automatically switches to fresh air
mode and turns on the A/C.
The A/C indicator does not come
on if it was off to start with.

To Turn Everything Off
Turning the fan speed control dial all
the way to the left shuts the system
off.

TABS

To clear the windows faster, you can
close the dashboard corner vents by
rotating the wheel below each vent.
This sends more warm air to the
windshield defroster vents. Once the
windshield is clear, select fresh air
mode to avoid fogging the windows.

If equipped

The airflow from the rear vents can
be adjusted when the fan mode is in
the
or
position.
You can adjust the direction of the
airflow by moving the tab on each
vent up-and-down and side-to-side.
You can also open or close the vents
with the dial between them.

For your safety, make sure you have
a clear view through all the windows
before driving.

127

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 15:58:49 31TA5630_133

Climate Control System
U.S. EX-L and EX-L V6
Canadian EX, EX-L, and V6 models
Without navigation system

With navigation system
PASSENGER’S SIDE
TEMPERATURE CONTROL
PASSENGER’S SIDE TEMPERATURE
SWITCH
AUTO INDICATOR
CENTER DISPLAY
PASSENGER’S SIDE
DRIVER’S SIDE
TEMPERATURE
TEMPERATURE
WINDSHIELD
DRIVER’S SIDE TEMPERATURE
DEFROSTER BUTTON
AUTO INDICATOR
MODE CONTROL
REAR WINDOW
BUTTON
DEFOGGER/
HEATED MIRROR
BUTTON
SYNC
BUTTON

DRIVER’S SIDE TEMPERATURE
CONTROL SWITCH

ON/OFF
BUTTON

AUTO BUTTON
ON/OFF BUTTON
SYNC BUTTON
RECIRCULATION BUTTON
U.S. models are shown.

AUTO BUTTON

REAR WINDOW
DEFOGGER/
HEATED MIRROR
BUTTON
AIR CONDITIONING (A/C)
BUTTON

RECIRCULATION
BUTTON
FAN CONTROL
BUTTONS

MODE CONTROL BUTTON
WINDSHIELD DEFROSTER BUTTON
FAN CONTROL SWITCH

DRIVER’S SIDE
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL SWITCH

128

2011 Accord Sedan

PASSENGER’S SIDE
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL SWITCH
AIR CONDITIONING
(A/C) BUTTON

10/06/18 15:58:58 31TA5630_134

Climate Control System
Voice Control System
On models with navigation system

The climate control system for your
vehicle can also be operated using
the voice control system. See the
navigation system manual for
complete details.

Using Automatic Climate Control
The automatic climate control
system in your vehicle maintains the
interior temperature you select. The
system also adjusts the fan speed
and airflow levels.

2. Set the desired temperature with
the temperature control switch.
You can set the driver’s side
temperature and the passenger’s
side temperature separately.
The system automatically selects
the proper mix of conditioned
and/or heated air that will, as
quickly as possible, raise or lower
the interior temperature to your
preference.

Temperature Control

The driver’s side temperature and
the passenger’s side temperature can
be set separately. Push up the switch
of the appropriate temperature
control to increase the temperature
of airflow. Push down the switch to
decrease it. Each set temperature is
shown in the display (in the center
display on models with navigation
system).

CONTINUED

129

2011 Accord Sedan

Features

1. Press the Auto button. The
indicator in the button also comes
on as a reminder. You will see
AUTO on the display (in the
center display on models with
navigation system).

The direction of airflow from the
vents in the center and each side of
the dashboard, and on the back of
the center console is adjustable.

10/06/18 15:59:07 31TA5630_135

Climate Control System
When you set the temperature to its
lower limit (
) or its upper limit
(
), the system runs at full
cooling or heating only. It does not
regulate the interior temperature.
When you adjust a fan control, the
fan is taken out of AUTO mode.

SYNC Button

When you press this button, the
indicator in the button comes on, and
the passenger’s side temperature is
synchronized to the driver’s side set
temperature. Changing the
passenger’s side temperature makes
the indicator go off and takes the
system out of SYNC mode.

On models with navigation system

In AUTO mode, the vehicle’s interior
temperature is independently
regulated for the driver and front
passenger according to each
adjusted temperature. The system
also regulates each temperature
based on the information of the
sunlight sensor and the sun’s
position which is updated
automatically by the navigation’s
global positioning system (GPS). If
one side of the vehicle is getting too
much sun, the system lowers the
temperature only on that side.

ON/OFF Button

Each time you press this button, the
climate control system switches
between on and off. Turning on the
system with this button selects your
last climate control selection.

130

2011 Accord Sedan

To Turn Everything Off
To turn the system completely off,
press the ON/OFF button.
Keep the system completely off
for short periods only.
To keep stale air and mustiness
from collecting, you should have
the fan running at all times.

10/06/18 15:59:17 31TA5630_136

Climate Control System

Fan Control

Air Conditioning (A/C) Button

Recirculation Button

This button turns the air
conditioning on and off. You will see
A/C ON or A/C OFF in the display.

When the indicator in the button is
on, air from the vehicle’s interior is
sent through the system again.
When the indicator is off, air is
brought in from the outside of the
vehicle (fresh air mode).

When you turn the A/C off, the
system cannot regulate the inside
temperature if you set the
temperature control below the
outside temperature.

On models without navigation system

Push the switch up to increase the
fan speed and airflow. Push the
switch down to decrease them.

The outside air intakes for the
climate control system are at the
base of the windshield. Keep this
area clear of leaves and other debris.
The system should be left in fresh
air mode under almost all conditions.
Keeping the system in recirculation
mode, particularly with the A/C off,
can cause the windows to fog up.

On models with navigation system

Press the ▲ button to increase the
fan speed and airflow. Press the ▼
button to decrease them.

Switch to recirculation mode when
driving through dusty or smoky
conditions, then return to fresh air
mode.
CONTINUED

131

2011 Accord Sedan

Features

Semi-automatic Operation
You can manually select various
functions of the climate control
system when it is in fully automatic
mode. All other features remain
automatically controlled. Making any
manual selection causes the word
AUTO in the display to go out.

10/06/18 15:59:31 31TA5630_137

Climate Control System
Rear Window Defogger Button

This button turns the rear window
defogger off and on (see page 74 ).
Pushing this button also turns the
power mirror heaters on and off.
Mode Control

Use the mode control button to
select the vents the air flows from.
Some air will flow from the
dashboard vents in all modes.
Airflow is divided between
the floor and corner vents and the
defroster vents at the base of the
windshield.
Air flows from the floor
vents.
Airflow is divided between
the vents in the dashboard and the
back of the center console, and the
floor vents.

Air flows from the center
and corner vents in the dashboard,
and the vents on the back of the
center console.
Windshield Defroster Button

This button directs the main airflow
to the windshield for faster
defrosting. It also overrides any
mode selection you may have made.
When you select
, the system
automatically switches to fresh air
mode and turns on the A/C. For
faster defrosting, manually set the
fan speed to high. You can also
increase airflow to the windshield by
closing the corner vents on the
dashboard. To close the vents, rotate
the wheel under each corner vent.
When you turn off
by
pressing the button again, the
system returns to its former settings.

132

2011 Accord Sedan

To remove fog from the inside of the
windows, set as follows:
. The system
1. Select
automatically switches to fresh air
mode and turns on the A/C.
2. Adjust the temperature with the
driver’s side temperature control
so the airflow feels warm.
to help clear the
3. Select
rear window.
4. To increase airflow to the
windshield, close the corner vents.
For faster defogging, manually set
the fan speed to high.
For your safety, make sure you have
a clear view through all the windows
before driving.
When the indicator in the
button is on, the SYNC
indicator also comes on. The front
passenger’s temperature cannot be
set separately from the driver’s.

10/06/18 15:59:38 31TA5630_138

Climate Control System
Dual Temperature Control
Your vehicle has two temperature
control switches, one for the driver,
and one for the front passenger.

Without navigation system

DRIVER’S SIDE
SYNC BUTTON
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL SWITCH

Features

The temperatures of the driver’s side
and the front passenger’s side are
controlled independently.
PASSENGER’S SIDE
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL SWITCH

With navigation system
SYNC BUTTON

DRIVER’S SIDE
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL SWITCH

PASSENGER’S SIDE
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL SWITCH

CONTINUED

133

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 15:59:45 31TA5630_139

Climate Control System
Synchronized Control

The selected temperatures appear in
the display (in the center display on
models with navigation system).
When the indicator in the SYNC
button is on, you can adjust both
sides to the same temperature by
pushing the driver’s side
temperature control switch up or
down.

DRIVER’S SIDE

When you set the temperature to its
upper or lower limit, it is displayed as
or
.

U.S. model is shown.

134

2011 Accord Sedan

PASSENGER’S SIDE

10/06/18 15:59:53 31TA5630_140

Climate Control System
Rear Ventilation

Sunlight Sensor/Temperature
Sensor

TEMPERATURE SENSOR

REAR VENTS
SUNLIGHT SENSOR
DIAL
Open

Features

TABS

The airflow from the rear vents can
be adjusted when the AUTO mode is
selected or the fan mode is in the
or
position.
You can adjust the direction of the
airflow by moving the tab on each
vent up-and-down and side-to-side.
You can also open or close the vents
with the dial between them.

The climate control system has two
sensors: a sunlight sensor on top of
the dashboard, and a temperature
sensor next to the steering column.
Do not cover the sensors or spill any
liquid on them.

135

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:00:04 31TA5630_141

Audio System
An audio system is standard on all
models. Read the appropriate pages
(as shown below) to use your
vehicle’s audio system.

LX, LX-P and U.S. SE

U.S. EX and EX V6

With navigation system

Without navigation system
U.S. EX-L and EX-L V6
Canadian SE, EX, EX-L, EX V6 and EX-L V6

On LX model (including LX-P) and
U.S. SE model, see pages
137 through 150 .
On EX and EX V6 models, Canadian
SE model, and EX-L and EX-L V6
models without navigation system,
see pages 151 through 193 .
On models with navigation system,
see pages 194 through 244 .

U.S. models are shown.

136

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:00:09 31TA5630_142

Playing the FM/AM Radio (LX, LX-P, and U.S. SE models)

Features

AM BUTTON

TUNE (SOUND) KNOB

PRESET BUTTONS
FM BUTTON

TITLE BUTTON
A.SEL (AUTO SELECT)
BUTTON

SCAN BUTTON

FOLDER BAR

SKIP BUTTONS

POWER/VOLUME KNOB

137

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:00:18 31TA5630_143

Playing the FM/AM Radio (LX, LX-P, and U.S. SE models)
To Play the FM/AM Radio
The ignition switch must be in the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.
Turn the system on by pushing the
power/volume knob or the AM or
FM button. Adjust the volume by
turning the power/volume knob.
The band and frequency that the
radio was last tuned to is displayed.
To change bands, press the AM or
FM button. On the FM band, ST will
be displayed if the station is broadcasting in stereo. Stereo
reproduction on AM is not available.
On the AM band, AM noise
reduction turns on automatically.

To Select a Station
You can use any of five methods to
find radio stations on the selected
band: tune, skip, scan, the preset
buttons, and auto select.
On the FM band, you can also use
the features provided by the radio
data system (RDS). For more
information on the RDS, see
page 140 .
TUNE − Use the TUNE knob to
tune the radio to a desired frequency.
Turn the knob to the right to tune to
a higher frequency, and turn it to the
left to tune to a lower frequency.
SKIP − The skip function searches
up and down from the current
frequency to find a station with a
strong signal. To activate it, press
either of the SKIP buttons (
or
), then release it.

138

2011 Accord Sedan

SCAN − The scan function samples
all stations with strong signals on the
selected band. To activate it, press
the SCAN button, then release it.
You will see SCAN in the display.
When the system finds a strong
signal, it will stop and play that
station for about 10 seconds.
If you do nothing, the system will
then scan for the next strong station
and play it for 10 seconds. When it
plays a station you want to listen to,
press the SCAN button again.

10/06/18 16:00:26 31TA5630_144

Playing the FM/AM Radio (LX, LX-P, and U.S. SE models)
Preset − Each preset button can
store one frequency on AM and two
frequencies on FM.
1. Select the desired band, AM or
FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store
six stations each.

3. Pick a preset button (1−6), and
hold it until you hear a beep.
4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store a
total of six stations on AM and
twelve stations on FM.

Press the A. SEL button. You will see
A. SEL flashing in the display, and
the system goes into scan mode for
several seconds. It stores the
frequencies of six AM, and twelve
FM stations in the preset buttons.

If you do not like the stations auto
select has stored, you can store
other frequencies on the preset
buttons as previously described.
To turn off auto select, press the
A. SEL (auto select) button.
This restores the presets you
originally set.

For information on FM/AM radio
frequencies and reception, see
page 248 .

You will see a ‘‘0’’ displayed after
pressing a preset button if auto
select cannot find a strong station for
every preset button.

139

2011 Accord Sedan

Features

2. Use the tune, skip, scan, or RDS
function to tune the radio to a
desired station.

AUTO SELECT − If you are
traveling and can no longer receive
your preset stations, you can use the
auto select feature to find stations in
the local area.

10/06/18 16:00:32 31TA5630_145

Playing the FM/AM Radio (LX, LX-P, and U.S. SE models)
Radio Data System (RDS)
On the FM band, you can select a
favorite station and display the
program service name provided by
the radio data system (RDS).

If the station you are listening to is
not an RDS station, the display
continues to show the frequency
with the RDS information display
function on.

RDS INFO Display

When you turn off this function by
pressing the TITLE button, the
display shows ‘‘RDS INFO OFF.’’

The RDS information display
function shows the name of the RDS
station you are listening to. With the
audio system on and the FM band
selected, you can turn this function
on or off.

RDS INFO DISPLAY ON

To switch the function between on
and off, press and release the TITLE
button. With the system on, you will
see the ‘‘RDS INFO ON’’ message on
the display. If the station you are
listening to is an RDS station, the
display shows the station name.

140

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:00:46 31TA5630_146

Playing the FM/AM Radio (LX, LX-P, and U.S. SE models)
Radio Data System (RDS) Category

On the FM band selected, you can
select the program category
provided by the RDS. Press either
side of the FOLDER bar (▲ or ▼)
to display and select an RDS
category. The principal RDS
categories are shown as follows;
ALL: All RDS category stations
ROCK: Rock, classic rock and soft
rock music
COUNTRY: Country music

Press either side of the FOLDER bar
to select an RDS category. The
display shows the selected RDS
category name for about 10 seconds.
You can use the search or scan
function to find radio stations on the
selected RDS category. If you do
nothing while the RDS category
name is displayed, the selected
category is canceled.

RDS Program Search

This function searches up and down
a frequency for the strongest signal
from the frequencies that carry the
selected RDS category information.
This can help you to find a station in
your favorite category. To activate it,
press and release either of the SKIP
buttons (
or
). You will see
the selected RDS category name
blinking while searching it. When
the system finds a station, the
selected RDS category name will be
displayed again for about 5 seconds.
If the system does not find a station,
‘‘NOTHING’’ will be blinking for
about 5 seconds, then the system
goes back to the last selected station.

CONTINUED

141

2011 Accord Sedan

Features

RDS CATEGORY

SOFT: Adult hits and soft music
TOP 40: Top 40 hits
OLDIES: Nostalgia music and oldies
R & B: Rhythm and blues, and soft
rhythm and blues
RELIGION: Programs concerned
with religion
CLASSIC: Classical music
JAZZ: Jazz
INFO: News, information, sports,
talk shows, foreign language,
personality, public, college, and
weather
TRAFFIC: Traffic information

10/06/18 16:00:51 31TA5630_147

Playing the FM/AM Radio (LX, LX-P, and U.S. SE models)
RDS Program SCAN

The scan function samples all
stations with strong signals on the
selected RDS category. To activate it,
press and release the SCAN button.
You will see SCAN in the display.
The system will scan for a station
with a strong signal in the selected
RDS category. You will also see the
selected RDS category name
blinking while searching it. When it
finds a strong signal, it will stop and
play that station for about 10 seconds.

You can use the RDS program
search or scan function even if the
RDS information display function is
off.

If you do nothing, the system will
scan for the next strong station and
play it for 10 seconds. When it plays
a station that you want to listen to,
press the SCAN button again.
If the system does not find a station,
‘‘NOTHING’’ will be blinking for
about 5 seconds, then the system
goes back to the last selected station.

142

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:01:01 31TA5630_148

Playing the FM/AM Radio (LX, LX-P, and U.S. SE models)
Adjusting the Sound
Press the SOUND (TUNE) knob
repeatedly to display the BASS,
TREBLE, FADER, BALANCE, and
SVC (speed-sensitive volume
compensation) settings.

SVC − Adjusts the volume level
based on the vehicle speed.
Each mode is shown in the display as
it changes. Turn the TUNE knob to
adjust the setting to your liking.
Except SVC adjustment

TREBLE − Adjusts the treble.

When the level reaches the center,
you will see ‘‘C’’ in the display.

FADER − Adjusts the front-to-back
strength of the sound.
BALANCE − Adjusts the side-toside strength of the sound.

The system will return to the audio
display about 10 seconds after you
stop adjusting a mode.

Audio System Lighting
You can use the instrument panel
brightness control knob to adjust the
illumination of the audio system (see
page 72 ). The audio system
illuminates when the parking lights
are on, even if the radio is turned off.

Speed-sensitive Volume
Compensation (SVC)

143

2011 Accord Sedan

Features

BASS − Adjusts the bass.

adjust the setting to your liking. If
you feel the sound is too loud,
choose low. If you feel the sound is
too quiet, choose high.

10/06/18 16:01:05 31TA5630_149

Playing a Disc (LX, LX-P, and U.S. SE models)

LOAD INDICATOR

CD BUTTON
DISC EJECT BUTTON

TITLE BUTTON
TUNE (SOUND) KNOB
SCAN BUTTON

A.SEL (AUTO SELECT)
BUTTON
RPT/RDM
(REPEAT/RANDOM)
BAR
FOLDER BAR

SKIP BUTTONS

POWER/VOLUME KNOB

144

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:01:14 31TA5630_150

Playing a Disc (LX, LX-P, and U.S. SE models)
To Play a Disc
To load or play a disc, the ignition
switch must be in the ACCESSORY
(I) or ON (II) position.

Do not use discs with adhesive labels.
The label can curl up and cause the
disc to jam in the unit.

Depending on the software the files
were made with, it may not be
possible to play some files, or display
some text data.
NOTE:
If a file on a WMA disc is protected
by digital rights management
(DRM), the audio unit displays
UNSUPPORTED, and then skips to
the next file.

To Load a Disc

Insert a disc about halfway into the
disc slot. The drive will pull the disc
in the rest of the way to play it. You
operate the disc player with the
same controls used for the radio.
The number of the current track is
shown in the display. When playing a
disc in MP3 or WMA, the numbers
of the current folder and file are
shown. The system will continuously
play a disc until you change modes.
You cannot load and play 3-inch
(8-cm) discs in this system.
For information on how to handle
and protect compact discs, see
page 245 .

Video CDs and DVDs do not work in
this unit.
CONTINUED

145

2011 Accord Sedan

Features

You operate the disc player with the
same controls used for the radio. To
select the disc player, press the CD
button. You will see ‘‘CD’’ in the
display.

10/06/18 16:01:23 31TA5630_151

Playing a Disc (LX, LX-P, and U.S. SE models)
Text Data Display Function

Each time you press the TITLE
button, the display shows you the
text, if the disc was recorded with
text data.
You can see the album, artist, and
track name in the display. If a disc is
recorded in MP3 or WMA, you can
see the folder and file name, and the
artist, album, and track tag.
The display shows up to about 14
characters of selected text data (the
folder name, file name, etc.). If the
text data has more than 14
characters, you will see the first 14
characters and the
indicator in
the display. Press and hold the
TITLE button until the next 14
characters are shown.

You will also see some text data
under these conditions:
When a new folder, file, or track is
selected.
When you change the audio mode
to play a disc with text data or in
MP3 or WMA.
When you insert a disc, and the
system begins to play.
When playing a CD-DA with text
data, the album and track name are
shown in the display. With a disc in
MP3 or WMA, the display shows the
folder and file name.

146

2011 Accord Sedan

To Change or Select Tracks/Files

You can use the SKIP buttons while
a disc is playing to select passages
and change tracks (files in MP3/
WMA mode).
SKIP − Each time you press and
release the
SKIP button, the
player skips forward to the
beginning of the next track (file in
MP3 or WMA mode). Press and
release the
to skip backward to
the beginning of the current track.
Press it again to skip to the
beginning of the previous track.
To move rapidly within a track, press
and hold the
or
SKIP
button.

10/06/18 16:01:30 31TA5630_152

Playing a Disc (LX, LX-P, and U.S. SE models)
In MP3 or WMA mode

FOLDER-REPEAT − This feature,
when activated, replays all files on
the selected folder in the order they
are compressed. To activate folder
repeat, press the RPT side of the
RPT/RDM bar twice. You will hear a
beep and see F-RPT in the display.
The system continuously replays the
current folder. Press the RPT side of
the bar again to turn it off. Pressing
the RDM side of the bar, or selecting
a different folder with the FOLDER
bar also turns off the repeat feature.

REPEAT (TRACK/FILE
REPEAT) − To continuously replay
a track (files in MP3 or WMA mode),
press and release the RPT side of
the RPT/RDM bar. You will see RPT
in the display. Press and hold the
RPT side for 2 seconds to turn it off.

RANDOM (Random within a
disc) − This feature plays the
tracks within a disc (the files in MP3
or WMA mode) in random order. To
activate random play, press and
release the RDM side of the RPT/
RDM bar. In MP3 or WMA mode,
press the RDM side of the bar
repeatedly to select RDM (within a
disc random play). You will see RDM
in the display. Press the RDM side of
the bar for 2 seconds to return to
normal play.

Each time you press and release the
RPT side of the bar, the mode
changes from file repeat to folder
repeat, then to normal play.

CONTINUED

147

2011 Accord Sedan

Features

In MP3 or WMA mode

FOLDER SELECTION − To
select a different folder, press either
side of the FOLDER bar. Press the
▲ side of the bar to skip to the next
folder, and the ▼ side of the bar to
move to the beginning of the
previous folder.

10/06/18 16:01:38 31TA5630_153

Playing a Disc (LX, LX-P, and U.S. SE models)
In MP3 or WMA mode

FOLDER-RANDOM − This
feature, when activated, plays all
files in the selected folder in random
order. To activate folder random,
press the RDM side of the RPT/
RDM bar. You will see F-RDM in the
display. The system will then select
and play files randomly. This
continues until you deactivate folder
random by pressing and holding the
RDM side of the bar again, or by
selecting a different folder with the
FOLDER bar.

SCAN (TRACK/FILE SCAN) −
The scan function samples all tracks
(files in MP3 or WMA) on the disc in
the order they are recorded on the
disc. To activate scan, press and
release the SCAN button. You will
see SCAN in the display. You will get
a 10 second sampling of each track/
file on the disc. Press and hold the
SCAN button for about 2 seconds to
get out of scan mode and play the
last track/file sampled.
Pressing either of the SKIP buttons
also turns off the scan feature.

Each time you press and release the
RDM side of the bar, the mode
changes from folder random play to
random play (within a disc random
play), then to normal play.

In MP3 or WMA mode

F-SCAN (FOLDER SCAN) − This
feature, when activated, samples the
first file in each folder on the disc.
To activate folder scan, press the
SCAN button twice. You will see
F-SCAN in the display.
The system plays the first file in the
first folder for about 10 seconds. If
you do nothing, the system will then
play the first files in the next folders
for 10 seconds. After playing the first
file in the last folder, the system
plays normally.
Pressing either of the SKIP buttons,
selecting a different folder with the
FOLDER bar, or pressing the SCAN
button, also turns off the folder scan.
Each time you press and release the
SCAN button, the mode changes
from file scan to folder scan, then to
normal play.

148

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:01:45 31TA5630_154

Playing a Disc (LX, LX-P, and U.S. SE models)
To Stop Playing a Disc
Press the eject button (
) to
remove the disc. If you eject the disc,
but do not remove it from the slot,
the system will automatically reload
the disc after 10 seconds and begin
playing.

If you turn the system off while a
disc is playing, either with the
power/volume knob or by turning
off the ignition switch, the disc will
stay in the drive. When you turn the
system back on, the disc will begin
playing where it left off.

Protecting Discs
For information on how to handle
and protect compact discs, see
page 245 .

Features

You can also eject the disc when the
ignition switch is off.
To play the radio when a disc is
playing, press the AM or FM button.
Press the CD button again to switch
back to the disc player.
You can also press the MODE
button on the steering wheel to
change modes.

149

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:01:52 31TA5630_155

Disc Player Error Messages (LX, LX-P, and U.S. SE models)
The chart on the right explains the
error messages you may see in the
display while playing a disc.
If you see an error message in the
display while playing a disc, press
the eject button. After ejecting the
disc, check it for damage or
deformation. If there is no damage,
insert the disc again.
For additional information on
damaged discs, see page 246 .
The audio system will try to play the
disc. If there is still a problem, the
error message will reappear. Press
the eject button, and pull out the disc.
Insert a different disc. If the new
disc plays, there is a problem with
the first disc. If the error message
cycle repeats and you cannot clear it,
take your vehicle to a dealer.

Error Message

Cause

Solution

UNSUPPORTED

Track/File format not
supported

Current track will be skipped. The next
supported track or file plays automatically.
Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc.
Check the disc for serious damage, signs of
deformation, excessive scratches, and/or dirt
(see page 246). Insert the disc again. If the code
does not disappear, or the disc cannot be
removed, consult your dealer. Do not try to
force the disc out of the player.

BAD DISC
CHECK MANUAL
PUSH EJECT
BAD DISC
CHECK MANUAL

Mechanical Error

Servo Error

The ejected disc will not be reloaded automatically.

150

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:01:59 31TA5630_156

Audio System (EX, EX-L, Canadian SE, and V6 models without navigation system)
The knob turns left and right. Use it
to scroll through lists, or to make
selections or adjustments to a list or
menu item on the display. When you
make a selection, push the center of
the selector (ENTER) to go to that
selection.

Selector Knob

SELECTOR
KNOB

MENU
BUTTON

Most audio system functions can be
controlled by standard buttons, bars,
and knobs. In addition, you can
access some functions by using the
selector knob on the audio system.

Pressing the MENU button again
will also cancel the menu display
mode.

151

2011 Accord Sedan

Features

RETURN
BUTTON

When the audio system is in XM
Radio mode or playing discs, pushing
the selector (ENTER) knob switches
the display between the normal
display and the extended display.
The extended display has three
segments to display the detailed
information.

Menu Display
To select any setting such as the
clock, sound adjusting, or the
compass (if equipped), press the
MENU button. To use any audio
system function, the ignition switch
must be in the ACCESSORY (I) or
ON (II) position. You can select the
item by turning the selector knob.
To go back to the previous display,
press the RETURN button.

10/06/18 16:02:08 31TA5630_157

Playing the FM/AM Radio (EX, EX-L, Canadian SE, and V6 models without navigation system)
Without XM Radio

With XM Radio

POWER/
VOLUME
KNOB

AM
BUTTON
FM
BUTTON

TITLE
AM
BUTTON BUTTON

SCAN
BUTTON

PRESET
BUTTONS
A.SEL
(AUTO SELECT)
BUTTON

FOLDER BAR
RETURN BUTTON

SKIP BAR

TITLE
BUTTON

FM
BUTTON
SCAN
BUTTON

PRESET
BUTTONS

CATEGORY BAR

A.SEL
(AUTO SELECT)
BUTTON

RETURN BUTTON

MENU BUTTON

SKIP BAR
MENU BUTTON

SELECTOR KNOB

U.S. models are shown.

152

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:02:17 31TA5630_158

Playing the FM/AM Radio (EX, EX-L, Canadian SE, and V6 models without navigation system)
To Play the Radio
The ignition switch must be in the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.
Turn the system on by pushing the
power/volume knob or the AM or
FM button. Adjust the volume by
turning the power/volume knob.

On the AM band, AM noise
reduction turns on automatically.

On the FM band, you can also use
the features provided by the radio
data system (RDS). For more
information on the RDS, see page
page 155 .
TUNE − Use the selector knob to
tune the radio to a desired frequency.
Turn the knob right to tune to a
higher frequency, or left to tune to a
lower frequency.

SCAN − The scan function samples
all stations with strong signals on the
selected band. To activate it, press
the SCAN button, then release it.
You will see SCAN in the display.
When the system finds a strong
signal, it will stop and play that
station for about 10 seconds.
If you do nothing, the system will
scan for the next strong station and
play it for 10 seconds. When it plays
a station that you want to listen to,
press the SCAN button again.

SKIP − The skip function searches
up and down from the current
frequency to find a station with a
strong signal. To activate it, press
and hold the
or
side of the
SKIP bar until you hear a beep, then
release it.
CONTINUED

153

2011 Accord Sedan

Features

The band and frequency that the
radio was last tuned to are displayed.
To change bands, press the AM or
FM button. On the FM band, ST will
be displayed if the station is
broadcasting in stereo. Stereo
reproduction in AM is not available.

To Select a Station
You can use any of five methods to
find radio stations on the selected
band: tune, skip, scan, the preset
buttons, and auto select.

10/06/18 16:02:24 31TA5630_159

Playing the FM/AM Radio (EX, EX-L, Canadian SE, and V6 models without navigation system)
Preset − Each preset button can
store one frequency on AM and two
frequencies on FM.
1. Select the desired band, AM or
FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store
six stations each.
2. Use the tune, skip, scan, or RDS
function to tune the radio to a
desired station.
3. Pick a preset button, and hold it
until you hear a beep.
4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store a
total of six stations on AM and
twelve stations on FM.

AUTO SELECT − If you are
traveling and can no longer receive
your preset stations, you can use the
auto select feature to find stations in
the local area.
Press the A. SEL button. ‘‘A-SEL’’
flashes in the display, and the system
goes into scan mode for several
seconds. It stores the frequencies of
six AM and twelve FM stations in
the preset buttons.
You will see a ‘‘0’’ displayed after
pressing a preset button if auto
select cannot find a strong station for
that preset button.
If you do not like the stations auto
select has stored, you can store
other frequencies on the preset
buttons as previously described.

154

2011 Accord Sedan

To turn off auto select, press the
A. SEL (auto select) button.
This restores the presets you
originally set.

For information on FM/AM radio
frequencies and reception, see
page 248 .

10/06/18 16:02:32 31TA5630_160

Playing the FM/AM Radio (EX, EX-L, Canadian SE, and V6 models without navigation system)
If the station you are listening to is
not an RDS station, the display
continues to show the frequency
with the RDS information display
function on.

RDS INFO Display

When you turn off this function by
pressing the TITLE button, the
display shows ‘‘RDS INFO OFF.’’

The RDS information display
function shows the name of the RDS
station you are listening to. With the
audio system on and the FM band
selected, you can turn this function
on or off.

RDS INFO DISPLAY ON

CONTINUED

155

2011 Accord Sedan

Features

Radio Data System (RDS)
On the FM band, you can select a
favorite station and display the
program service name provided by
the radio data system (RDS).

10/06/18 16:02:45 31TA5630_161

Playing the FM/AM Radio (EX, EX-L, Canadian SE, and V6 models without navigation system)
Radio Data System (RDS) Category
RDS CATEGORY

On the FM band selected, you can
select the program category
provided by the RDS. Press either
side (▲ or ▼) of the CATEGORY
bar (FOLDER bar on models without
XM Radio) to display and select an
RDS category. The principal RDS
categories are shown as follows:
ALL: All RDS category stations
ROCK: Rock, classic rock and soft
rock music

COUNTRY: Country music
SOFT: Adult hits and soft music
TOP 40: Top 40 hits
OLDIES: Nostalgia music and oldies
R & B: Rhythm and blues, and soft
rhythm and blues
RELIGION: Programs concerned
with religion
CLASSIC: Classical music
JAZZ: Jazz
INFO: News, information, sports,
talk shows, foreign language,
personality, public, college, and
weather
TRAFFIC: Traffic information
Press either side of the CATEGORY
bar (FOLDER bar on models without
XM Radio) to select a RDS category.
The display shows the selected RDS
category name for about 10 seconds.
You can use the search or scan
function to find radio stations in the

156

2011 Accord Sedan

selected RDS category. If you do
nothing while the RDS category
name is displayed, the selected
category is canceled.
RDS Program Search

This function searches up and down
a frequency for the strongest signal
from the frequencies that carry the
selected RDS category information.
This can help you to find a station in
your favorite category. To activate it,
press and release either side
(
or
) of the SKIP bar. You
will see the selected RDS category
name blinking while searching it.
When the system finds a station, the
selected RDS category name will be
displayed again for about 5 seconds.
If the system does not find a station,
‘‘NOTHING’’ will be blinking for
about 5 seconds, then the system
goes back to the last selected station.

10/06/18 16:02:54 31TA5630_162

Playing the FM/AM Radio (EX, EX-L, Canadian SE, and V6 models without navigation system)
RDS Program SCAN

You can use the RDS program
search or scan function even if the
RDS information display function is
off.

Adjusting the Sound
Selector knob adjustable
direction is shown.

Features

FADER is selectable.

If you do nothing, the system will
scan for the next strong station and
play it for 10 seconds. When it plays
a station that you want to listen to,
press the SCAN button again.

Press the MENU button to display
the sound settings. Turn the selector
knob to select an appropriate setting:
bass, treble, fader, balance, SUBW＊
(subwoofer) and SVC (speedsensitive volume compensation).
Press the selector knob (ENTER) to
enter the setting, then turn the
selector knob to adjust the setting.

If the system does not find a station,
‘‘NOTHING’’ will be blinking for
about 5 seconds, then the system
goes back to the last selected station.

＊: If equipped
CONTINUED

157

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:03:06 31TA5630_163

Playing the FM/AM Radio (EX, EX-L, Canadian SE, and V6 models without navigation system)
If equipped

SUBW − Adjusts the strength of
sound from the subwoofer speaker.
If the fader adjustment is set to F9
(maximum front level), the
subwoofer is turned off.
SUBWOOFER is selectable.

BASS − Adjusts the bass.
TREBLE − Adjusts the treble.
FADER − Adjusts the front-to-back
strength of the sound.
BALANCE − Adjusts the side-toside strength of the sound.

SVC − Adjusts the volume level
based on the vehicle speed.
Each mode is shown in the display as
it changes. Turn the selector knob to
adjust the setting to your liking.
Except SVC adjustment

When the level reaches the center,
you will see ‘‘C’’ in the display.
To return to the normal play, push
the RETURN or MENU button after
you stop adjusting a mode.

158

2011 Accord Sedan

Speed-sensitive Volume
Compensation (SVC)

The SVC mode controls the volume
based on vehicle speed. The faster
you go, the louder the audio volume
becomes. As you slow down, the
audio volume decreases.
The SVC has four modes: SVC OFF,
SVC LOW, SVC MID, and SVC
HIGH. Turn the selector knob to
adjust the setting to your liking. If
you feel the sound is too loud,
choose low. If you feel the sound is
too quiet, choose high.
Audio System Lighting
You can use the instrument panel
brightness control knob to adjust the
illumination of the audio system (see
page 72 ). The audio system
illuminates when the parking lights
are on, even if the radio is turned off.

10/06/18 16:03:12 31TA5630_164

Playing the XM Radio (Models with premium audio system)
U.S. EX-L and EX-L V6 models
Canadian SE, EX, EX-L and V6 models

Features

XM RADIO BUTTON

TITLE BUTTON
POWER/VOLUME
KNOB

SCAN BUTTON

CATEGORY BAR

SKIP BAR
RETURN BUTTON

U.S. model is shown.

MENU BUTTON

SELECTOR KNOB

CONTINUED

159

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:03:20 31TA5630_165

Playing the XM Radio (Models with premium audio system)
Your vehicle is capable of receiving
XM Radio anywhere in the United
States and Canada, except Hawaii,
Alaska, and Puerto Rico. XM is a
registered trademark of Sirius XM
Radio , Inc. and XM CANADA is a
registered business name of
Canadian Satellite Radio Inc.

Operating the XM Radio
To listen to XM Radio, turn the
ignition switch to the ACCESSORY
(I) or ON (II) position, and press the
button. The last channel you
listened to will show in the display.
Adjust the volume by turning the
power/volume knob.

XM Radio receives signals from two
satellites to produce clear, highquality digital reception. It offers
many channels in several categories.
Along with a large selection of
different types of music, XM Radio
allows you to view channel and
category selections in the display.

MODE − To switch between
channel mode and category mode,
press and hold the TITLE button
until the mode changes.
In the channel mode, you can select
all of the available channels. In the
category mode, such as Jazz, Rock,
Classical, etc., you can select all of
the channels within that category.

160

2011 Accord Sedan

Each time you press and release the
TITLE button, the display changes in
the following sequence: name, title,
and category.
You can also change the mode from
the menu items. Press the MENU
button to display the menu items,
then turn the selector knob to select
MODE/CATEGORY and press the
selector knob (ENTER). Each time
you press and release the selector
knob (ENTER), the display changes
between CHANNEL and
CATEGORY. To enter the setting,
press the TITLE button.
You may experience periods when
XM Radio does not transmit the
artist’s name and song title
information. If this happens, there is
nothing wrong with your system.

10/06/18 16:03:26 31TA5630_166

Playing the XM Radio (Models with premium audio system)
CATEGORY (▼ or ▲) − Press
either side of the CATEGORY bar to
select another category.

TUNE − Turn the selector knob to
change channel selections. Turn the
knob right for higher numbered
channels and left for lower
numbered channels. In the category
mode, you can only select channels
within that category.

You can also select a channel or
category from the list by using the
selector knob. Push the selector
knob (ENTER) to switch the display
to the list displayed with three
segments, then turn the knob to
select a channel or category. Press
the selector knob (ENTER) to set
your selection.

CONTINUED

161

2011 Accord Sedan

Features

Channel list is shown.

SCAN − The SCAN function gives
you a sampling of all channels while
in the channel mode. In the category
mode, only the stations within that
category are scanned. To activate
scan, press the SCAN button. The
system plays each channel in
numerical order for a few seconds,
then selects the next channel. When
you hear a channel you want to
continue listening to, press the
button again.

10/06/18 16:03:39 31TA5630_167

Playing the XM Radio (Models with premium audio system)
Preset − You can store up to 12
preset channels using the six preset
buttons. Each button stores one
channel from the XM1 band and one
channel from the XM2 band.

4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to store the
first six channels.

To store a channel:

5. Press the XM button again. The
other XM band will show. Store
the next six channels using steps 2
and 3.

button. Either
1. Press the
XM1 or XM2 will show in the
display.

Once a channel is stored, simply
press and release the proper preset
button to tune to it.

2. Use the selector knob, or the
CATEGORY bar or SCAN button
to tune to a desired channel.

XM Radio Display Messages

In category mode, only channels
within that category can be selected.
In channel mode, all channels can be
selected.

‘‘LOADING’’ − XM is loading the
audio or program information.
‘‘OFF AIR’’ − The channel
currently selected is no longer
broadcasting.

3. Pick the preset button you want
for that channel. Press and hold
the button until you hear a beep.

‘‘UPDATING’’ − The encryption
code is being updated. Wait until the
encryption code is fully updated.
Channels 0 and 1 should still work
normally.
‘‘NO SIGNAL’’ − The signal is
currently too weak. Move the vehicle
to an area away from tall buildings,
and with an unobstructed view of the
southern horizon.
‘‘ - - - - ’’ − The selected channel
number does not exist, or is not part
of your subscription, or this channel
has no artist or title information at
this time.
‘‘NO INFO’’ − The selected
channel has no artist or title
information at this time.
‘‘ANTENNA’’ − There is a problem
with the XM antenna. Please consult
your dealer.

162

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:03:48 31TA5630_168

Playing the XM Radio (Models with premium audio system)
The XM satellites are in orbit over
the equator; therefore, objects south
of the vehicle may cause satellite
reception interruptions. To help
compensate for this, ground-based
repeaters are placed in major
metropolitan areas.

Signal weaker in
these areas.

Features

Satellite signals are more likely to be
blocked by tall buildings and
mountains the farther north you
travel from the equator. Carrying
large items on a roof rack can also
block the signal.

Signal may be blocked by
mountains or large obstacles to
the south.

SATELLITE

Depending on where you drive, you
may experience reception problems.
Interference can be caused by any of
these conditions:

GROUND REPEATER

Driving on the north side of an
east/west mountain road.

Driving on a road beside a vertical
wall, steep cliff, or hill to the south
of you.

Driving on a single lane road
alongside dense trees taller than
50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you.

Driving on the north side of a
large commercial truck on an
east/west road.

Driving on the lower level of a
multi-tiered road.

Large items carried on a roof rack.
CONTINUED

Driving in tunnels.

163

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:03:54 31TA5630_169

Playing the XM Radio (Models with premium audio system)
There may be other geographic
situations that could affect XM Radio
reception.
As required by the FCC:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.

Receiving XM Radio Service
If your XM Radio service has expired
or you purchased your vehicle from
a previous owner, you can listen to a
sampling of the broadcasts available
on XM Radio. With the ignition
switch in the ACCESSORY (I) or the
ON (II) position, press the
button. A variety of music
types and styles will play.
If you decide to purchase XM radio
service, contact XM Radio at
www.xmradio.com, or at
1-800-852-9696. In Canada, contact
XM CANADA at www.xmradio.ca, or
at 1-877-209-0079. You will need to
give them your radio I.D. number
and your credit card number. To get
your radio I.D. number, press the
button, then turn the
selector knob until ‘‘CH 000’’ appears
in the display. Your I.D. will appear
in the display.

164

2011 Accord Sedan

After you’ve registered with XM
Radio, keep your audio system in the
XM Radio mode while you wait for
activation. This should take about 30
minutes.
While waiting for activation, make
sure your vehicle remains in an open
area with good reception. Once your
audio system is activated,
‘‘CATEGORY’’ or ‘‘CHANNEL’’ will
appear in the display, and you’ll be
able to listen to XM Radio broadcasts.
XM Radio will continue to send an
activation signal to your vehicle for
at least 12 hours from the activation
request. If the service has not been
activated after 36 hours, contact
XM Radio. In Canada, contact XM
CANADA .

10/06/18 16:04:03 31TA5630_170

Playing Discs (EX, EX-L, Canadian SE, and V6 models without navigation system)
Without XM Radio

With XM Radio

MP3/WMA INDICATOR
DISC LOAD
BUTTON

CD BUTTON
DISC SLOT

MP3/WMA INDICATOR

POWER/VOLUME KNOB

DISC LOAD
BUTTON

TITLE BUTTON

POWER/VOLUME KNOB
DISC SLOT

CD/AUX BUTTON

PRESET
BUTTONS

SCAN
BUTTON

SCAN
BUTTON
DISC EJECT
BUTTON
FOLDER BAR
RETURN BUTTON

SKIP BAR

DISC EJECT
BUTTON
CATEGORY BAR

MENU BUTTON

SKIP BAR

RETURN BUTTON

SELECTOR KNOB
U.S. models are shown.

MENU BUTTON

SELECTOR KNOB

165

2011 Accord Sedan

Features

TITLE BUTTON

10/06/18 16:04:12 31TA5630_171

Playing Discs (EX, EX-L, Canadian SE, and V6 models without navigation system)
To Play a Disc
To load or play discs, the ignition
switch must be in the ACCESSORY
(I) or ON (II) position.
You operate the disc changer with
the same controls used for the radio.
To select the disc changer, press the
CD/AUX or CD button. You will see
‘‘CD’’ in the display. The disc and
track numbers, and the elapsed time
are shown in the display. You can
also select the displayed information
with the TITLE button (see page
167 ). The system will continuously
play a disc until you change modes.

Do not use discs with adhesive labels.
The label can curl up and cause the
disc to jam in the unit.

This audio system can also play
CD-Rs and CD-RWs compressed in
MP3 or WMA formats. When
playing a disc in MP3, you will see
‘‘MP3’’ in the display. In WMA
format, ‘‘WMA’’ will appear in the
display. You can select up to 99
folders, or up to 255 tracks/files.
Depending on the software the files
were made with, it may not be
possible to play some files, or display
some text data.
Video CDs and DVDs do not work in
this unit.
NOTE:
If a file on a WMA disc is protected
by digital rights management
(DRM), the audio unit displays
UNSUPPORTED, and then skips to
the next file.

166

2011 Accord Sedan

Loading Discs

Your vehicle’s in-dash disc changer
holds up to six discs.
1. Press the LOAD button until you
hear a beep and see ‘‘LOAD’’ in
the display. To load only one disc,
press and release the LOAD
button.
2. The disc number for an empty
position begins blinking.
3. Insert the disc into the disc slot
when the green disc load indicator
comes on. Insert it only about
halfway; the drive will pull it in the
rest of the way. You will see
‘‘BUSY’’ in the display while the
disc load indicator turns red and
blinks as the disc is loaded.

10/06/18 16:04:22 31TA5630_172

Playing Discs (EX, EX-L, Canadian SE, and V6 models without navigation system)
You cannot load and play 3-inch
(8-cm) discs in this unit.

5. Repeat this until all six positions
are loaded. If you are not loading
all six positions, the system begins
playing the last disc loaded.
You can also load a disc into an
empty position while a disc is playing
by pressing the appropriate preset
button. The system stops playing the
current disc and starts the loading
sequence. It then plays the disc just
loaded.

You can see the album, artist, and
track name in the display. If a disc is
recorded in MP3 or WMA, you can
see the folder and file name, and the
artist, album, and track tag.
With the folder name, you will see
the FOLDER indicator in the display.
The TRACK indicator is shown with
the file or track name.

If the text data has more than 16
characters, you will see the first 16
characters and the
indicator in
the display. Press and hold the
TITLE button until the next 16
characters are shown. You can see
up to 32 characters of the text data.
If you press and hold the TITLE
button again, the display shows the
first 16 characters again.
If any letter is not available, it is
replaced with ‘‘ . ’’ (dot) in the display.
When the disc has no text data, you
will see ‘‘NO INFO’’ on the display.

When you press and release the
TITLE button while a disc without
text data is playing, you will see ‘‘NO
INFO’’ on the display.
The display shows up to 16
characters of selected text data (the
folder name, file name, etc.).
CONTINUED

167

2011 Accord Sedan

Features

4. When the disc load indicator turns
green and ‘‘LOAD’’ appears in the
display again, insert the next disc
in the slot. Do not try to insert a
disc until ‘‘LOAD’’ appears. You
could damage the audio unit.

Text Data Display Function

Each time you press the TITLE
button, the display shows you the
text, if the disc was recorded with
text data.

10/06/18 16:04:32 31TA5630_173

Playing Discs (EX, EX-L, Canadian SE, and V6 models without navigation system)
You will also see some text data
under these conditions:
When a new folder, file, or track is
selected.
When you change the audio mode
to play a disc with text data or in
MP3 or WMA.

To Change or Select Tracks/Files

Use the SKIP bar while a disc is
playing to select passages and
change tracks (files in MP3 or WMA
mode).

When you insert a disc, and the
system begins to play.

In MP3 or WMA mode, use the
FOLDER bar (CATEGORY bar on
models with XM Radio) to select
folders in the disc and use either
side of the skip bar to change files.

When playing a CD-DA with text
data, the album and track name are
shown in the display. With a disc in
MP3 or WMA, the display shows the
folder and file name.

To select a different disc, use the
appropriate preset buttons (1
through 6). If you select an empty
position, the system will go into the
loading sequence (see page 166 ).

When you turn on the audio system
next time, the system keeps your
selection with the TITLE button.

168

2011 Accord Sedan

Folder Selection

Track Selection

Press ENTER

In MP3 or WMA mode, you can also
select a folder or track/file from the
list by using the selector knob. Push
the selector knob (ENTER) to
switch the display to the list
displayed with three segments, then
turn the knob to select a folder.
Press the selector knob (ENTER) to
change the display to the track/file
list, then turn the same knob to
select a track/file. Press the selector
knob (ENTER) to set your selection.

10/06/18 16:04:39 31TA5630_174

Playing Discs (EX, EX-L, Canadian SE, and V6 models without navigation system)
In MP3 or WMA mode

FOLDER SELECTION − To
select a different folder, press either
side (▲ or ▼) of the FOLDER bar
(CATEGORY bar on models with
XM Radio) to move to the beginning
of the next folder. Press the ▲ side
to skip to the next folder, and press
the ▼ side to skip to the beginning
of the previous folder.

To Select Repeat, Random or Scan
Mode:
MENU ITEMS

Features

SKIP − Each time you press and
release the
side of the SKIP bar,
the player skips forward to the
beginning of the next track (file in
MP3 or WMA mode). Press and
release the
side of the bar to
skip backward to the beginning of
the current track. Press it again to
skip to the beginning of the previous
track.
To move rapidly within a track or file,
press and hold either side (
or
) of the SKIP bar.

You can select any type of repeat,
random and scan modes by using the
MENU button and the selector knob.
Push the MENU button to display
the menu items, then turn the
selector knob to select ‘‘PLAY
MODE.’’ Press the selector knob
(ENTER) to set the selection.
CONTINUED

169

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:04:45 31TA5630_175

Playing Discs (EX, EX-L, Canadian SE, and V6 models without navigation system)
To cancel the selected repeat,
random, or scan mode, press the
MENU button to show ‘‘PLAY
MODE,’’ then press the selector
knob (ENTER). When you see
‘‘NORMAL PLAY,’’ press ENTER
again.

PLAY MODE ITEMS

Turn the selector knob to select an
appropriate repeat, random or scan
mode, then press the selector knob
(ENTER) to set your selection.

170

2011 Accord Sedan

REPEAT ONE TRK − To
continuously replay a track (file in
MP3 or WMA mode), select
REPEAT ONE TRK from the menu
items. You will see REPEAT in the
display. Select normal play to turn it
off.
Pressing either side of the SKIP bar
also turns off the repeat feature.

10/06/18 16:04:50 31TA5630_176

Playing Discs (EX, EX-L, Canadian SE, and V6 models without navigation system)
In MP3 or WMA mode

REPEAT DISC − This feature
continuously replays the current disc.
To activate disc repeat, select
REPEAT DISC from the menu items.
You will see D-REPEAT in the
display. Select normal play to turn it
off.

RANDOM IN DISC − This feature
plays the tracks within a disc (the
files in MP3 or WMA mode) in
random order. To activate random
play, select RANDOM IN DISC from
the menu items. You will see
RANDOM in the display. Select
normal play to return to normal play.

In MP3 or WMA mode

RANDOM IN FLD − This feature,
when activated, plays the files within
the current folder in random order,
rather than in the order they are
compressed in MP3 or WMA. To
activate folder random play, select
RANDOM IN FLD from the menu
items. You will see F-RANDOM in
the display. The system will then
select and play files randomly. This
continues until you deactivate folder
random play by selecting normal play,
or you select a different folder with
the FOLDER bar (CATEGORY bar
on models with XM Radio).
CONTINUED

171

2011 Accord Sedan

Features

REPEAT ONE FLD − This feature,
when activated, replays all the files
on the selected folder in the order
they are compressed in MP3 or
WMA. To activate folder repeat
mode, select REPEAT ONE FLD
from the menu items. You will see
F-REPEAT in the display. The
system continuously replays the
current folder. Select normal play to
turn it off. Selecting a different
folder with the FOLDER bar
(CATEGORY bar on models with
XM Radio) also turns off the repeat
feature.

10/06/18 16:04:56 31TA5630_177

Playing Discs (EX, EX-L, Canadian SE, and V6 models without navigation system)
SCAN TRK − The SCAN function
samples all the tracks on the disc in
the order they are recorded on the
disc (all files in the selected folder in
MP3 or WMA mode). To activate the
scan feature, press and release the
SCAN button. You will see SCAN in
the display. You will get a 10 second
sampling of each track/file in the
disc/folder. Press and hold the
SCAN button to get out of scan
mode and play the last track sampled.

SCAN FLD − This function
samples the first file in each folder in
the order they are stored. To
activate the folder scan feature,
press and release the SCAN button
repeatedly. You will see F-SCAN in
the display. You will get a 10 second
sampling of the first file in each
folder. Press and hold the SCAN
button to get out of the folder scan
mode and play the last file sampled.

You can also select the scan feature
from the menu items with the
selector knob (see page 169 ).

You can also select the folder scan
feature from the menu items with
the selector knob (see page 169 ).

In MP3 or WMA mode

172

2011 Accord Sedan

Pressing either side of the skip bar,
or selecting a different disc (using
the preset buttons) or folder (using
the FOLDER or CATEGORY bar)
turns off the SCAN or F-SCAN
feature.

10/06/18 16:05:04 31TA5630_178

Playing Discs (EX, EX-L, Canadian SE, and V6 models without navigation system)
When the first track on the last disc,
or the first file in the last main folder
in the last disc begins to play, the
disc scan mode will be canceled.
Pressing either side of the skip bar
or selecting a different folder with
the FOLDER or CATEGORY bar
also turns off the scan feature.
Each time you press and release the
SCAN button, the mode changes
from scan, disc scan, then to normal
play.
In MP3 or WMA mode

Each time you press and release the
SCAN button, the mode changes
from file scan, folder scan, disc scan,
then to normal play.
You can also select the disc scan
feature from the menu items with
the selector knob (see page 169 ).

To Stop Playing a Disc
Press the eject button (
) to
remove the disc. If you eject the disc,
but do not remove it from the slot,
the system will automatically reload
the disc after 10 seconds and begin
playing.
You can also eject the disc when the
ignition switch is off.
To play the radio when a disc is
playing, press the AM, FM or XM (if
equipped) button. Press the CD
(CD/AUX on models with XM
Radio) button again to switch back to
the disc changer.
You can also press the MODE
button on the steering wheel to
change modes.

CONTINUED

173

2011 Accord Sedan

Features

SCAN DISC − This feature, when
activated, samples the first track on
each disc in order (the first file in
the main folder on each disc in MP3
or WMA mode). To activate the disc
scan feature, press and release the
SCAN button repeatedly until
D-SCAN shows in the display. The
system will then play the first track/
file in the first main folder on the
first disc for about 10 seconds. If you
do nothing, the system will then play
the following first track/file for 10
seconds each. When it plays a track/
file that you want to continue
listening to, press and hold the
SCAN button again.

10/06/18 16:05:10 31TA5630_179

Playing Discs (EX, EX-L, Canadian SE, and V6 models without navigation system)
If you turn the system off while a
disc is playing, either with the
power/volume knob or by turning
off the ignition switch, the disc will
stay in the drive. When you turn the
system back on, the disc will begin
playing where it left off.

Removing Discs from the In-dash
Disc Changer

To remove the disc currently in play,
press the eject button. When a disc is
removed from a slot, the system
automatically begins the load
sequence so you can load another
disc in that position. If you do not
remove the disc from the changer
within 10 seconds, the disc will
reload into the slot. Then the system
returns to the previous mode (AM,
FM, or XM Radio).
To remove a different disc from the
changer, first select it with the
appropriate preset button. When that
disc begins playing, press the eject
button. Continue pressing the eject
button to remove all the discs from
the changer.
You can also eject discs when the
ignition switch is off. The disc that
was last selected is ejected first.

174

2011 Accord Sedan

Protecting Discs
For information on how to handle
and protect compact discs, see
page 245 .

10/06/18 16:05:16 31TA5630_180

Disc Changer Error Messages (EX, EX-L, Canadian SE, and V6 models without navigation system)
The chart on the right explains the
error messages you may see in the
display while playing a disc.

Error Message
HEAT ERROR

The audio system will try to play the
disc. If there is still a problem, the
error message will reappear. Press
the eject button, and pull out the disc.
Insert a different disc. If the new
disc plays, there is a problem with
the first disc. If the error message
cycle repeats and you cannot clear it,
take your vehicle to a dealer.

UNSUPPORTED
BAD DISC
PLEASE CHECK
OWNERS
MANUAL PUSH
EJECT
MECH ERROR
CHANGER ERROR
CHECK DISC LOAD
BAD DISC
PLEASE CHECK
OWNERS
MANUAL

High Temperature
Track/File format not
supported

Mechanical Error

Solution
Will disappear when the temperature returns to
normal.
Current track will be skipped. The next
supported track or file plays automatically.
Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc(s).
Check the disc for serious damage, signs of
deformation, excessive scratches, and/or dirt
(see page 246). Insert the disc again. If the code
does not disappear, or the disc(s) cannot be
removed, consult your dealer. Do not try to
force the disc out of the player.

Servo Error

175

2011 Accord Sedan

Features

If you see an error message in the
display while playing a disc, press
the eject button. After ejecting the
disc, check it for damage or
deformation. If there is no damage,
insert the disc again.
For additional information on
damaged discs, see page 246 .

Cause

10/06/18 16:05:23 31TA5630_181

Playing an iPod (EX, EX-L and V6 models without navigation system)
Without XM Radio

With XM Radio

POWER/VOLUME KNOB
iPod INDICATOR

AUX BUTTON

CD/AUX BUTTON
TITLE BUTTON

TITLE BUTTON
PRESET
BUTTONS

SKIP BAR
RETURN BUTTON

MENU BUTTON

SKIP BAR
RETURN BUTTON

SELECTOR KNOB

MENU BUTTON

SELECTOR KNOB

U.S. models are shown.

176

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:05:30 31TA5630_182

Playing an iPod (EX, EX-L and V6 models without navigation system)

The audio system reads and plays
playable sound files on the iPod. The
system cannot operate an iPod as a
mass storage device. The system will
only play songs stored on the iPod
with iTunes.
iPod and iTunes are registered
trademarks owned by Apple Inc.

iPods compatible with your audio
system using the USB adapter cable
are:
Model
iPod classic
(80/160 G)
iPod classic
(120 G)
iPod with video
(iPod 5th
generation)
iPod nano
iPod nano
2nd generation
iPod nano
3rd generation
iPod nano
4th generation
iPod nano
5th generation
iPod touch
iPod touch
2nd generation

Use only compatible iPods with the
latest software. iPods that are not
compatible will not work in this audio
unit.

Software
Ver. 1.1.2 or more
Ver. 2.0.1 or more

Features

To Play an iPod
This audio system can select and
play the audio files on the iPod with
the same controls used for the disc
player. To play an iPod, connect it to
the USB adapter cable in the console
compartment by using your dock
connector, then press the CD/AUX
button (AUX button on models
without XM Radio). The ignition
switch must be in the ACCESSORY
(I) or ON (II) position. The iPod will
also be recharged with the ignition
switch in these positions.

Ver. 1.3.0 or more
Ver. 1.3.1 or more
Ver. 1.1.3 or more
Ver. 1.1.3 or more
Ver. 1.0.3 or more
Ver. 1.0.1 or more
Ver. 1.1.5 or more
Ver. 2.2.1 or more

CONTINUED

177

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:05:39 31TA5630_183

Playing an iPod (EX, EX-L and V6 models without navigation system)
NOTE:
Do not connect your iPod using a
hub.

Connecting an iPod

DOCK CONNECTOR

USB CONNECTOR

Do not keep the iPod in the
vehicle. Direct sunlight and high
heat will damage it.
Do not use an extension cable
between the USB adapter cable
equipped with your vehicle and
your dock connector.
We recommend backing up your
data before playing it.
Some devices cannot be powered
or charged via the USB adapter. If
this is the case, use the accessory
adapter to supply power to your
device.

USB CONNECTOR
USB ADAPTER CABLE

1. Pull out the USB connector from
the holder.

178

2011 Accord Sedan

2. Connect your dock connector to
the iPod correctly and securely.
3. Install the dock connector to the
USB adapter cable securely.

10/06/18 16:05:47 31TA5630_184

Playing an iPod (EX, EX-L and V6 models without navigation system)
If the iPod indicator does not appear
in the audio display, check the
connections, and try to reconnect the
iPod a few times.

www.apple.com/itunes/

To Change or Select Files

Use the SKIP bar while an iPod is
playing to select passages and
change files.

SKIP − Each time you press and
release the
side of the SKIP bar,
the system skips forward to the
beginning of the next file. Press and
release the
side of the bar to
skip backward to the beginning of
the current file. Press it again to skip
to the beginning of the previous file.
To move rapidly within a file, press
and hold either side (
or
)
of the SKIP bar.
Turning the selector knob to the
right or the left also changes the file.

CONTINUED

179

2011 Accord Sedan

Features

If the audio system still does not
recognize the iPod, the iPod may
need to be reset. Follow the
instructions that came with your
iPod, or you can find reset
instructions online at:

Text Data Display Function

Each time you press the TITLE
button the display mode switches
between the album name, the song
name, the artist name, or name off
(which turns off the text display).

10/06/18 16:05:54 31TA5630_185

Playing an iPod (EX, EX-L and V6 models without navigation system)
Pressing the RETURN button goes
back to the previous display and
pressing the MENU button cancels
this setting mode.

To Select a File from iPod Menu

Push ENTER.

You can also select a file from any
list on the iPod menu: playlists,
artists, albums and songs, by using
the selector knob. Push the selector
knob (ENTER) to switch the display
to an iPod menu, then turn the
selector knob to select a desired list.
Press ENTER to set your selection.

The display shows items on the
selected list. Turn the selector knob
to select an item, then press ENTER
to set your selection.
If you select ‘‘ALL,’’ all available files
on the selected list are played.

180

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:06:02 31TA5630_186

Playing an iPod (EX, EX-L and V6 models without navigation system)
To Select Repeat or Shuffle Mode:

PLAY MODE ITEMS

MENU ITEMS

To cancel the selected mode, press
the MENU button and turn the
selector knob to show ‘‘PLAY
MODE,’’ then press ENTER. When
you see ‘‘NORMAL PLAY,’’ press
ENTER again.
Features

You can select any type of repeat and
shuffle mode by using the MENU
button and the selector knob. Press
the MENU button to display the
menu items, then turn the selector
knob to select ‘‘PLAY MODE.’’ Press
ENTER to set the selection.

Turn the selector knob to select a
play mode: normal play, shuffle off,
shuffle all, shuffle album, repeat off,
or repeat one track, then press
ENTER to set your selection.

CONTINUED

181

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:06:10 31TA5630_187

Playing an iPod (EX, EX-L and V6 models without navigation system)
SHUFFLE ALL − This feature
plays all available files in a selected
list (playlists, artists, albums or
songs) in random order.
You will see SHUFFLE in the display.
Select the normal play mode or
SHUFFLE OFF to turn off this
feature.

SHUFFLE OFF − This feature
turns off either of the shuffle modes
(SHUFFLE ALL and SHUFFLE
ALBUM).

SHUFFLE ALBUM − This feature
plays all available albums in a
selected list (playlists, artists, albums
or songs) in random order. The files
in each album are played in the
recorded order. You will see ALB
SHUF in the display.
Select the normal play mode or
SHUFFLE OFF to turn off this
feature.

182

2011 Accord Sedan

REPEAT OFF − This feature turns
off the repeat mode.
REPEAT ONE TRK − This
feature continuously plays a file. You
will see REPEAT in the display.
Select normal play or REPEAT OFF
to turn it off.
Pressing either side of the SKIP bar
or turning the selector knob changes
the file while keeping the repeat
feature.
Pressing either side of the SKIP bar
or turning the selector knob changes
a file while keeping the shuffle
function.
NOTE:
Available operating functions vary on
models or versions. Some functions
may not be available on the vehicle’s
audio system.

10/06/18 16:06:17 31TA5630_188

Playing an iPod (EX, EX-L and V6 models without navigation system)

You can also press the MODE
button on the steering wheel to
change modes.

Disconnecting an iPod

You can disconnect the iPod at any
time when you see the ‘‘OK to
disconnect’’ message＊ in the iPod
display. Always make sure you see
the ‘‘OK to disconnect’’ message in
the iPod display before you
disconnect it. Make sure to follow
the iPod’s instructions on how to
disconnect the dock connector from
the USB adapter cable.

iPod Error Messages
If you see an error message in the
display, see page 184 .

Features

To Stop Playing Your iPod
To play the radio, press the AM, FM,
or
button. Press the CD/
AUX button to switch between disc
mode (if a disc is loaded) and the
iPod and AUX. On models without
XM Radio, press the CD button to
switch to the disc mode. Pressing
the AUX button switches the audio
mode between the iPod and AUX.

＊ : The displayed message may
vary on models or versions.
On some models, there is no
message to disconnect.
If you reconnect the same iPod, the
system may begin playing where it
left off, depending on what mode the
iPod is in when it is reconnected.

183

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:06:21 31TA5630_189

iPod Error Messages (EX, EX-L and V6 models without navigation system)
If you see an error message on the
audio display while playing an iPod,
find the solution in the chart to the
right. If you cannot clear the error
message, take your vehicle to your
dealer.

Error Message

Cause

USB ERROR
BAD USB
DEVICE
PLEASE CHECK
OWNERS
MANUAL
iPod NO SONG

USB ROM Error

UNSUPPORTED
VER.

Use of unsupported
iPod

CONNECT RETRY

Appears when an
incompatible device is
connected.
No files in iPod

Recognition failure of
iPod

184

2011 Accord Sedan

Solution
There is a problem with the USB adapter unit.
Disconnect the device. Then, turn the audio
system off, and turn it on again. Do not
reconnect the device that caused the error.

Appears when the iPod is empty. Store some
files in the iPod.
Appears when an unsupported iPod is
connected. See page 177 for the specification
information for iPods. If it appears when a
supported iPod is connected, update the iPod
software to the newer version.
Appears when the system does not
acknowledge the iPod. Reconnect the iPod.

10/06/18 16:06:29 31TA5630_190

Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (EX, EX-L and V6 models without navigation system)
Without XM Radio

With XM Radio
POWER/VOLUME KNOB

POWER/VOLUME KNOB
FILE TYPE INDICATOR

AUX BUTTON

FILE TYPE INDICATOR

CD/AUX BUTTON
TITLE BUTTON

TITLE BUTTON
USB INDICATOR

USB INDICATOR

Features

SCAN
BUTTON

SKIP BAR

FOLDER BAR
RETURN BUTTON

MENU BUTTON

SKIP BAR

CATEGORY BAR
RETURN BUTTON

SELECTOR KNOB

MENU BUTTON

SELECTOR KNOB

U.S. models are shown.

185

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:06:37 31TA5630_191

Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (EX, EX-L and V6 models without navigation system)
To Play a USB Flash Memory
Device
This audio system can select and
play the audio files on a USB flash
memory device with the same
controls used for the disc player. To
play a USB flash memory device,
connect it to the USB adapter cable
in the console compartment, then
press the CD/AUX button (AUX
button on models without XM Radio).
The ignition switch must be in the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.

＊ : Only AAC format files recorded
with iTunes are playable on this
audio unit.
The recommended USB flash
memory devices are 256 MB or
higher, and formatted with the FAT
file system. Some digital audio
players may be compatible as well.
Some USB flash memory devices
(such as devices with security lockout features, etc.) will not work in
this audio unit.

The audio system reads and plays
the audio files on the USB flash
memory device in MP3, WMA or
AAC＊ formats. Depending on the
format, the display shows MP3,
WMA or AAC when a USB flash
memory device is playing. The USB
flash memory device limit is up to
700 folders or up to 65535 files.

NOTE:
Do not use a device such as a card
reader or hard drive as the device
or your files may be damaged.
Do not connect your USB flash
memory device using a hub.
Do not use an extension cable to
the USB adapter cable equipped
with your vehicle.
Do not keep a USB flash memory
device in the vehicle. Direct
sunlight and high heat will damage
it.
We recommend backing up your
data before playing a USB flash
memory device.

186

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:06:43 31TA5630_192

Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (EX, EX-L and V6 models without navigation system)
Some devices cannot be powered
or charged via the USB adapter. If
this is the case, use the accessory
adapter to supply power to your
device.

Depending on the software the
files were made with, it may not be
possible to play some files, or
display some text data.

Combining a low sampling f requency
with a low bitrate may result in
extremely degraded sound quality.

Some versions of MP3, WMA, or
AAC format may not be supported. If
an unsupported file is found, the
audio unit displays UNSUPPORTED,
then skips to the next file.

Features

Depending on the type and
number of files, it may take some
time before they begin to play.

The order of files in USB playback
may be different from the order of
files displayed in PC or other
devices etc. Files are played in the
order stored in USB flash memory
device.

Depending on the type of
encoding and writing software
used, there may be cases where
character information does not
display properly.

CONTINUED

187

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:06:51 31TA5630_193

Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (EX, EX-L and V6 models without navigation system)
Connecting a USB Flash Memory
Device

Text Data Display Function

Each time you press the TITLE
button, the display mode shows you
in sequence, the folder name, the file
name, the artist name, the album
name, the song name, or name off
(which turns off the text display).

USB CONNECTOR

USB ADAPTER CABLE

1. Pull out the USB connector from
the holder.

2. Connect the USB flash memory
device to the USB adapter cable
correctly and securely.
When the USB flash memory device
is connected, the USB indicator is
shown in the display.

188

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:07:00 31TA5630_194

Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (EX, EX-L and V6 models without navigation system)
To Change or Select Files

Use the SKIP bar while a USB flash
memory device is playing to select
passages and change files.

To Select a File from Folder and File
Lists
Folder Selection

Features

Folder Selection − To select a
different folder, press and release
either side of the CATEGORY bar
(FOLDER bar on models without
XM Radio). Press the ▲ side to skip
to the next folder, and press the ▼
side to skip to the beginning of the
previous folder.

Press ENTER.
Track Selection

To move rapidly within a file, press
and hold either side (
or
)
of the SKIP bar.

You can also select a folder or file
from the list by using the selector
knob. Push the selector knob
(ENTER) to switch the display to the
folder list, then turn the selector
knob to select a folder. Press
ENTER to change the display to the
file list, then turn the same knob to
select a file. Press ENTER to set
your selection.

Turning the selector knob to the
right or the left also changes the file.

CONTINUED

189

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:07:07 31TA5630_195

Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (EX, EX-L and V6 models without navigation system)
Pressing the RETURN button goes
back to the previous display and
pressing the MENU button cancels
this setting mode.

To Select Repeat, Random or Scan
Mode:
MENU ITEMS

190

2011 Accord Sedan

Turn the selector knob to select an
appropriate repeat, random or scan
mode, then press the selector knob
(ENTER) to set your selection.

To cancel the selected mode, press
the MENU button and turn the
selector knob to show ‘‘PLAY
MODE,’’ then press ENTER. When
you see ‘‘NORMAL PLAY,’’ press
ENTER again.

10/06/18 16:07:15 31TA5630_196

Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (EX, EX-L and V6 models without navigation system)

PLAY MODE ITEMS

RANDOM IN FLD − This feature
plays the files in the selected folder
in random order. You will see
F-RANDOM in the display. Select
normal play to turn it off.

SCAN TRK − This function
samples all files in the selected
folder in the order they are stored.
To activate the scan feature, press
and release the SCAN button. You
will see SCAN in the display. You will
get a 10 second sampling of each file
in the folder. Press and hold the
SCAN button to get out of the scan
mode and play the last file sampled.
You can also select the scan feature
from the menu items with the
selector knob (see page 190 ).

RANDOM ALL − This feature
plays all the files in random order.
You will see RANDOM in the display.
Select normal play to turn it off.

CONTINUED

191

2011 Accord Sedan

Features

REPEAT ONE TRK − This
feature continuously plays a file.
Select normal play to turn it off.
Pressing either side of the SKIP bar
also turns off this feature.

REPEAT ONE FLD − This feature
replays all the files on the selected
folder in the order they are stored.
Select normal play to turn it off.
Pressing either side of the
CATEGORY bar (FOLDER bar on
models without XM Radio) also turns
off this feature.

10/06/18 16:07:23 31TA5630_197

Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (EX, EX-L and V6 models without navigation system)
SCAN FLD − This function
samples the first file in each folder in
the order they are stored. To
activate the folder scan feature,
press and release the SCAN button
repeatedly. You will see F-SCAN in
the display. You will get a 10 second
sampling of the first file in each
folder. Press and hold the SCAN
button to get out of the folder scan
mode and play the last file sampled.

To Stop Playing a USB Flash
Memory Device
To play the radio, press the FM, AM,
or
button. Press the CD/
AUX button to switch between disc
mode (if a disc is loaded) and the
USB and AUX. On models without
XM Radio, press the CD button to
switch to the disc mode. Pressing
the AUX button switches the audio
mode between the USB and AUX.

You can also select the folder scan
feature from the menu items with
the selector knob (see page 190 ).

You can also press the MODE
button on the steering wheel to
change modes.

Select normal play to turn either
scan feature off. Pressing either side
of the CATEGORY (FOLDER) or
SKIP bar also turns off the feature.

If you reconnect the same USB flash
memory device, the system will
begin playing where it left off.

192

2011 Accord Sedan

Disconnecting a USB Flash Memory
Device

You can disconnect the USB flash
memory device at any time even if
the USB mode is selected on the
audio system. Make sure to follow
the USB flash memory device’s
instructions when you remove it.
USB Flash Memory Device Error
Messages
If you see an error message in the
display, see page 193 .

10/06/18 16:07:27 31TA5630_198

USB Flash Memory Device Error Messages (EX, EX-L and V6 models without navigation system)
If you see an error message on the
audio display while playing a USB
flash memory device, find the
solution in the chart to the right. If
you cannot clear the error message,
take your vehicle to your dealer.

Error Message

USB ROM Error
Appears when an
incompatible device is
connected.

UNPLAYABLE
FILE

Use of unsupported
files

USB NO SONG

No files in USB flash
memory device

UNSUPPORTED

Use of unsupported
USB flash memory
device

Solution
There is a problem with the USB adapter unit.
Disconnect the device. Then, turn the audio
system off, and turn it on again. Do not
reconnect the device that caused the error.

Appears when the files in the USB flash
memory device are DRM or an unsupported
format. This error message appears for about 3
seconds, then plays the next song.
Appears when the USB flash memory device is
empty or there are no MP3, WMA, or AAC files
in the USB flash memory device. Save some
MP3, WMA, or AAC files in the USB flash
memory device.
Appears when an unsupported device is
connected. See page 186 for the specification
information for the USB flash memory device.
If it appears when a supported device is
connected, reconnect the device.

193

2011 Accord Sedan

Features

USB ERROR
BAD USB
DEVICE
PLEASE CHECK
OWNERS
MANUAL

Cause

10/06/18 16:07:33 31TA5630_199

Audio System (Models with navigation system)
Interface Dial
Most audio system functions can still
be controlled by standard buttons,
dials, and knobs, but some functions
can only be accessed using the
interface dial. The interface dial has
two parts, a knob and a selector.

ENTER

KNOB

SELECTOR

The knob turns left and right. Use it
to make selections or adjustments to
a list or menu on the screen.
The selector can be pushed left,
right, up, down, and in. Use the
selector to scroll through lists, to
select menus, and to highlight menu
items. When you make a selection,
push the center of the selector
(ENTER) to go to that selection.

194

2011 Accord Sedan

Voice Control System
The audio system can also be
operated by voice control. See the
navigation system manual for
complete details.

10/06/18 16:07:37 31TA5630_200

Playing the FM/AM Radio (Models with navigation system)

NAVIGATION SCREEN

Features

POWER/VOLUME KNOB
CENTER DISPLAY
FM/AM BUTTON
SOUND BUTTON
SKIP BAR

CATEGORY BAR
TUNE BAR

SCAN/A.SEL
(SCAN/AUTO SELECT) BAR

AUDIO BUTTON

INTERFACE DIAL
U.S. model is shown.

195

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:07:46 31TA5630_201

Playing the FM/AM Radio (Models with navigation system)
To Play the FM/AM Radio
STEREO INDICATOR

BAND

the FM/AM button. You can also
change bands by pushing the
interface selector up. Each time you
push it up, the band will change to
FM1, FM2, or AM. On the FM bands,
STEREO will be shown on the
navigation screen and ST on the
center display, if the station is
broadcasting in stereo. Stereo
reproduction on AM is not available.
On the AM band, AM noise
reduction turns on automatically.

The ignition switch must be in the
ACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II)
position. Press the AUDIO button to
view the audio control display. Turn
the system on by pressing the
power/volume knob or the FM/AM
button. Adjust the volume by turning
the power/volume knob.
The band and frequency that the
radio was last tuned to are shown on
the display. To change bands, press

To Select a Station
You can use any of five methods to
find radio stations on the selected
band: tune, skip (seek), scan, the
preset buttons, and auto select.
On the FM band, you can also use
the features provided by the radio
data system (RDS). For more
information on the RDS, see
page 199.

196

2011 Accord Sedan

TUNE ICON

TUNE − Use the TUNE bar to tune
the radio to a desired frequency.
Press the right side of the bar to
tune to a higher frequency, or the
left side to tune to a lower frequency.
To tune with the interface dial, push
the selector down, and turn the knob
to TUNE icon. Then press ENTER
on the selector, and turn the knob to
the desired frequency. To exit the
TUNE mode, press ENTER on the
selector, then push the selector up.

10/06/18 16:07:53 31TA5630_202

Playing the FM/AM Radio (Models with navigation system)

SCAN INDICATOR

SCAN − The SCAN function
samples all stations with strong
signals on the selected band. To
activate it, press the SCAN side of
the SCAN/A.SEL bar, then release it.
To scan with the interface dial, push
the selector down, and then push it
to the right. You will see SCAN
flashing on the screen.

When the system finds a strong
signal, it will stop and play that
station for about 10 seconds. If you
do nothing, the system will then scan
for the next strong station and play it
for 10 seconds. When it plays a
station that you want to listen to,
press the scan side of the bar again,
or push the interface selector to the
right again.
Preset − Each preset button or
preset icon can store one frequency
on AM and two frequencies on FM.
To store a preset memory location:

1. Select the desired band, AM or
FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store
two sets of FM frequencies with
the preset buttons (on-screen
icons).

CONTINUED

197

2011 Accord Sedan

Features

SKIP (SEEK) − The skip (seek)
function searches up and down from
the current frequency to find a
station with a strong signal. To
activate it, press either side (
or
) of the SKIP bar, then release
it. You can also activate the skip
function (SEEK is displayed on the
screen) by pushing the interface
selector to the right or left.

10/06/18 16:08:02 31TA5630_203

Playing the FM/AM Radio (Models with navigation system)
2. Use the tune, skip (seek), scan, or
RDS function to tune the radio to a
desired station.
3. Press the preset button, and hold
it until you hear a beep. You can
also store frequencies with the
interface dial. Select the preset
icon you want to store the
frequency on, then press ENTER
on the interface selector, and hold
it for more than 2 seconds.
4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store a
total of six stations on AM and
twelve stations on FM.

A.SEL INDICATOR

PRESET ICON
A.SEL ICON

AUTO SELECT − If you are
traveling and can no longer receive
your preset stations, you can use the
auto select feature to find stations in
the local area.
Push the interface selector down to
scroll down the screen, highlight
A.SEL, then press ENTER on the
interface selector. You will see
A.SEL on the screen, and the system
goes into scan mode for several
seconds.

198

2011 Accord Sedan

To turn off auto select, press ENTER
on the interface selector.

You can also press the A.SEL side of
the SCAN/A.SEL bar. You will see
A.SEL on the screen, and the system
goes into scan mode for several
seconds. The system stores the
frequencies of six AM and twelve
FM stations in the preset buttons.
You will see ‘‘0’’ displayed if auto
select cannot find a strong station for
every preset button.
If you do not like the stations auto
select has stored, you can store
other frequencies on the preset
buttons (icons) as previously
described.

10/06/18 16:08:10 31TA5630_204

Playing the FM/AM Radio (Models with navigation system)
To turn off auto select, press the
A. SEL side of the bar. This restores
the presets you originally set.

For information on FM/AM radio
frequencies and reception, see
page 248 .

Radio Data System (RDS)
On the FM band, you can select a
favorite station and display the
program service name provided by
the radio data system (RDS).
RDS INFO Display
Features

The RDS INFO display function
shows the name of the station you
are listening to. With the audio
system on and the FM band selected,
you can turn this function on or off.

RDS INFO DISPLAY ON

CONTINUED

199

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:08:21 31TA5630_205

Playing the FM/AM Radio (Models with navigation system)
If the station you are listening to is
not an RDS station, the audio screen
and the center display continue to
show the frequency.

Radio Data System (RDS) Category

ALL: All RDS category stations
ROCK: Rock, classic rock and soft
rock music
COUNTRY: Country music

When you turn off this function by
pressing the TITLE button, the
center display shows ‘‘RDS INFO
OFF.’’

SOFT: Adult hits and soft music
TOP 40: Top 40 hits
OLDIES: Nostalgia music and oldies
R & B: Rhythm and blues, and soft
rhythm and blues
RDS SEARCH ICON

With the FM band selected, you can
select the program type provided by
the RDS. Press the AUDIO button to
display the radio information on the
screen. Push down the selector on
the interface dial, then turn the knob
to select RDS SEARCH icon. Press
ENTER to set your selection. The
principal RDS categories are shown
as follows:

200

2011 Accord Sedan

RELIGION: Programs concerned
with religion
CLASSIC: Classical music
JAZZ: Jazz
INFO: News, information, sports,
talk shows, foreign language,
personality, public, college, and
weather
TRAFFIC: Traffic information

10/06/18 16:08:29 31TA5630_206

Playing the FM/AM Radio (Models with navigation system)
RDS Program Search

Turn the selector to select an RDS
category. You can use the search or
scan function to find radio stations
on the selected RDS category by
pressing the selector to the right
repeatedly. Press ENTER to set your
selection. If you do nothing while the
RDS category is selected, the
selected category is canceled.

U.S. model is shown.

You can also select an RDS category
with the CATEGORY bar. Press
either side (▲ or ▼) of the
CATEGORY bar to display an RDS
category in the center display. Select
a category by pressing either side of
the bar.

If the system does not find a station,
‘‘NOTHING’’ will be blinking for
about 5 seconds, then the system
goes back to the last selected station.

CONTINUED

201

2011 Accord Sedan

Features

RDS CATEGORY
RDS CATEGORY

This function searches up and down
a frequency for the strongest signal
from the frequencies that carry the
selected RDS category information.
This can help you to find a station in
your favorite category. To activate it,
press and release either side
(
or
) of the SKIP bar. You
will also see the selected RDS
category name blinking in the center
display while searching it. When the
system finds a station, the selected
RDS category name will be displayed
again for about 5 seconds in the
center display.

10/06/18 16:08:35 31TA5630_207

Playing the FM/AM Radio (Models with navigation system)
SEEK/SCAN ICON

Turn the knob to the desired RDS
category.
While the RDS category is selected,
move the selector knob to the right
to select SEEK in the upper right
corner of the screen. Then press
ENTER to activate the seek function.

RDS CATEGORY LIST
SEEK is selected.

To activate RDS program search
with the interface dial, push the
AUDIO button to display the FM
radio information on the screen.
Push the selector down, and turn the
knob to select the RDS SEARCH
icon. Press ENTER on the selector.
The screen shows you the RDS
program category list.

202

2011 Accord Sedan

RDS Program SCAN

The scan function samples all
stations with strong signals on the
selected RDS category. To activate it,
press and release the SCAN side of
the SCAN/A.SEL bar. You will see
SCAN in the center display. The
system will scan for a station with a
strong signal in the selected RDS
category. You will also see the
selected RDS category name
blinking in the center display while
searching it. When the system finds
one, it will stop and play that station
for about 10 seconds.

10/06/18 16:08:42 31TA5630_208

Playing the FM/AM Radio (Models with navigation system)
If you do nothing, the system will
scan for the next strong station and
play it for 10 seconds. When it plays
a station that you want to listen to,
press the SCAN side of the SCAN/
A.SEL bar again.

Turn the knob to the desired RDS
category.
While the RDS category is selected,
move the selector knob to the right
to select SCAN in the upper right
corner of the screen. Then press
ENTER to activate the scan function.

RDS CATEGORY LIST
SCAN is selected.

To activate RDS program scan with
the interface dial, push the AUDIO
button to display the FM radio
information on the screen. Push the
selector down, and turn the knob to
select the RDS SEARCH icon. Press
ENTER on the selector. The screen
shows you the RDS category list.

You can use the RDS program
search or scan function even if the
RDS information display function is
off. In this case, the display shows a
frequency in place of a RDS station
name.

CONTINUED

203

2011 Accord Sedan

Features

If the system does not find a station,
‘‘NOTHING’’ will be blinking for
about 5 seconds, then the system
goes back to the last selected station.

SEEK/SCAN ICON

10/06/18 16:08:48 31TA5630_209

Playing the FM/AM Radio (Models with navigation system)
Radio Text Display

TEXT INDICATOR

This function displays the radio text
information of the selected RDS
station.
If the selected RDS station has the
radio text information, you will see
the text indicator on the screen.

The text is displayed
according to the
information from RDS.

RADIO TEXT ICON

To activate radio text display, use
the interface dial. Push the selector
down, and turn the knob to select
RADIO TEXT icon. Press ENTER on
the selector to enter the setting.

204

2011 Accord Sedan

The display shows up to 64
characters on the selected RDS
station.

10/06/18 16:08:56 31TA5630_210

Playing the FM/AM Radio (Models with navigation system)

These adjustments can be made by
the SOUND button or the interface
dial.

Features

Adjusting the Sound
BASS, TREBLE, FADER, and
BALANCE are each adjustable. You
can also adjust the strength of the
sound coming from the subwoofer
speaker. In addition, you can set the
speed-sensitive volume
compensation (SVC).

SOUND ICON

To adjust them, press the AUDIO
button, push the interface selector
down, and turn the interface knob to
SOUND. Then press ENTER on the
selector.
Select the mode you want to adjust
by turning the interface dial.

You can also adjust the sound by
pushing the SOUND button
repeatedly. Each mode is shown in
the center display as it changes.
Turn the power/volume knob to
adjust the setting to your liking.
When the level reaches the center,
you will see ‘‘C’’ in the display.
The system will return to the audio
playing mode in the center display
about 10 seconds after you stop
adjusting a mode.
CONTINUED

205

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:09:02 31TA5630_211

Playing the FM/AM Radio (Models with navigation system)
BASS/TREBLE − To adjust bass
and treble, select BASS or TREBLE,
and press ENTER on the interface
selector. The current setting is
shown on the display. Turn the
interface knob to the desired level,
and enter your selection by pressing
ENTER on the interface selector.

SUBWOOFER − To adjust the
strength of the sound from the
subwoofer speaker, select it and
press ENTER on the interface
selector. Turn the interface knob to
the desired level, and enter your
selection by pressing ENTER on the
interface selector.

FADER/BALANCE − These
modes adjust the strength of the
sound coming from each speaker.
Fader adjusts the front-to-back
strength, while balance adjusts the
side-to-side strength. To adjust fader
and balance, select FADER or
BALANCE, then press ENTER on
the interface selector. The current
setting is shown on the screen. Turn
the interface knob to the desired
level, and enter your selection by
pressing ENTER on the interface
selector. To equalize the fader or
balance, turn the interface knob until
the marks on the sound grid come to
the center of the adjustment bar.

If the fader adjustment is set to F9
(maximum front level), the
subwoofer is turned off.

206

2011 Accord Sedan

Speed-sensitive Volume
Compensation (SVC)

The SVC mode controls the volume
based on vehicle speed. The faster
you go, the louder the audio volume
becomes. As you slow down, the
audio volume decreases.
The SVC has four modes: SVC OFF,
SVC LOW, SVC MID, and SVC
HIGH. The default setting is MID.
To change the SVC mode, select
SVC, then press ENTER on the
interface selector. The current
setting is shown on the screen. Turn
the interface knob to the desired
level, and enter your selection by
pressing ENTER on the interface
selector. If you feel the sound is too
loud, choose low. If you feel the
sound is too quiet, choose high.

10/06/18 16:09:08 31TA5630_212

Playing the XM Radio (Models with navigation system)

Features

XM RADIO BUTTON
TITLE BUTTON

POWER/VOLUME KNOB

PRESET BUTTONS
CATEGORY BAR
TUNE BAR

SKIP BAR
SCAN/A.SEL
(SCAN/AUTO SELECT) BAR

AUDIO BUTTON

INTERFACE DIAL

U.S. model is shown.

CONTINUED

207

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:09:14 31TA5630_213

Playing the XM Radio (Models with navigation system)
Your vehicle is capable of receiving
XM Radio anywhere in the United
States and Canada, except Hawaii,
Alaska, and Puerto Rico. XM is a
registered trademark of Sirius XM
Radio , Inc. and XM CANADA is a
registered business name of
Canadian Satellite Radio Inc.
XM Radio receives signals from two
satellites to produce clear, highquality digital reception. It offers
many channels in several categories.
Along with a large selection of
different types of music, XM Radio
also allows you to view channel and
category selections in the audio
display.

Operating the XM Radio

To listen to XM Radio, turn the
ignition switch to the ACCESSORY
(I) or ON (II) position, and press the
button. The last channel you
listened to will show in the audio
screen and the center display. Adjust
the volume by turning the power/
volume knob.

208

2011 Accord Sedan

Push the AUDIO button to display
XM information on the screen. You
can operate the XM Radio system
with the interface dial.

10/06/18 16:09:20 31TA5630_214

Playing the XM Radio (Models with navigation system)

In the category mode, such as Jazz,
Rock, Classical, etc., you can
navigate through all of the channels
within that category. In the channel
mode, you can select all of the
available channels.
Each time you press and release the
TITLE button, the center display
changes in the following sequence:
NAME (artist name), TITLE (music
title), and CHANNEL NAME
(channel name).

On the screen, you will see the
selected CHANNEL (number),
CATEGORY, NAME (artist name),
and TITLE (music title).
TUNE − Press either side of the
TUNE bar to change channel
selections. Press the
side of the
bar for higher numbered channels
and the
side for lower
numbered channels. You can also
change channels with the interface
selector, push down the interface
selector to select AUDIO MENU,
then turn the interface knob to
choose TUNE and press ENTER on
the selector. Turn the interface knob
to the appropriate direction. In the
category mode, you can only select
channels within that category.

CHANNEL LIST − Push down the
interface selector to select AUDIO
MENU, then turn the interface knob
to select CHANNEL LIST and press
ENTER on the selector. Turn the
interface knob to select a channel,
then press ENTER to set your
selection.

CONTINUED

209

2011 Accord Sedan

Features

MODE − To switch between the
category mode and channel mode,
press and hold the TITLE button
until the mode changes. The
CATEGORY or CHANNEL mode is
displayed on the screen. To switch
the mode with the interface dial,
push down the interface selector to
select AUDIO MENU, then turn the
knob to select MODE, and press
ENTER on the selector repeatedly.

10/06/18 16:09:30 31TA5630_215

Playing the XM Radio (Models with navigation system)
CATEGORY (▼ or ▲) − Press
either side of the bar to select
another category. You can also
change a category by pushing the
interface selector left or right.
SCAN − The scan function gives
you a sampling of all channels while
in the channel mode. In the category
mode, only the channels within that
category are scanned. To activate
SCAN, press the SCAN side of the
SCAN/A.SEL bar. To scan with the
interface dial, scroll down, and push
the interface selector to the right.
You will see SCAN on the screen and
center display.
The system plays each channel in
numerical order for a few seconds,
then selects the next channel. When
you hear a channel you want to
continue listening to, push the
interface selector to the right again
or press the SCAN side of the bar to
cancel.

XM BAND

2. Use the tune, skip (seek), or scan
function to tune to a desired
channel.
In category mode, only channels
within that category can be
selected. In channel mode, all
channels can be selected.

Preset − You can store up to 12
preset channels using the six preset
buttons. Each button stores one
channel from the XM1 band and one
channel from the XM2 band.
To store a channel:
button or scroll
1. Press the
up by pushing the interface
selector up. Either XM1 or XM2
will be shown on the display.

210

2011 Accord Sedan

3. Pick the preset button you want
for that channel. Press and hold
the preset button until you hear a
beep. You can also pick the
number with the interface dial.
Select your desired number and
press and hold ENTER on the
interface selector.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to store the
first six channels.

10/06/18 16:09:39 31TA5630_216

Playing the XM Radio (Models with navigation system)
XM Radio Display Messages

Once a channel is stored, press
and release the proper preset
button to tune to it.

‘‘OFF AIR’’ − The channel
currently selected is no longer
broadcasting.

‘‘LOADING’’ − XM is loading the
audio or program information.

‘‘UPDATING’’ − The encryption
code is being updated. Wait until the
encryption code is fully updated.
Channels 0 and 1 should still work
normally.

‘‘ - - - - ’’ − The selected channel
number does not exist, or is not part
of your subscription, or this channel
has no artist or title information at
this time.
‘‘NO INFO’’ − The selected
channel has no artist or title
information at this time.
‘‘ANTENNA’’ − There is a problem
with the XM antenna. Please consult
your dealer.

‘‘NO SIGNAL’’ − The signal is
currently too weak. Move the vehicle
to an area away from tall buildings,
and with an unobstructed view of the
southern horizon.

CONTINUED

211

2011 Accord Sedan

Features

button or scroll
5. Press the
up again. The other XM band will
be shown. Store the next six
channels using steps 2 and 3.

10/06/18 16:09:45 31TA5630_217

Playing the XM Radio (Models with navigation system)

Signal may be blocked by
mountains or large obstacles to
the south.

Signal weaker in
these areas.

The XM satellites are in orbit over
the equator; therefore, objects south
of the vehicle may cause satellite
reception interruptions. To help
compensate for this, ground-based
repeaters are placed in major
metropolitan areas.
Satellite signals are more likely to be
blocked by tall buildings and
mountains the farther north you
travel from the equator.
Depending on where you drive, you
may experience reception problems.
Interference can be caused by any of
these conditions:

SATELLITE

Driving on the north side of an
east/west mountain road.
Driving on the north side of a
large commercial truck on an
east/west road.
GROUND REPEATER

212

2011 Accord Sedan

Driving in tunnels.

10/06/18 16:09:53 31TA5630_218

Playing the XM Radio (Models with navigation system)
Driving on a road beside a vertical
wall, steep cliff, or hill to the south
of you.
Driving on the lower level of a
multi-tiered road.

There may be other geographic
situations that could affect XM Radio
reception.
As required by the FCC:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.

If you decide to purchase XM radio
service, contact XM Radio at
www.xmradio.com, or at
1-800-852-9696. In Canada, contact
XM CANADA at www.xmradio.ca, or
at 1-877-209-0079. You will need to
give them your radio I.D. number
and your credit card number. To get
your radio I.D. number, press the
side of the TUNE bar until ‘‘0’’
appears in the display. Your I.D. will
appear in the display.

After you’ve registered with XM
Radio, keep your audio system in the
XM Radio mode while you wait for
activation. This should take about 30
minutes.
While waiting for activation, make
sure your vehicle remains in an open
area with good reception. Once your
audio system is activated, CAT
(category) or CH (channel) will
appear in the center display, and
you’ll be able to listen to XM Radio
broadcasts. XM Radio will continue
to send an activation signal to your
vehicle for at least 12 hours from the
activation request. If the service has
not been activated after 36 hours,
contact XM Radio. In Canada,
contact XM CANADA .

213

2011 Accord Sedan

Features

Driving on a single lane road
alongside dense trees taller than
50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you.

10/06/18 16:09:58 31TA5630_219

Playing Discs (Models with navigation system)

NAVIGATION SCREEN

CENTER DISPLAY

POWER/VOLUME KNOB

TITLE BUTTON

CD BUTTON

PRESET BUTTONS

SKIP BAR
SCAN/A.SEL
(SCAN/AUTO SELECT) BAR

AUDIO BUTTON
DISC EJECT BUTTON

DISC LOAD BUTTON

DISC SLOT
U.S. model is shown.

INTERFACE DIAL

214

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:10:09 31TA5630_220

Playing Discs (Models with navigation system)
Your vehicle’s audio system has an
in-dash disc changer with the same
controls used for the radio. To
operate the disc changer, the ignition
switch must be in the ACCESSORY
(I) or the ON (II) position.

The disc packages or jackets should
have one of these marks.

Video CDs and DVDs do not work in
this unit.

CD (CD-DA)

Some CD-DA and CD-ROM mixed
discs are not playable.

MP3/WMA

You cannot load and play 3-inch
(8-cm) discs in this system.

The changer can also play MP3 or
WMA format (see page 221 ).

Do not use discs with adhesive labels.
The label can curl up and cause the
disc to jam in the unit.

When playing a disc in MP3, you will
see ‘‘MP3’’ in the display. In WMA
format, ‘‘WMA’’ will appear in the
display.

215

2011 Accord Sedan

Features

The disc changer can play these disc
formats:

NOTE:
If a file on a WMA disc is protected
by digital rights management
(DRM), the audio unit displays
UNSUPPORTED, and then skips to
the next file.

10/06/18 16:10:19 31TA5630_221

Playing Discs (Models with navigation system)
Loading Discs in the Changer
To load multiple discs in one
operation:
1. With the ignition in the
ACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II)
position, press and hold the LOAD
button until you hear a beep and
see ‘‘LOAD’’ in the center display,
then release the button.
2. Insert a disc into the slot. Insert it
only about halfway; the drive will
pull it in the rest of the way. You
will see ‘‘BUSY’’ in the center
display. When you insert the first
disc, the changer will start to play
the disc.
3. When ‘‘LOAD’’ appears in the
center display again, insert the
next disc into the slot.
Do not try to insert a disc until
‘‘LOAD’’ appears. You could
damage the audio unit.

4. Repeat this until all six positions
are loaded. If you are not loading
all six positions, the system will
then begin playing the last disc
loaded.
If you stop loading discs before all
six positions are filled, the system
will wait for 10 seconds, stop the load
operation, and begin playing the last
disc loaded.
To load a single disc:
1. Press and release the LOAD
button.
2. ‘‘NO DISC’’ is shown on the screen
for an empty position in the
changer. When the green load
indicator comes on and you see
‘‘LOAD’’ in the center display,
insert the disc into the slot. Insert
it only about halfway; the drive will
pull it in the rest of the way.

216

2011 Accord Sedan

Do not try to insert a disc until
‘‘LOAD’’ appears. You could damage
the audio unit.
You can select the position to load a
disc. Turn the interface knob or
press a preset button to select the
position, then press ENTER on the
selector. This starts the loading
sequence. If you do not select the
position, the system loads the disc to
the first empty position in numerical
order.
If you press the LOAD button while
a disc is playing, the system will stop
playing that disc and start the
loading sequence. It will then play
the disc just loaded.

10/06/18 16:10:25 31TA5630_222

Playing Discs (Models with navigation system)
To Play a Disc

The player can play CD-TEXT, MP3,
and WMA formats.

CURRENT DISC

Select the changer by pressing the
CD button. The system will begin
playing the last selected disc in the
disc changer. You will see the
current disc position highlighted.
To select a different disc, press the
corresponding number on the preset
buttons, or turn the interface knob to
highlight the desired disc number,
then press ENTER on the interface
selector.

217

2011 Accord Sedan

Features

When you play CD-TEXT, you will
see the track name, artist name, and
album name on the screen. When
you play MP3/WMA discs, you will
see the track name and folder name
on the screen. If the disc was not
recorded with this information, it will
not be displayed.

To Change Tracks
Each time you press and release the
side of the skip bar or push the
interface selector to the right, the
player skips forward to the
beginning of the next track. Press
and release the
side of the skip
bar or push the interface selector to
the left to skip backward to the
beginning of the current track. Press
the
side or push the interface
selector to the left again to skip to
the previous track. To move rapidly
within a track, press and hold either
side of the skip bar.

10/06/18 16:10:33 31TA5630_223

Playing Discs (Models with navigation system)
To Choose a Track

You can also choose a track directly
from a track list. Press ENTER on
the interface selector, and the track
list screen will be shown. If there are
no track names, track numbers are
displayed. You will see the current
track is highlighted. Turn the
interface knob to select the desired
track, then press ENTER on the
interface selector.

To exit the track list display, press
the AUDIO button, or push the
interface selector to the left.
Track Scan
When you press the SCAN side of
the SCAN/A. SEL bar or scroll down
and push the interface selector to
the left, the next track of the current
track plays for about 10 seconds.
You will see SCAN next to TRACK
on the screen and center display. To
listen to the rest of the track, press
and hold the SCAN side of the bar
until you hear a beep or push the
interface selector to the left again
within 10 seconds.
If you don’t, the system advances to
the next track, plays about 10
seconds of it, and continues through
the rest of the tracks the same way.

218

2011 Accord Sedan

Disc Scan
When you press the SCAN side of
the SCAN/A. SEL bar repeatedly
until you see D-SCAN in the center
display, or push the interface
selector to the right, the first track of
the current disc plays for about 10
seconds. You will see SCAN next to
DISC on the screen. The disc
number is blinking and SCAN is also
shown in the center display. To listen
to the rest of the disc, press and hold
the SCAN side of the bar until you
hear a beep, or push the interface
selector to the right again within 10
seconds.
If you don’t, the system advances to
the next disc, plays about 10 seconds
of its first track, and continues
through the rest of the discs the
same way. When the system reaches
the last disc, DISC SCAN is canceled,
and that disc continues to play.

10/06/18 16:10:41 31TA5630_224

Playing Discs (Models with navigation system)
To Select Repeat or Random
Mode:

Push down the selector.

You can select any type of repeat and
random modes by using the
interface dial.
Push the AUDIO button to display
the audio information on the screen,
then scroll down by pushing down
the selector to select the audio menu.

Turn the interface knob to select a
desired repeat or random mode, then
press ENTER to set your selection.
To cancel the selected repeat or
random mode, have the selected
mode highlighted, then press
ENTER on the interface selector.

219

2011 Accord Sedan

Features

AUDIO MENU SCREEN

Track Repeat
To replay the current track
continuously, select TRACK
REPEAT, and press ENTER on the
interface selector. As a reminder,
you will see REPEAT next to
TRACK on the screen. To turn this
feature off, highlight TRACK
REPEAT (if not already highlighted),
and press ENTER on the interface
selector again.

10/06/18 16:10:47 31TA5630_225

Playing Discs (Models with navigation system)
Disc Repeat
To replay the current disc
continuously, select DISC REPEAT,
and press ENTER on the interface
selector. As a reminder, you will see
REPEAT next to DISC on the screen.
To turn this feature off, highlight
DISC REPEAT (if not already
highlighted), and press ENTER on
the interface selector again.

Random Play
To play the tracks on the current
disc in random order, select TRACK
RANDOM, and press ENTER on the
interface selector. As a reminder,
you will see RANDOM next to
TRACK on the screen. To turn this
feature off, highlight TRACK
RANDOM (if not already
highlighted), and press ENTER on
the interface selector again.

To Stop Playing a Disc
To take the system out of disc mode,
press the FM/AM button, the
button, or the AUX button (if
an appropriate unit is connected). To
return to disc mode, press the CD
button.
You can also press the MODE
button on the steering wheel to
change modes.
If you turn the system off while a
disc is playing, either with the
power/volume knob or the ignition
switch, play will continue at the same
point when you turn it back on.

220

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:10:56 31TA5630_226

Playing Discs (Models with navigation system)
Changing the Folders
While playing an MP3/WMA disc,
you can select a folder within the
disc by pressing either side of the
category bar. Each time you press
either side of the bar, the folder title
and its first file’s information appear
in the center display in recorded
order.

Changing and Selecting the Folders/
Files

Features

Playing an MP3/WMA Disc
The changer plays MP3/WMA discs
in recorded order. Maximum
playable file layers are 8, and total
playable tracks are 255. If your disc
has a complex structure, the changer
takes some time to read the disc
before beginning play.
Depending on the software the files
were made with, it may not be
possible to play some files, or display
some text data.

MP3/WMA INDICATOR

To play an MP3/WMA disc, use the
disc controls previously described,
along with the following information.

Using the interface selector, you can
see the list of all the files and folders
within a disc. While playing a MP3/
WMA disc, press the AUDIO button.
The currently playing folder and file
information comes on the screen.

CONTINUED

221

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:11:02 31TA5630_227

Playing Discs (Models with navigation system)

CURRENT TRACK

CURRENT FOLDER

Push ENTER on the selector to
show the folder list. Turn the
selector knob, highlight the folder
you want to see the information
within, and press ENTER.

You can see the list of all the files in
the selected folder. Turn the selector
knob, then press ENTER to set your
selection.
If the root folder has some additional
folders in the lower layer, they will
be listed on the screen.

222

2011 Accord Sedan

Folder Scan
This feature, when activated,
samples the first file in each folder
for 10 seconds. To scan a folder,
press the SCAN side of the SCAN/
A. SEL bar repeatedly. You will see
SCAN next to FOLDER and the
folder number blinking.
To listen to the rest of the folder,
press and hold the SCAN side of the
bar until you hear a beep. If you do
nothing, the system advances to the
next folder, plays 10 seconds of it,
and continues with the remaining
folders in the same way. When the
system has finished sampling the
first file in all folders, folder scan is
canceled, and the last file played
continues to play.

10/06/18 16:11:10 31TA5630_228

Playing Discs (Models with navigation system)

To select any type of the repeat
modes, use the interface dial. For
more information, see page 219 .

Folder Random
This feature, when activated, plays
all files in the current folder in
random order. To activate folder
random play, select FOLDER
RANDOM by using the interface
knob, and press ENTER on the
interface selector. You will see
RANDOM next to FOLDER on the
screen. To turn this feature off,
highlight FOLDER RANDOM (if not
already highlighted), and press
ENTER on the interface selector
again.
To select any type of the random
modes, use the interface dial. For
more information, see page 219 .

Removing Discs from the
Changer
To remove the disc that is currently
playing, press the eject button. You
will see ‘‘EJECT’’ in the center
display. When you remove the disc
from the slot, the system
automatically enters the previous
mode AM, FM1, FM2, or XM Radio.
The system also begins the load
sequence so you can load another
disc. If you do not load another disc,
the load sequence is canceled, and
the system continues playing in the
previous mode.
If you do not remove the disc from
the slot, the system will reload the
disc after 10 seconds. To begin
playing the disc, press the CD button.

CONTINUED

223

2011 Accord Sedan

Features

Folder Repeat
This feature, when activated, replays
all files in the selected folder. To
activate folder repeat mode, select
FOLDER REPEAT by using the
interface knob, and press ENTER on
the interface selector. You will see
REPEAT next to FOLDER on the
screen. To turn this feature off,
highlight FOLDER REPEAT (if not
already highlighted), and press
ENTER on the interface selector
again.

10/06/18 16:11:16 31TA5630_229

Playing Discs (Models with navigation system)
To remove a different disc from
the changer, first select it by
pressing the corresponding
number on the preset button or
turning the interface knob, and
pressing ENTER on the interface
selector. When that disc begins
playing, press the eject button.

You can also eject discs when the
ignition switch is off:
To eject one disc, press and release
the eject button.
To eject all discs, press and hold the
eject button until the first disc begins
to eject.

When you press the eject button
while listening to the radio, or with
the audio system turned off, the disc
that was last selected is ejected.
After that disc is ejected, pressing
the eject button again will eject the
next disc in numerical order. By
doing this six times, you can remove
all the discs from the changer.

224

2011 Accord Sedan

Protecting Discs
For information on how to handle
and protect compact discs, see
page 245 .

10/06/18 16:11:22 31TA5630_230

Disc Changer Error Messages (Models with navigation system)
The chart on the right explains the
error messages you may see in the
center display while playing a disc.

Error Message
HEAT ERROR

UNSUPPORTED
BAD DISC
PLEASE CHECK
OWNERS
MANUAL PUSH
EJECT
MECH ERROR
BAD DISC
PLEASE CHECK
OWNERS
MANUAL
CHECK DISC

High Temperature
Track/File format not
supported

Mechanical Error

Servo Error

Disc Error

Check the disc for serious damage, signs of
deformation, excessive scratches, and/or dirt
(see page 246).

225

2011 Accord Sedan

Features

If you see an error message in the
center display while playing a disc,
press the eject button. After ejecting
the disc, check it for damage or
deformation. If there is no damage,
insert the disc again.
For additional information on
damaged discs, see page 246 .

Cause

10/06/18 16:11:27 31TA5630_231

Playing an iPod (Models with navigation system)

NAVIGATION SCREEN

CENTER DISPLAY

iPod INDICATOR

POWER/VOLUME KNOB
AUX BUTTON
SKIP BAR

MAP BUTTON
CANCEL BUTTON
AUDIO BUTTON

INTERFACE DIAL
U.S. model is shown.

226

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:11:34 31TA5630_232

Playing an iPod (Models with navigation system)
The audio system reads and plays
playable sound files on the iPod. The
system cannot operate an iPod as a
mass storage device. The system will
only play songs stored on the iPod
with iTunes.
iPod and iTunes are registered
trademarks owned by Apple Inc.
Voice Control System

You can select the AUX mode by
using the navigation system voice
control buttons, but cannot operate
the play mode functions.

Software
Ver. 1.1.2 or more
Ver. 2.0.1 or more

Ver. 1.3.0 or more
Ver. 1.3.1 or more
Ver. 1.1.3 or more
Ver. 1.1.3 or more
Ver. 1.0.3 or more
Ver. 1.0.1 or more
Ver. 1.1.5 or more
Ver. 2.2.1 or more

CONTINUED

227

2011 Accord Sedan

Features

To Play an iPod
This audio system can operate the
audio files on the iPod with the
same controls used for the in-dash
disc changer. To play an iPod,
connect it to the USB adapter cable
in the console compartment by using
your dock connector, then press the
AUX button. The ignition switch
must be in the ACCESSORY (I) or
ON (II) position. The iPod will also
be recharged with the ignition switch
in these positions.

10/06/18 16:11:45 31TA5630_233

Playing an iPod (Models with navigation system)
Use only compatible iPods with the
latest software. iPods that are not
compatible will not work in this audio
unit.

Connecting an iPod
USB CONNECTOR
USB CONNECTOR

NOTE:
Do not connect your iPod using a
hub.
Do not keep the iPod in the
vehicle. Direct sunlight and high
heat will damage it.
Do not use an extension cable
between the USB adapter cable
equipped with your vehicle and
your dock connector.

USB ADAPTER CABLE

1. Pull out the USB connector from
the holder.

DOCK CONNECTOR

2. Connect your dock connector to
the iPod correctly and securely.
3. Install the dock connector to the
USB adapter cable securely.

We recommend backing up your
data before playing it.
Some devices cannot be powered
or charged via the USB adapter. If
this is the case, use the accessory
adapter to supply power to your
device.

228

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:11:51 31TA5630_234

Playing an iPod (Models with navigation system)
If the iPod indicator does not appear
in the audio display, check the
connections, and try to reconnect the
iPod a few times.

www.apple.com/itunes/

To Change or Select Files

Use the SKIP bar while an iPod is
playing to select passages and
change files.
SKIP − Each time you press and
release the
side of the SKIP bar,
the system skips forward to the
beginning of the next file. Press and
release the
side of the bar to
skip backward to the beginning of
the current file. Press it again to skip
to the beginning of the previous file.
To move rapidly within a file, press
and hold either side (
or
)
of the SKIP bar.

CONTINUED

229

2011 Accord Sedan

Features

If the audio system still does not
recognize the iPod, the iPod may
need to be reset. Follow the
instructions that came with your
iPod, or you can find reset
instructions online at:

The current file number and total of
the selected playable files are
displayed in the center display.
Pressing the AUDIO button displays
the artist, album and track (file)
names on the navigation screen.

10/06/18 16:11:58 31TA5630_235

Playing an iPod (Models with navigation system)
To Select a File from iPod Menu

You can also change files with the
interface dial. Press the AUDIO
button to show the audio control
display on the navigation screen.
Push the selector to the right side to
skip forward and to the left side to
skip backward.

You can also select a file from any of
the iPod menus: playlists, artists,
albums and songs, by using the
interface dial. Press the AUDIO
button to display the audio control
display on the navigation screen.
Push up the interface selector to
display the iPod menu. Turn the
knob on the interface dial to select a
desired list.

230

2011 Accord Sedan

Push ENTER on the selector to
display the items on that list, then
turn the knob on the interface dial to
select a desired list. Pushing the
selector up or down moves a
selection to the top or bottom of the
screen items. Press ENTER to set
your selection.

10/06/18 16:12:05 31TA5630_236

Playing an iPod (Models with navigation system)
If you select ‘‘ALL’’ on either the
artists or albums list, all available
files on the selected list are played.

To Select Repeat or Random Mode:

To cancel the selected mode, press
ENTER again while the highlighted
mode is selected on the audio control
display.

Features

Press the AUDIO button to go back
to the normal audio playing display.
Pressing the CANCEL button goes
back to the previous screen, and
pressing the MAP button cancels the
audio control display on the screen.
Push down the selector.

You can select any type of repeat and
random mode on the audio menu.
Press the AUDIO button to display
the audio control screen, then push
down the selector to display the
audio menu. Turn the knob on the
interface dial to select an audio
mode: repeat, album random, and
track random. Press ENTER to set
your selection.
CONTINUED

231

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:12:11 31TA5630_237

Playing an iPod (Models with navigation system)
TRACK RANDOM − This feature
plays all available files from the
selected items in the iPod menu list
(playlists, artists, albums or songs)
in random order. You will see
TRACK RANDOM on the screen.
To turn it off, have this mode
highlighted and press ENTER again.

REPEAT − This feature
continuously plays a file.
To turn it off, press ENTER again.

ALBUM RANDOM − This feature
plays all available albums from the
selected items in the iPod menu list
(playlists, artists, albums or songs)
in random order. The files in each
album are played in the recorded
order. You will see ALBUM
RANDOM on the screen.

Pressing either side of the SKIP bar
changes the file while keeping the
repeat feature.

232

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:12:20 31TA5630_238

Playing an iPod (Models with navigation system)
To turn it off, have this mode
highlighted and press ENTER again.
You can also select another list from
the iPod menu while keeping the
random function.

Disconnecting an iPod

When you disconnect the iPod while
it is playing, the center display and
the audio screen (if selected) show
NO DATA.
If you reconnect the same iPod, the
system may begin playing where it
left off, depending on what mode the
iPod is in when it is reconnected.
iPod Error Messages
If you see an error message in the
center display, see page 234 .

＊ : The displayed message may
vary on models or versions. On
some models, there is no
message to disconnect.

233

2011 Accord Sedan

Features

NOTE:
Available operating functions vary on
models or versions. Some functions
may not be available on the vehicle’s
audio system.

To Stop Playing Your iPod
To play the radio, press the FM/AM,
or
button. Press the CD button
to switch to the disc mode. Press the
AUX button to switch back to the
iPod.

10/06/18 16:12:25 31TA5630_239

iPod Error Messages (Models with navigation system)
If you see an error message in the
center display while playing an iPod,
find the solution in the chart to the
right. If you cannot clear the error
message, take your vehicle to your
dealer.

Error Message

Cause

USB ERROR
BAD USB
DEVICE
PLEASE CHECK
OWNERS
MANUAL
iPod NO SONG

USB ROM Error

UNSUPPORTED
VER.

Use of unsupported
iPod

CONNECT RETRY

Appears when an
incompatible device is
connected.
No files in iPod

Recognition failure of
iPod

234

2011 Accord Sedan

Solution
There is a problem with the USB adapter unit.
Disconnect the device. Then, turn the audio
system off, and turn it on again. Do not
reconnect the device that caused the error.

Appears when the iPod is empty. Store some
files in the iPod.
Appears when an unsupported iPod is
connected. See page 227 for specification
information on iPods. If it appears when a
supported iPod is connected, update the iPod
software to the newer version.
Appears when the system does not
acknowledge the iPod. Reconnect the iPod.

10/06/18 16:12:29 31TA5630_240

Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system)

NAVIGATION SCREEN

Features

CENTER DISPLAY

USB INDICATOR

POWER/VOLUME KNOB
AUX BUTTON

CATEGORY BAR

SKIP BAR
SCAN/A.SEL
(SCAN/AUTO SELECT) BAR

MAP BUTTON
CANCEL BUTTON
AUDIO BUTTON

INTERFACE DIAL
U.S. model is shown.

235

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:12:38 31TA5630_241

Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system)
To Play a USB Flash Memory
Device
This audio system can operate the
audio files on a USB flash memory
device with the same controls used
for the in-dash disc changer. To play
a USB flash memory device, connect
it to the USB adapter cable in the
console compartment, then press the
AUX button. The ignition switch
must be in the ACCESSORY (I) or
ON (II) position.

The recommended USB flash
memory devices are 256 MB or
higher, and formatted with the FAT
file system. Some digital audio
players may be compatible as well.
Some USB flash memory devices
(such as devices with security lockout features, etc.) will not work in
this audio unit.

We recommend backing up your
data before playing a USB flash
memory device.
Depending on the type and
number of files, it may take some
time before they begin to play.

＊ : Only AAC format files recorded
with iTunes are playable on this
audio unit.

236

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:12:44 31TA5630_242

Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system)
Depending on the software the
files were made with, it may not be
possible to play some files, or
display some text data.

The order of files in USB playback
may be different from the order of
files displayed in PC or other
devices etc. Files are played in the
order stored in USB flash memory
device.

Voice Control System

You can select the AUX mode by
using the navigation system voice
control buttons, but cannot operate
the play mode functions.

Features

Depending on the type of
encoding and writing software
used, there may be cases where
character information does not
display properly.

Some versions of MP3, WMA, or
AAC format may not be supported. If
an unsupported file is found, the
audio unit displays UNSUPPORTED,
then skips to the next file.

Combining a low sampling f requency
with a low bitrate may result in
extremely degraded sound quality.

Some devices cannot be powered
or charged via the USB adapter. If
this is the case, use the accessory
adapter to supply power to your
device.

CONTINUED

237

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:12:51 31TA5630_243

Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system)
When the USB device is connected
and the USB mode is selected on the
audio system, the USB indicator is
shown in the center display. It also
shows the folder and file numbers.
Pressing the AUDIO button displays
the folder and file names, and the
elapsed time in the navigation screen.

Connecting a USB Flash Memory
Device
USB CONNECTOR

USB CONNECTOR

USB ADAPTER CABLE

1. Pull out the USB connector from
the holder.

2. Connect the USB flash memory
device to the USB adapter cable
correctly and securely.

238

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:12:57 31TA5630_244

Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system)
Folder Selection − To select a
different folder, press and release
either side of the CATEGORY bar.
Press the ▲ side to skip to the next
folder, and press the ▼ side to skip
to the beginning of the previous
folder.

To Change or Select Files

Use the SKIP bar while a USB flash
memory device is playing to select
passages and change files.

To move rapidly within a file, press
and hold either side (
or
)
of the SKIP bar.

SKIP DIRECTION
(Backward)

Features

SKIP DIRECTION
(Forward)

You can also change files with the
interface dial. Press the AUDIO
button to show the audio control
display on the navigation screen.
Push the selector knob to the right
side to skip to the beginning of the
next file, and to the left side to skip
to the beginning of the current file.
Pushing it to the left again skips to
the beginning of the previous file.
CONTINUED

239

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:13:04 31TA5630_245

Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system)
To Select a File from Folder and File
Lists

You can also select a folder or file
from the list by using the interface
dial. Press the AUDIO button to
show the audio control display on the
navigation screen.

Push up the selector on the interface
dial to switch the display to the
folder list, then turn the knob on the
interface dial to select a folder.

Press ENTER to change the display
to the file list, then turn the knob on
the interface dial to select a file.
Press ENTER to set your selection.
To go back to the normal playing
display, press the AUDIO button.
Pressing the CANCEL button goes
back to the previous screen and
pressing the MAP button cancels the
audio mode display.

240

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:13:13 31TA5630_246

Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system)
highlighted play mode, then press
ENTER to turn off that selected
mode.

To Select Repeat, Random or Scan
Mode:

TRACK RANDOM − This feature
plays all the files in random order.

You can select any type of repeat,
random and scan modes on the audio
menu screen. Press the AUDIO
button to show the audio control
display on the navigation screen.
Push down the selector on the
interface dial to display the audio
menu items.

Turn the knob on the interface dial
to select a play mode: folder random,
track random, folder repeat, track
repeat. Press ENTER to set your
selection.
To cancel the selected mode, push
down the selector to display the
audio menu on the audio control
display. Turn the knob on the
interface dial to select the

TRACK REPEAT − This feature
continuously plays a file. Pressing
either side of the SKIP bar also turns
off this feature.
FOLDER REPEAT − This feature
replays all the files in the selected
folder in the order they are stored.
Pressing either side of the
CATEGORY bar also turns off this
feature.

CONTINUED

241

2011 Accord Sedan

Features

FOLDER RANDOM − This
feature plays the files in the selected
folder in random order.

10/06/18 16:13:18 31TA5630_247

Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system)
TRACK SCAN − This function
samples all files in the selected
folder in the order they are stored.
To activate the scan feature, push
the selector to the right. You will see
TRACK SCAN on the screen. You
will also see SCAN on the center
display and the file number blinking.
You will get a 10 second sampling of
each file in the folder. Push the
selector repeatedly to get out of the
scan mode. The system plays the last
file sampled.
You can also select the scan feature
with the SCAN side of the SCAN/
A.SEL bar on the control panel.
Press and release the SCAN side of
the bar. Press and hold the SCAN
side of the bar to get out of the scan
mode and play the last file sampled.

FOLDER SCAN − This function
samples the first file in each folder in
the order they are stored. To
activate the folder scan feature, push
the selector to the right repeatedly.
You will see FOLDER SCAN on the
screen. You will also see SCAN on
the center display and the folder
number blinking. You will get a 10
second sampling of the first file in
each folder. Push the selector
repeatedly to get out of the scan
mode. The system plays the last file
sampled.
You can also select the folder scan
feature with the SCAN side of the
SCAN/A.SEL bar on the control
panel. Press and release the SCAN
side of the bar repeatedly.
Press and hold the SCAN side of the
bar to get out of the folder scan
mode and play the last file sampled.

242

2011 Accord Sedan

Pressing either side of the
CATEGORY or SKIP bar also turns
off the feature.

10/06/18 16:13:25 31TA5630_248

Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system)
To Stop Playing a USB Flash
Memory Device
To play the radio, press the FM/AM,
or
button. Press the CD button
to switch to the disc mode. Press the
AUX button to switch back to the
USB.

You can disconnect the USB flash
memory device at any time even if
the USB mode is selected on the
audio system. Make sure to follow
the USB flash memory device’s
instructions when you remove it.

USB Flash Memory Device Error
Messages
If you see an error message in the
center display, see page 244 .

Features

If you reconnect the same USB flash
memory device, the system will
begin playing where it left off.

Disconnecting a USB Flash Memory
Device

When you disconnect the USB flash
memory device while it is playing,
the center display and the audio
screen (if selected) show NO DATA.

243

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:13:30 31TA5630_249

USB Flash Memory Device Error Messages (Models with navigation system)
If you see an error message in the
center display while playing a USB
flash memory device, find the
solution in the chart to the right. If
you cannot clear the error message,
take your vehicle to your dealer.

Error Message
USB ERROR
BAD USB
DEVICE
PLEASE CHECK
OWNERS
MANUAL
UNPLAYABLE FILE

USB NO SONG

UNSUPPORTED

Cause
USB ROM Error
Appears when an
incompatible device is
connected.

Use of unsupported
files

No files in USB flash
memory device

Use of unsupported
USB flash memory
device

244

2011 Accord Sedan

Solution
There is a problem with the USB adapter unit.
Disconnect the device. Then, turn the audio
system off, and turn it on again. Do not
reconnect the device that caused the error.

Appears when the files in the USB flash
memory device are DRM or an unsupported
format. This error message appears for about 3
seconds, then plays the next song.
Appears when the USB flash memory device is
empty or there are no MP3, WMA, or AAC files
in the USB flash memory device. Save some
MP3, WMA, or AAC files in the USB flash
memory device.
Appears when an unsupported device is
connected. See page 236 for the specification
information for the USB flash memory device.
If it appears when the supported device is
connected, reconnect the device.

10/06/18 16:13:38 31TA5630_250

Protecting Your Discs
General Information
When using CD-R or CD-RW discs,
use only high quality discs labeled
for audio use.

Play only standard, round, 5-inch
(12 cm) discs. Smaller or oddshaped discs may jam in the drive
or cause other problems.
Handle your discs properly to
prevent damage and skipping.

Do not use discs with adhesive labels.
The label can curl up and cause the
disc to jam in the unit.

To clean a disc, use a clean soft cloth.
Wipe across the disc from the center
to the outside edge.
A new disc may be rough on the
inner and outer edges. The small
plastic pieces causing this roughness
can flake off and fall on the
recording surface of the disc,
causing skipping or other problems.
Remove these pieces by rubbing the
inner and outer edges with the side
of a pencil or pen.

Features

When recording a CD-R or
CD-RW, the recording must be
closed for it to be used by the
disc changer.

Protecting Discs
When a disc is not being played,
store it in its case to protect it from
dust and other contamination. To
prevent warpage, keep discs out of
direct sunlight and extreme heat.

Handle a disc by its edges; never
touch either surface. Do not place
stabilizer rings or labels on the disc.
These, along with contamination
from finger prints, liquids, and felttip pens, can cause the disc to not
play properly, or possibly jam in
the drive.

Never try to insert foreign objects in
the disc changer.

245

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:13:49 31TA5630_251

Protecting Your Discs
Additional Information on
Recommended Discs
The in-dash disc player/changer has
a sophisticated and delicate
mechanism. If you insert a damaged
disc as indicated in this section, it
may become stuck inside and
damage the audio unit.
Examples of these discs are shown
to the right:

1. Bubbled, wrinkled, labeled, and excessively thick discs

Bubbled/
Wrinkled

With Label/
Sticker

2. Damaged discs

Chipped/
Cracked

Using Printer
Label Kit

Sealed

3. Poor quality discs

Warped

246

2011 Accord Sedan

Burrs

With Plastic
Ring

10/06/18 16:13:59 31TA5630_252

Protecting Your Discs
4. Small, irregular shaped discs

5. Discs with scratches, dirty discs

Recommended discs are printed
with the following logo.

Features

3-inch (8-cm) CD

Triangle Shape
Fingerprints, scratches, etc.

Audio unit may not play the
following formats.

CD-R or CD-RW may not play due
to the recording conditions.
Scratches and fingerprints on the
discs may cause the sound to skip.
This audio unit cannot play a Dualdisc .
Can Shape

Arrow Shape

247

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:14:08 31TA5630_253

FM/AM Radio Reception
FM/AM Radio Frequencies
The radio can receive the complete
AM and FM bands. Those bands
cover these frequencies:
AM band: 530 to 1,710 kHz
FM band: 87.7 to 107.9 MHz
Radio stations on the AM band are
assigned frequencies at least 10 kHz
apart (530, 540, 550). Stations on the
FM band are assigned frequencies at
least 0.2 MHz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3).
Stations must use these exact
frequencies. It is fairly common for
stations to round-off the frequency in
their advertising, so your radio could
display a frequency of 100.9 even
though the announcer may identify
the station as ‘‘FM101.’’

FM/AM Radio Reception
How well the radio receives stations
is dependent on many factors, such
as the distance from the station’s
transmitter, nearby large objects,
and atmospheric conditions.
A radio station’s signal gets weaker
as you get farther away from its
transmitter. If you are listening to an
AM station, you will notice the sound
volume becoming weaker, and the
station drifting in and out. If you are
listening to an FM station, you will
see the stereo indicator flickering off
and on as the signal weakens.
Eventually, the stereo indicator will
go off and the sound will fade
completely as you get out of range of
the station’s signal.

248

2011 Accord Sedan

Driving very near the transmitter of
a station that is broadcasting on a
frequency close to the frequency of
the station you are listening to can
also affect your radio’s reception.
You may temporarily hear both
stations, or hear only the station you
are close to.

10/06/18 16:14:14 31TA5630_254

FM/AM Radio Reception
As required by the FCC:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.

Features

Radio signals, especially on the FM
band, are deflected by large objects
such as buildings and hills. Your
radio then receives both the direct
signal from the station’s transmitter,
and the deflected signal. This causes
the sound to distort or flutter. This is
a main cause of poor radio reception
in city driving.

Radio reception can be affected by
atmospheric conditions such as
thunderstorms, high humidity, and
even sunspots. You may be able to
receive a distant radio station one
day and not receive it the next day
because of a change in conditions.
Electrical interference from passing
vehicles and stationary sources can
cause temporary reception problems.

249

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:14:20 31TA5630_255

Remote Audio Controls
MODE BUTTON

VOL BUTTON

CH BUTTON

Three controls for the audio system
are mounted in the steering wheel
hub. These let you control basic
functions without removing your
hand from the wheel.

The VOL button adjusts the volume
up (▲) or down (▼). Press the top
or bottom of the button, hold it until
the desired volume is reached, then
release it.
The MODE button changes the
mode. Pressing the button
repeatedly selects FM1, FM2, AM,
disc (if a disc(s) is loaded) or AUX
(if an appropriate audio unit is
connected). On models with XM
Radio, you can also select XM1 and
XM2.
If an iPod or a USB flash memory
device is plugged into the system,
you can also select AUX.

250

2011 Accord Sedan

If you are listening to the radio, use
the CH button to change stations.
Each time you press the top (＋) of
the button, the system goes to the
next preset station on the band you
are listening to. Press the bottom
(−) to go back to the previous
preset station. If you press and hold
the CH button (＋) or (−), the
system goes into the skip (seek)
mode. It stops when it finds a station
with a strong signal.

10/06/18 16:14:26 31TA5630_256

Remote Audio Controls
You can also use the skip function to
select folders. Press and hold the top
(＋) of the CH button until you hear
a beep, to skip forward to the first
file in the next folder. Press the
bottom (−) to skip backward to the
previous folder.
On models with in-dash disc changer

If you are playing a conventional CD
(without the text data and not
compressed in MP3 or WMA), you
can use the skip function to select
discs. Press and hold the top (＋) of
the CH button until you hear a beep,
to skip forward to the next disc.
Press and hold the bottom (−) to
skip backward to the previous disc.

EX, EX-L and V6 models

If you are playing a USB flash
memory device or iPod with the USB
adapter cable, press and release the
top (＋) of the CH button to skip
forward to the beginning of the next
file. Press the bottom (−) to skip
backward to the beginning to the
current file. Press it twice to return
to the previous file.
When playing a USB flash memory
device, you can also use the seek
function to skip the folder. To
activate this, press and hold either
side of the CH button until you hear
a beep.

251

2011 Accord Sedan

Features

If you are playing a disc, iPod or USB
flash memory device, the system
skips to the beginning of the next
track/file each time you press the
top (＋) of the CH button. Press the
bottom (−) to return to the
beginning of the current track/file.
Press it twice to return to the
previous track/file.

10/06/18 16:14:31 31TA5630_257

Auxiliary Input Jack

EX, EX-L and V6 models

The auxiliary input jack is inside the
console compartment. The system
will accept auxiliary input from
standard audio accessories using a
1/8 inch (3.5 mm) stereo miniplug.

LX, LX-P and SE models

When you plug in a mini-jack cable
between a compatible audio unit and
the jack, you will see AUX in the
display and the system automatically
switches to AUX mode.
When a compatible audio unit is
connected to the jack, press the AUX
or CD/AUX button to select it.

252

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:14:37 31TA5630_258

Radio Theft Protection
Except LX, LX-P and U.S. SE

You should have received a radio
code card that lists your audio
system’s code and serial numbers. It
is best to store this card in a safe
place at home. In addition, you
should write the audio system’s
serial number in this owner’s manual.
If you lose the card, you must obtain
the code number from your dealer.
To do this, you will need the audio
system’s serial number.

If your vehicle’s battery is disconnected or goes dead, the audio
system will disable itself. If this
happens, you will see
‘‘ENTER CODE’’ in the frequency
display (on the screen on models
with navigation system) the next
time you turn on the system. Use the
preset buttons to enter the five-digit
code. The code is on the radio code
card included in your owner’s
manual kit. When it is entered
correctly, the radio will start playing.

The system will retain your AM and
FM presets even if power is
disconnected.

Features

Your vehicle’s audio system may
disable itself if it is disconnected
from electrical power for any reason.
To make it work again, you must
enter a specific five-digit code with
the preset buttons. Because there
are hundreds of number
combinations possible from the five
digits, making the system work
without knowing the exact code is
nearly impossible.

If you make a mistake entering the
code, do not start over; complete the
five-digit sequence, then enter the
correct code. You have ten tries to
enter the correct code. If you are
unsuccessful in ten attempts, you
must then leave the system on for 1
hour before trying again.

253

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:14:46 31TA5630_259

Setting the Clock
On models without navigation system

To set the time, press the CLOCK
button until you hear a beep. The
displayed time begins to blink.

On models without navigation system

Change the hours by pressing the H
(hour) button until the numbers
advance to the desired time. Change
the minutes by pressing the M
(minute) button until the numbers
advance to the desired time.

RESET BUTTON
(PRESET 6)
CLOCK BUTTON

Press the CLOCK button again to
enter the set time.
You can quickly set the time to the
nearest hour. If the displayed time is
before the half hour, press and hold
the CLOCK button, then press the R
(reset) button to set the time back to
the previous hour. If the displayed
time is after the half hour, the same
procedure sets the time forward to
the beginning of the next hour.

U.S. EX-L is shown.

HOUR BUTTON
(PRESET 4)

For example:
1:06 would RESET to 1:00.
1:52 would RESET to 2:00.

254

2011 Accord Sedan

MINUTE BUTTON
(PRESET 5)

On models with navigation system

The navigation system receives
signals from the global positioning
system (GPS), and the displayed
time is updated automatically by the
GPS. Refer to the navigation system
manual for how to adjust the time.

10/06/18 16:14:57 31TA5630_260

Setting the Clock
EX, EX-L, Canadian SE, and V6 models
without navigation system
Adjusting the Clock with MENU
Button

Features

You can also adjust the clock and
switch the clock display between
24-hours and 12-hours in the menu
mode.
To adjust the clock setting:
1. Press and release the MENU
button. The display shows you the
menu items.
You can adjust the clock setting
with the ignition switch in the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II)
position.

2. Turn the selector knob to select
‘‘CLOCK ADJUST.’’
3. Press the selector knob (ENTER)
to enter your selection. The
display changes to the clock
adjusting display.

4. Turn the selector knob to select
the item which you want to adjust.
Turning the selector knob will
change the selected item between
the clock display setting, hours,
minutes, and SET. The selected
item is indicated with △ in the
display.

CONTINUED

255

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:15:08 31TA5630_261

Setting the Clock

MINUTE SETTING

5. Turn the selector knob to change
the setting between 12H and 24H.

8. Turn the selector knob to count
the numbers up or down.

6. Press the selector knob (ENTER)
to enter your selection. The
display will return to the clock
adjusting display.

9. Press the selector knob (ENTER)
to enter your selection. The
display will return to the clock
adjusting display.

7. To set the time, turn the selector
knob and select the hours or the
minutes, then press the knob to
enter your selection. The display
changes to the setting display.

While setting the clock, pressing
the RETURN button will go back
to the previous display.
Pressing the MENU button again
will cancel this setting mode.

256

2011 Accord Sedan

10. To enter the clock setting, turn
the selector knob to select ‘‘SET,’’
then press the knob. The display
will return to the menu item
display.
11. Press either the RETURN or
MENU button to go back to the
normal display.

10/06/18 16:15:15 31TA5630_262

Security System
Except LX

The security system automatically
sets 15 seconds after you lock the
doors, hood, and trunk. For the
system to activate, you must lock the
doors from the outside with the key,
driver’s lock tab, door lock master
switch, or remote transmitter. The
security system indicator on the
instrument panel starts blinking
immediately to show you the system
is setting itself.

SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR

Once the security system is set,
opening any door (without using the
key or the remote transmitter), the
hood, or the trunk will cause the
alarm to activate. It will also activate
if the audio unit is removed from the
dashboard or the wiring is cut.

With the system set, you can still
open the trunk with the remote
transmitter without triggering the
alarm. The alarm will sound if the
trunk lock is forced, or the trunk is
opened with the trunk release lever
or the emergency trunk opener.
The security system will not set if
the hood, trunk, or any door is not
fully closed. If the system will not set,
check the door and trunk open
indicators on the instrument panel
(see page 60 ) to see if the doors and
trunk are fully closed. Since it is not
part of the monitor display, manually
check the hood.

CONTINUED

257

2011 Accord Sedan

Features

The security system helps to protect
your vehicle and valuables from theft.
The horn sounds and a combination
of headlights, parking lights, side
marker lights and taillights flashes if
someone attempts to break into your
vehicle or remove the audio unit.
This alarm continues for two
minutes, then the system resets. To
reset an activated system before the
two minutes have elapsed, unlock
the driver’s door with the key or the
remote transmitter.

10/06/18 16:15:18 31TA5630_263

Security System
NOTE: Use the remote transmitter
to quickly check that the hood, the
trunk, and all doors are closed. Push
the lock button twice within 5
seconds. There should be an audible
confirmation beep.
Do not attempt to alter this system
or add other devices to it.

258

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:15:28 31TA5630_264

Compass
EX-L and EX-L V6 without navigation
system

When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, the compass is
self-calibrating, then the compass
display is shown in the display.

COMPASS SETTING MENU ITEMS

Features

Compass Operation
Compass operation can be affected
by driving near power lines or
stations, across bridges, through
tunnels, over railroad crossings, past
large vehicles, or driving near large
objects that can cause a magnetic
disturbance. It can also be affected
by accessories such as antennas and
roof racks that are mounted by
magnets.

Compass Calibration

COMPASS
U.S. model is shown.

The compass may need to be
manually calibrated after exposure to
a strong magnetic field. If the
compass seems to be continually
showing the wrong direction and is
not self-calibrating, or the compass
display is blinking with the CAL
indicator on, do the following.

NOTE: Do this procedure in an open
area, away from buildings, power
lines, and other vehicles.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position.
2. Press and hold the MENU button
for about 5 seconds until you hear
a beep. The display shows you the
compass setting menu items.
CONTINUED

259

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:15:36 31TA5630_265

Compass
5. Press the selector knob (ENTER).
The compass display is blinking
and the CAL indicator is shown.
6. Drive the vehicle slowly in two
complete circles.
When the calibration is successfully
completed, the CAL indicator goes
off and the compass display will stop
blinking and show an actual heading.
3. Turn the selector knob to select
‘‘CALIBRATION.’’

4. Press the selector knob (ENTER)
to enter your selection. The
display shows you ‘‘PUSH CAL
START.’’
While setting the compass,
pressing the RETURN button will
go back to the previous display.
Pressing the MENU button will
cancel the compass setting mode.

260

2011 Accord Sedan

The audio system is not related to
the compass system. Even if the
compass system is calibrating, the
display returns to the normal display
which you last selected.

10/06/18 16:15:46 31TA5630_266

Compass
Compass Zone Selection
In most areas, there is a variation
between magnetic north and true
north. Zone selection is required so
the compass can compensate for this
variation. To check and select the
zone, do this:

ZONE NUMBER

2. Press and hold the MENU button
for about 5 seconds until you hear
a beep. The display shows you the
compass setting menu items.
3. Turn the selector knob to select
‘‘ZONE.’’ Press the selector knob
(ENTER) to enter your selection.
The display shows you the
currently selected zone number.

4. Find the zone for your area on the
map (see page 262 ). If the correct
zone is not shown, turn the
selector knob to cycle the zone
lists up or down.

5. Once the correct zone is displayed,
press the selector knob. The
display then returns to normal.

If necessary, press the RETURN
button to return to the previous
display. Pressing the MENU
button will cancel the compass
setting mode.
CONTINUED

261

2011 Accord Sedan

Features

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position.

10/06/18 16:15:50 31TA5630_267

Compass
The audio system is not related to
the compass system. Even if the
compass system is in the zone
setting mode, the display returns to
the normal display which you last
selected.

Zone Map

262

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:15:58 31TA5630_268

Cruise Control

Improper use of the cruise
control can lead to a crash.
Use the cruise control only
when traveling on open
highways in good weather.

Using the Cruise Control
CRUISE BUTTON

RES/ACCEL
BUTTON

3. Press and release the SET/
DECEL button on the steering
wheel. The CRUISE CONTROL
indicator on the instrument panel
comes on to show the system is
now activated.
Features

Cruise control allows you to maintain
a set speed above 25 mph (40 km/h)
without keeping your foot on the
accelerator pedal. It should be used
for cruising on straight, open
highways. It is not recommended for
city driving, winding roads, slippery
roads, heavy rain, or bad weather.

CANCEL BUTTON

SET/DECEL
BUTTON

1. Push in the CRUISE button on the
steering wheel. The CRUISE
MAIN indicator on the instrument
panel comes on.
The cruise control system can be
left on, even when it is not in use.
2. Accelerate to the desired cruising
speed above 25 mph (40 km/h).
CONTINUED

263

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:16:06 31TA5630_269

Cruise Control
Cruise control may not hold the set
speed when you are going up and
down hills. If your vehicle speed
increases going down a hill, use the
brakes to slow down. This will cancel
the cruise control. To resume the set
speed, press the RES/ACCEL button.
The CRUISE CONTROL indicator
on the instrument panel will come
back on.

Changing the Set Speed
You can increase the set cruising
speed in any of these ways:
Press and hold the RES/ACCEL
button. When you reach the
desired cruising speed, release the
button.
Push on the accelerator pedal.
Accelerate to the desired cruising
speed, then press the SET/
DECEL button.
To increase the speed in very
small amounts, tap the RES/
ACCEL button. Each time you do
this, your vehicle will speed up
about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

264

2011 Accord Sedan

You can decrease the set cruising
speed in any of these ways:
NOTE: If you need to decrease your
speed quickly, use the brakes as you
normally would.
Press and hold the SET/DECEL
button. Release the button when
you reach the desired speed.
To slow down in very small
amounts, tap the SET/DECEL
button repeatedly. Each time you
do this, your vehicle will slow
down about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
Tap the brake or clutch pedal
lightly with your foot. The
CRUISE CONTROL indicator on
the instrument panel will go out.
When the vehicle slows to the
desired speed, press the SET/
DECEL button.

10/06/18 16:16:13 31TA5630_270

Cruise Control
Even with the cruise control turned
on, you can still use the accelerator
pedal to speed up for passing. After
completing the pass, take your foot
off the accelerator pedal. The vehicle
will return to the set cruising speed.

Tap the brake or clutch pedal.
Push the CANCEL button on the
steering wheel.
Push the CRUISE button on the
steering wheel.

Resuming the Set Speed
When you push the CANCEL button,
or tap the brake or clutch pedal, the
system will remember the previously
set cruising speed. To return to that
speed, accelerate to above 25 mph
(40 km/h), and then press and
release the RES/ACCEL button. The
CRUISE CONTROL indicator comes
on. The vehicle will accelerate to the
same cruising speed as before.
Pressing the CRUISE button turns
the system completely off and erases
the previous cruising speed.

265

2011 Accord Sedan

Features

Resting your foot on the brake or
clutch pedal causes the cruise
control to cancel.

Canceling Cruise Control
You can cancel cruise control in any
of these ways:

10/06/18 16:16:19 31TA5630_271

HomeLink Universal Transceiver
EX-L V6

The HomeLink universal
transceiver built into your vehicle
can be programmed to operate up to
three remotely controlled devices
around your home, such as garage
doors, lighting, or home security
systems.

General Information
Before programming your
HomeLink to operate a garage door
opener, confirm that the opener has
an external entrapment protection
system, such as an ‘‘electronic eye,’’
or other safety and reverse stop
features.
If your garage door was
manufactured before April 1, 1982,
you may not be able to program
HomeLink to operate it. These units
do not have safety features that
cause the motor to stop and reverse
it if an obstacle is detected during
closing, increasing the risk of injury.
Do not use HomeLink with any
garage door opener that lacks safety
stop and reverse features.

266

2011 Accord Sedan

Units manufactured between April 1,
1982 and January 1, 1993 may be
equipped with safety stop and
reverse features. If your unit does
not have an external entrapment
protection system, an easy test to
confirm the function and
performance of the safety stop and
reverse feature is to lay a 2 × 4
under the closing door. The door
should stop and reverse upon
contacting the piece of wood.
As an additional safety feature,
garage door openers manufactured
after January 1, 1993 are required to
have external entrapment protection
systems, such as an electronic eye,
which detect an object obstructing
the door.

10/06/18 16:16:28 31TA5630_272

HomeLink Universal Transceiver
Training HomeLink
Before you begin − If you just
received your vehicle and have not
trained any of the buttons in
HomeLink before, you should erase
any previously learned codes before
training the first button. To do this,
press and hold the two outside
buttons on the HomeLink
transceiver for about 10−20 seconds,
until the red indicator flashes.
Release the buttons, then proceed to
step 1.

Features

Important Safety Precautions
Refer to the safety information that
came with your garage door opener
to test that the safety features are
functioning properly. If you do not
have this information, contact the
manufacturer of the equipment.
Before programming HomeLink to a
garage door or gate opener, make
sure that people and objects are out
of the way of the device to prevent
potential injury or damage.
When programming a garage door
opener, park just outside the garage.

CONTINUED

267

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:16:40 31TA5630_273

HomeLink Universal Transceiver
If you are training the second or third buttons, go directly to step 1.

268

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:16:45 31TA5630_274

HomeLink Universal Transceiver
HomeLink is a registered
trademark of Johnson Controls, Inc.

Features

269

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:16:53 31TA5630_275

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
If equipped
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (HFL)

Using HFL

allows you to place and receive
phone calls using voice commands,
without handling your cell phone.
To use HFL, you need a Bluetoothcompatible cell phone. For a list of
compatible phones, pairing
procedures, and special feature
capabilities:
In the U.S., visit
handsfreelink.honda.com

HFL TALK BUTTON

HFL Buttons
HFL TALK BUTTON

NAVI VOICE
CONTROL
BUTTONS
HFL BACK BUTTON
On models without navigation system
HFL BACK BUTTON
On models with navigation system

or call (888) 528-7876.
In Canada, visit www.handsfreelink.ca,
or call (888) 528-7876.

HFL Talk button − Press and
release to give a command or answer
a call.
HFL Back button − Press and
release to end a call, go back to the
previous command, or cancel the
command.

270

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:17:01 31TA5630_276

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
Voice Control Tips

Many commands can be spoken
together. For example, you can
say ‘‘Call 123-456-＃＃＃＃’’ or
‘‘Dial Peter.’’

Try to reduce all background
noise. If the microphone picks up
voices other than yours,
commands may be misinterpreted.

When HFL is in use, navigation
voice commands cannot be
recognized.

MICROPHONE

To change the volume level of
HFL, use the audio system volume
knob or the steering wheel volume
controls.

Air or wind noise from the
dashboard and side vents,
windows and moonroof may
interfere with the microphone.
Adjust or close them as necessary.

CONTINUED

271

2011 Accord Sedan

Features

Press and release the HFL Talk
button each time you want to
make a command. After the beep,
speak in a clear, natural tone.

10/06/18 16:17:10 31TA5630_277

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
Help Features

To hear general HFL information,
including help on pairing a phone
or setting up the system, say
‘‘Tutorial.’’

Information Display
BLUETOOTH INDICATOR

For help at any time, including a
list of available commands, say
‘‘Hands free help.’’
BLUETOOTH INDICATOR
PHONE NUMBER
On models without navigation system

When there is an incoming call, or
HFL is in use, ‘‘HANDSFREELINK’’
will appear on the display.
‘‘
’’ indicator will be displayed on
the audio display when a phone is
linked.

272

2011 Accord Sedan

U.S. model with navigation system is
shown.

On models with navigation system

A notification that there is an
incoming call, or HFL is in use, will
appear on the navigation screen
when the audio system is on.

10/06/18 16:17:17 31TA5630_278

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
How to Use HFL
The ignition switch must be in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.

Press HFL
Talk button

‘‘Call’’ or ‘‘Dial’’

Pair a phone to the system (See page 276)

‘‘Edit’’

Edit the name of a paired phone (See page 277)

‘‘Delete’’

Delete a paired phone from the system (See page 277)

Features

‘‘Phone Setup’’

‘‘Pair’’

‘‘List’’

Hear a list of all phones paired to the system (See page 277)

‘‘Status’’

Hear which paired phone is currently linked to the system
(See page 278)

‘‘Next Phone’’

Search for another previously paired phone to link to (See page 278)

‘‘Set Pairing
Code’’

Set the pairing code to a ‘‘Fixed’’ or ‘‘Random’’ number
(See page 278)

‘‘123-456-＃＃＃＃’’
‘‘Jim Smith’’

Enter desired phone number (See page 279)
Once a phonebook entry is stored, you can say a name here.
(See page 279)

Press and release the HFL Talk button each time you give a command.

CONTINUED

273

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:17:22 31TA5630_279

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink

‘‘Redial’’

Redial the last number called (See page 280)

‘‘Transfer’’

Transfer a call from HFL to your phone, or from your phone to HFL (See page 283)

‘‘Mute’’

Mute your voice to the person at the other end of the call (See page 284)

‘‘Send’’

Send numbers or names during a call (See page 284)

Press HFL
Talk button

‘‘Phonebook’’

‘‘Store’’

Store a phonebook entry (See page 285)

‘‘Edit’’

Edit the number of an existing phonebook entry (See page 285)

‘‘Delete’’

Delete a phonebook entry (See page 286)

‘‘Receive
Contact’’

If your phone supports this function, use this to transfer contacts from
your phone to HFL (See page 286)

‘‘List’’

Hear a list of all stored phonebook entries (See page 286)

Press and release the HFL Talk button each time you give a command.

274

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:17:28 31TA5630_280

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink

Apply a security passcode to the system that must be input at each key
cycle to access the system (See page 291)

‘‘Security’’

Change your security passcode (See page 292)

‘‘Call Notification’’

Set how you would like to be notified of an incoming call
(See page 292)

‘‘Auto Transfer’’
Press HFL
Talk button

‘‘Clear’’

Set calls to automatically transfer from your phone to HFL when you
enter the vehicle (See page 292)
Clear the system of all paired phones, phonebook entries and security
passcode (See page 293)

‘‘Change Language’’

Change language from English to French (See page 293)＊

‘‘Tutorial’’

Hear a tutorial for general rules on using the system (See page 272)

‘‘Hands Free Help’’

Hear a list of available commands and additional information describing each command
(See page 272)

Press and release the HFL Talk button each time you give a command.
＊ : Canadian models

CONTINUED

275

2011 Accord Sedan

Features

‘‘System
Set up’’

‘‘Change Passcode’’

10/06/18 16:17:37 31TA5630_281

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
To use HFL, you need to pair your
Bluetooth-compatible cell phone to
the system.

Phone Setup
This command group is available for
paired cell phones.
Phone pairing tips

You cannot pair your phone while
the vehicle is moving.
Your phone must be in discovery
or search mode to pair. Refer to
your phone’s manual.
Up to six phones can be paired.
Your phone’s battery may drain
faster when it is paired to HFL.
If after three minutes your phone
is not ready to pair or a phone is
not found, the system will time out
and return to idle.

To pair a cell phone:

1. Press and release the HFL Talk
button. If you are pairing a phone
for the first time, HFL will give
you information about the pairing
process. If it is not the first phone
you are pairing, say ‘‘Phone
setup’’ and say ‘‘Pair.’’
2. Follow the HFL prompts and put
your phone in discovery or search
mode. HFL will give you a 4-digit
pairing code and begin searching
for your phone.
3. When your phone finds a
Bluetooth device, select HFL from
the options and enter the 4-digit
code from the previous step.
4. Follow the HFL prompts and
name the newly paired phone.

276

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:17:48 31TA5630_282

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
To rename a paired phone:

To delete a paired phone:

Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.

1. Say ‘‘Phone setup.’’

2. Say ‘‘Edit ’’ after the prompts.

2. Say ‘‘Delete’’ after the prompts.

3. If there is more than one phone
paired to the system, HFL will ask
you which phone’s name you want
to change. Follow the HFL
prompts and rename the phone.

3. HFL will ask you which phone you
want to delete. Follow the HFL
prompts to continue with the
deletion.

To hear the names of all paired
phones:

Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
1. Say ‘‘Phone setup.’’

3. HFL will read out all the paired
phone’s names.

CONTINUED

277

2011 Accord Sedan

Features

2. Say ‘‘List ’’ after the prompts.

10/06/18 16:18:00 31TA5630_283

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
To hear which paired phone is
currently linked:

To change from the currently linked
phone to another paired phone:

Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.

1. Say ‘‘Phone setup.’’

2. Say ‘‘Status’’ after the prompts.

2. Say ‘‘Next phone’’ after the
prompts.

To change the pairing code setting:

Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
1. Say ‘‘Phone setup.’’

3. HFL will tell you which phone is
linked to the system.

3. HFL disconnects the linked phone
and searches for another paired
phone.
4. Once another phone is found, it is
linked to the system. HFL will
inform you which phone is now
linked.
If no other phones are found or
paired, HFL will inform you that the
original phone is linked again.

278

2011 Accord Sedan

2. Say ‘‘Set pairing code’’ after the
prompts.
3. If you want HFL to create a
random code each time you pair a
phone, say ‘‘Random.’’ If you want
to choose your own 4-digit code to
be used each time, say ‘‘Fixed’’
and follow the HFL prompts.

10/06/18 16:18:11 31TA5630_284

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
Making a Call
You can make calls using any phone
number or a name in the HFL
phonebook. You can also redial the
last number called.

During a call, HFL allows you to talk
up to 30 minutes after you remove
the key from the ignition switch.
However, this may weaken the
vehicle’s battery.

To make a call using a name in the
HFL phonebook:

Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.

1. Say ‘‘Call’’ or ‘‘Dial.’’

2. Follow the HFL prompts and say
the phone number you want to dial.

2. Follow the HFL prompts and say
the name stored in the HFL
phonebook that you want to call.

3. Follow the HFL prompts to
confirm the number and say
‘‘Call’’ or ‘‘Dial.’’

3. Follow the HFL prompts to
confirm the name and make
the call.

Once connected, you will hear the
person you called through the audio
speakers.

CONTINUED

279

2011 Accord Sedan

Features

Bluetooth is the wireless technology
that links your phone to HFL. HFL
uses a Class 2 Bluetooth, which
means the maximum range between
your phone and vehicle is 30 feet (10
meters).

To make a call using a phone
number:

10/06/18 16:18:20 31TA5630_285

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
To redial the last number called by
HFL:

To make a call from an imported
phonebook:

Press and release the HFL Talk
button and say ‘‘Redial.’’

3. Select a phonebook you want to
choose a phone number from.
On models with navigation system

1. Press the INFO button, then select
‘‘Cellular Phone.’’
2. Select ‘‘Search Imported
Phonebook .’’

280

2011 Accord Sedan

If the phonebook you select is PINprotected, you will need to enter the
PIN to access it. See page 289 for
more information.

10/06/18 16:18:27 31TA5630_286

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
Selecting ‘‘Store in
HandsFreeLink,’’ the phone
number will be stored in HFL, so
that you can call it using HFL’s name
tag by voice.

Push up the interface selector to
show a list.

Features

To search for a specific name in the
phonebook, enter the keyword for
either the first or last name.

4. Select the name. All the phone
numbers stored for that name will
be listed.

To display all names in the
phonebook, select the ‘‘List ’’ option.

5. Select the phone number, and
push the interface selector to
the right.

CONTINUED

281

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:18:36 31TA5630_287

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
To make a call using the navigation
display (on models with navigation
system):

2. From the INFO screen, select
3. The navigation display will change
‘‘Cellular Phone,’’ then select ‘‘Dial.’’
as shown above. Enter a call
number.
1. Press the INFO button, and the
INFO screen will be shown.

4. To make a call, press the selector
on the interface dial to the right.
5. To end the call, press the HFL
Back button.

282

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:18:43 31TA5630_288

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
Receiving a Call
When you receive a call, an incoming
call notification (if activated) will
play and interrupt the audio system
if it is on.

To return to the original call, press
the HFL Talk button again. If you
don’t want to answer the incoming
call, disregard it and continue with
your original call. If you want to hang
up the original call and answer the
new call, press the HFL Back button.

Transferring a Call
You can transfer a call from HFL to
your phone, or from your phone to
HFL.
Press and release the HFL Talk
button and say ‘‘Transfer.’’
Features

Press the HFL Talk button to answer
the call, or the HFL Back button to
hang up.

Call Waiting

If your phone has Call Waiting, press
and release the HFL Talk button to
put the original call on hold and
answer the incoming call.

283

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:18:53 31TA5630_289

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
Muting a Call
You can mute your voice to the
person you are talking to during a
call.
To mute your voice during a call,
press and release the HFL Talk
button and say ‘‘Mute.’’
To unmute your voice, press and
release the HFL Talk button and say
‘‘Mute’’ again.

Send Numbers or Names During
a Call
HFL allows you to send numbers or
names during a call. This is useful
when you call a menu-driven phone
system.
To send a name or number during a
call:

Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
1. Say ‘‘Send.’’
2. Follow the HFL prompts and say
the name or number you want to
send.
3. Follow the HFL prompts to send
the tones and continue the call.
NOTE: To send a pound (＃), say
‘‘pound.’’ To send a star (*), say ‘‘star.’’

284

2011 Accord Sedan

Phonebook
You can store up to 50 names with
their associated numbers in HFL.
The numbers you store can be not
only phone numbers but other types,
such as account numbers or
passwords, which can be sent during
a menu-driven call.

10/06/18 16:19:06 31TA5630_290

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
To store a phonebook entry:

NOTE:

To edit the number stored in a name:

Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.

Avoid using duplicate name
entries.

Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.

1. Say ‘‘Phonebook .’’

Avoid using ‘‘home’’ as a name
entry.

1. Say ‘‘Phonebook .’’

2. Say ‘‘Store’’ after the prompts.

4. Say the number you want to store
for the name entry.

2. Say ‘‘Edit ’’ after the prompts.
3. Follow the HFL prompts and say
the name entry you want to edit.
4. When asked, say the new number
for that name.
5. Follow the HFL prompts to
complete the edit.

5. Follow the HFL prompts and say
‘‘Enter’’ to store the entry.

CONTINUED

285

2011 Accord Sedan

Features

3. Say a name you want to list as your
phonebook entry.

It is easier for HFL to recognize a
multisyllabic or longer name. For
example, use ‘‘Peter’’ instead of
‘‘Pete,’’ or ‘‘John Smith’’ instead of
‘‘John.’’

10/06/18 16:19:19 31TA5630_291

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
To delete a name:

To list all names in the phonebook:

Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.

1. Say ‘‘Phonebook .’’

2. Say ‘‘Delete’’ after the prompts.

2. Say ‘‘List ’’ after the prompts.

3. Say the name you want to delete
and follow the HFL prompts to
complete the deletion.

3. HFL begins reading the names in
the order they were stored.

To store a specific phone number
from your cell phone directly to the
HFL phonebook (available on some
phones):

Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
1. Say ‘‘Phonebook .’’

4. If you hear a name you want to call,
immediately press the HFL Talk
button and say ‘‘Call.’’

2. Say ‘‘Receive contact ’’ after the
prompts.
3. Follow the HFL prompts, select a
number from your cell phone, and
send it to HFL.
4. Follow the HFL prompts and
name the number, or say
‘‘Discard’’ if it is not the number
you want to store.
5. Follow the HFL prompts if you
want to store another number.

286

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:19:31 31TA5630_292

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
Cellular Phonebook

Import Cellular Phonebook:

Search Imported Phonebook:

(available on some phones)

The entire phonebook data of the
cell phone that is linked to HFL can
be imported to the navigation system.

Once a phonebook has been
imported, you can search the phone
numbers by the person’s name.

On models with navigation system

If you select Cellular Phone from
the Information screen menu, you
will see five HFL options.

PIN ICON

Features

For a list of cell phones that are
compatible with this feature:
In the U.S., visit
handsfreelink.honda.com

or call (888) 528-7876.
IMPORTED
PHONEBOOK

In Canada, visit www.handsfreelink.ca,
or call (888) 528-7876.
Select ‘‘Import Cellular
Phonebook ,’’ and HFL will begin
importing the phonebook. Select
‘‘OK ’’ after the import is completed.

IMPORTED DATE

Select ‘‘Search Imported
Phonebook ,’’ and a list of imported
phonebooks will be displayed.
Select a phonebook from the list.

CONTINUED

287

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:19:43 31TA5630_293

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
Push up the interface selector to
show a list.

If the phonebook is PIN-protected,
you will need to enter the 4-digit PIN.

To search for a specific name in the
phonebook, enter the keyword for
either the first or last name.
To display all names in the
phonebook, select the ‘‘List ’’ option.

Select a person from the list. Up to
three category icons are displayed in
the left side of the list:
Preference

Fax

Home

Car

Mobile

Voice

Work

Other

Pager

These indicate how many numbers
are stored for the name. If a name
has more than three category icons,
‘‘…’’ is displayed.
Select the person’s number you want
to call, and press the HFL Talk
button.

288

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:19:53 31TA5630_294

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
Delete Imported Phonebook:

You can delete any imported
phonebook.

After making a selection, the
following screen will appear.

PIN Number
You can add, change, or remove a
PIN number from any phonebook.

Select ‘‘Delete Imported
Phonebook ,’’ and a list of imported
phonebooks will be displayed.
Features

Select a phonebook you want to
delete. If the phonebook is PINprotected, you will need to enter the
4-digit PIN number.

Select ‘‘Yes,’’ then ‘‘OK ’’ to complete
the deletion.

To add a PIN:

If you have selected a phonebook
without a PIN, you will see the above
display.
Enter the new 4-digit PIN. You will
have to re-enter the PIN for
confirmation.
CONTINUED

289

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:20:01 31TA5630_295

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
To change the PIN to a new number:

To remove a PIN:

Select ‘‘PIN number,’’ then select
‘‘Do not use PIN’’ after you enter
the current PIN.

Select the phonebook you want. The
display will change as shown above.
Enter the current PIN for this
phonebook.

The display will change as shown
above.
Enter the new 4-digit PIN number.
You will be asked to re-enter the PIN
for verification.

290

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:20:09 31TA5630_296

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
System Setup
This command group allows you to
change or customize HFL basic
settings.

To set a 4-digit passcode to lock the
HFL system for security purposes:

Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
1. Say ‘‘System setup.’’

NOTE: Once a passcode is set, you
will need to enter it to use HFL each
time you start the vehicle. If you
forget the code, your dealer will have
to reset it for you, or you will have
to clear the entire system (see
page 293 ).
Features

2. Say ‘‘Security’’ after the prompts.
3. Follow the HFL prompts and say
the 4-digit passcode you want to
set.
4. Follow the HFL prompts to
confirm the number.

CONTINUED

291

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:20:22 31TA5630_297

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink

Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.

To change your security passcode:

To select either a ring tone or a
prompt as the incoming call
notification＊:

1. Say ‘‘System setup.’’

Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.

2. Say ‘‘Change passcode’’ after the
prompts.
3. Follow the HFL prompts and say
the new 4-digit passcode.
4. Follow the HFL prompts to
confirm the number.

To activate or deactivate the auto
transfer function:

1. Say ‘‘System setup.’’

If you get into the vehicle while you
are on the phone, the call can be
automatically transferred to HFL
with the ignition switch in the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.

2. Say ‘‘Call notification’’ after the
prompts.

Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.

3. Follow the HFL prompts and say
‘‘Ring tone’’ or ‘‘Prompt .’’ You
can also say ‘‘Off ’’ for no audible
incoming call notification.

1. Say ‘‘System setup.’’

＊ : The default setting is a ring tone.

3. HFL will let you know if auto
transfer is on or off, depending on
the previous setting. Follow the
HFL prompts to change the
setting.

292

2011 Accord Sedan

2. Say ‘‘Auto transfer’’ after the
prompts.

10/06/18 16:20:35 31TA5630_298

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
To clear the system:

Quick Language Selection

Change Language

This operation clears the passcodes,
paired phones, all names in the HFL
phonebook, and all imported
phonebook data.

Canadian models only
To quickly change the language:

Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.

Canadian models only
To change the system language
between English and French:

Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.

1. Say the language you want to
change to in that language.

1. Say ‘‘System setup.’’

2. Follow the HFL prompts.

3. Follow the HFL prompts to
continue to complete the clearing
procedure.

1. Say ‘‘Change language.’’
2. Follow the HFL prompts to
change the language to English or
French.
If you have not named your paired
phone in the language you just
selected, HFL will ask you to name it
in the current language.

You can also clear the system when
you have forgotten the passcode and
cannot access HFL. When HFL asks
you for the passcode, say ‘‘System
clear.’’ Paired phones, all names in
the HFL phonebook and all imported
phonebook data will be lost.

When French is your currently
selected language, you can give voice
commands in French.

293

2011 Accord Sedan

Features

2. Say ‘‘Clear’’ after the prompts.

Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.

10/06/18 16:20:42 31TA5630_299

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink , Rearview Camera and Monitor
Bluetooth Wireless Technology
The Bluetooth name and logos are
registered trademarks owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of
such marks by Honda Motor Co.,
Ltd. is under license. Other
trademarks and trade names are
those of their respective owners.

294

2011 Accord Sedan

Rearview Camera and Monitor
On models with navigation system

Refer to the navigation system
manual for operation of the rearview
camera.

10/06/18 16:20:46 31TA5630_300

Before Driving
Break-in Period .............................. 296
Fuel Recommendation .................. 296
Service Station Procedures .......... 297
Refueling..................................... 297
Check Fuel Cap Message ......... 298
Opening and Closing
the Hood ................................. 300
Oil Check .................................... 302
Engine Coolant Check .............. 303
Fuel Economy ................................ 304
Accessories and Modifications .... 307
Carrying Cargo .............................. 309

295

2011 Accord Sedan

Before Driving

Before you begin driving your
vehicle, you should know what
gasoline to use and how to check the
levels of important fluids. You also
need to know how to properly store
luggage or packages. The
information in this section will help
you. If you plan to add any
accessories to your vehicle, please
read the information in this section
first.

10/06/18 16:20:56 31TA5630_301

Break-in Period, Fuel Recommendation
Break-in Period
Help assure your vehicle’s future
reliability and performance by paying
extra attention to how you drive
during the first 600 miles (1,000 km).
During this period:
Avoid full-throttle starts and rapid
acceleration.
Do not change the oil until the
scheduled maintenance time.
Avoid hard braking for the first
200 miles (300 km).
Do not tow a trailer.

Fuel Recommendation
Your vehicle is designed to operate
on unleaded gasoline with a pump
octane number of 87 or higher. Use
of a lower octane gasoline can cause
a persistent, heavy, metallic rapping
noise that can lead to engine damage.
On models with manual transmission

You may hear a knocking noise from
the engine if you drive the vehicle at
low engine speed (below about 1,000
rpm) in a higher gear. To stop this,
raise the engine speed by shifting to
a lower gear.

You should also follow these
recommendations with an
overhauled or exchanged engine, or
when the brakes are replaced.

296

2011 Accord Sedan

We recommend using quality
gasolines containing detergent
additives that help prevent fuel
system and engine deposits.
In addition, in order to maintain good
performance, fuel economy, and
emissions control, we strongly
recommend, in areas where it is
available, the use of gasoline that
does NOT contain manganese-based
fuel additives such as MMT.
Use of gasoline with these additives
may adversely affect performance,
and cause the malfunction indicator
lamp on your instrument panel to
come on. If this happens, contact
your dealer for service.

10/06/18 16:21:04 31TA5630_302

Fuel Recommendation, Service Station Procedures
Some gasoline today is blended with
oxygenates such as ethanol or
MTBE. Your vehicle is designed to
operate on oxygenated gasoline
containing up to 10% ethanol by
volume and up to 15% MTBE by
volume. Do not use gasoline
containing methanol.

Refueling
Push

Before Driving

Handle fuel only outdoors.

If you notice any undesirable
operating symptoms, try another
service station or switch to another
brand of gasoline.
For further important fuel-related
information for your vehicle, or
information on gasoline that does not
contain MMT, visit Owner Link at
owners.honda.com. In Canada, visit
www.honda.ca for additional
information on gasoline.

Gasoline is highly flammable
and explosive. You can be
burned or seriously injured
when handling fuel.
Stop the engine, and keep
heat, sparks, and flame away.
Wipe up spills immediately.

1. Park with the driver’s side closest
to the service station pump.
2. To open the fuel fill door, push
down on the lever located to the
left of the driver’s seat.
HOLDER
TETHER
FUEL FILL CAP

CONTINUED

297

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:21:11 31TA5630_303

Service Station Procedures
3. Remove the fuel fill cap slowly.
You may hear a hissing sound as
pressure inside the tank equalizes.
The fuel fill cap is attached to the
fuel filler with a tether. Place the
cap in the holder on the fuel fill
door.
4. Stop filling the tank after the fuel
nozzle automatically clicks off. Do
not try to ‘‘top off’’ the tank. This
leaves some room in the fuel tank
for the fuel to expand with
temperature changes.

5. Screw the fuel fill cap back on
until it clicks at least once. If you
do not properly tighten the cap,
you will see a ‘‘CHECK FUEL
CAP’’ message on the information
display. If the system still detects
an evaporative system leak after
retightening the cap, the
malfunction indicator lamp may
come on (see page 406 ).

Check Fuel Cap Message

6. Push the fuel fill door closed until
it latches.
Your vehicle’s onboard diagnostic
system will detect a loose or missing
fuel fill cap as an evaporative system
leak. The first time a leak is detected
a ‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’ message
appears on the information display.

If the fuel nozzle keeps clicking off
even though the tank is not full,
there may be a problem with your
vehicle’s fuel vapor recovery
system. The system helps keep
fuel vapor from going into the
atmosphere. Try filling at another
pump. If this does not fix the
problem, consult your dealer.

298

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:21:15 31TA5630_304

Service Station Procedures
Turn the engine off, and confirm the
fuel fill cap is installed. If it is, loosen
it, then retighten it until it clicks at
least once. The message should go
off after several days of normal
driving once you tighten or replace
the fuel fill cap. To scroll to another
display, press the select/reset knob.

Before Driving

The ‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’ message
will appear each time you restart the
engine until the system turns the
message off.

If the system still detects a leak in
your vehicle’s evaporative emissions
system, the malfunction indicator
lamp (MIL) comes on. If the fuel fill
cap was not already tightened, turn
the engine off, and check or
retighten the fuel fill cap until it
clicks at least once. The MIL should
go off after several days of normal
driving once the cap is tightened or
replaced. If the MIL does not go off,
have your vehicle inspected by a
dealer. For more information, see
page 406 .

299

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:21:21 31TA5630_305

Service Station Procedures
Opening and Closing the Hood

LATCH

HOOD RELEASE HANDLE

1. Park the vehicle, and set the
parking brake. Pull the hood
release handle located under the
lower left corner of the dashboard.
The hood will pop up slightly.

2. Reach in between the hood and
the front grille with your fingers.
The hood latch handle is above
the ‘‘H’’ logo. Push this handle up
until it releases the hood. Lift the
hood.

300

2011 Accord Sedan

If the hood latch handle moves stiffly,
or if you can open the hood without
lifting the handle, the mechanism
should be cleaned and lubricated.

10/06/18 16:21:28 31TA5630_306

Service Station Procedures
GRIP

To close the hood, lift it up slightly to
remove the support rod from the
hole. Put the support rod back into
its holding clip. Lower the hood to
about a foot (30 cm) above the
fender, then let it drop. Make sure it
is securely latched.

CLIP

V6 models

3. 4-cylinder models
Holding the grip, pull the support
rod out of its clip. Insert the end
into the hole in the hood
designated by an arrow.

V6 models

Lift the hood up most of the way.
The hydraulic supports will lift it
up the rest of the way and hold it
up.
To close the hood, lower it to
about a foot (30 cm) above the
fender, then press down firmly
with your hands. Make sure the
hood is securely latched.

301

2011 Accord Sedan

Before Driving

4-cylinder models

SUPPORT ROD

10/06/18 16:21:37 31TA5630_307

Service Station Procedures
Oil Check

UPPER MARK
LOWER MARK

4-cylinder models

DIPSTICK
(orange handle)

Wait a few minutes after turning the
engine off before you check the oil.
1. Remove the dipstick (orange
handle/loop).

V6 models

DIPSTICK
(orange loop)

2. Wipe off the dipstick with a clean
cloth or paper towel.
3. Insert the dipstick all the way back
into its hole.

4-cylinder models

4. Remove the dipstick again, and
check the level. It should be
between the upper and lower
marks.
If it is near or below the lower mark,
see Adding Engine Oil on page 352 .

302

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:21:44 31TA5630_308

Service Station Procedures
Engine Coolant Check

MAX

RESERVE TANK

MAX

V6 models
4-cylinder models

V6 models

MIN

Look at the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank. Make sure it is
between the MAX and MIN lines. If
it is below the MIN line, see Adding
Engine Coolant on page 356 for
information on adding the proper
coolant.

Refer to Owner’s Maintenance
Checks on page 348 for information
about checking other items on your
vehicle.

303

2011 Accord Sedan

Before Driving

UPPER MARK
LOWER MARK

10/06/18 16:21:53 31TA5630_309

Fuel Economy
Actual Mileage and EPA Fuel
Economy Estimates Comparison.
Fuel economy is not a fixed number.
It varies based on driving conditions,
driving habits, and vehicle condition.
Therefore, it is not possible for one
set of estimates to predict fuel
economy precisely for all drivers in
all environments.
The EPA fuel economy estimates
shown in the example to the right
are a useful tool for comparison
when buying a vehicle. EPA
estimates include:
City MPG − Represents urban
driving in light traffic. A range of
miles per gallon achieved is also
provided.
Highway MPG − Represents a
mixture of rural and interstate
driving, in a warmed-up vehicle,
typical of longer trips in free-flowing
traffic. A range of miles per gallon
achieved is also provided.

City MPG

Highway MPG

Combined Fuel
Economy

Estimated Annual
Fuel Cost
(Sample U.S. EPA label shown)

Combined Fuel Economy −
Represents a combination of city and
highway driving. The scale
represents the range of combined
fuel economy for other vehicles in
the class.
Estimated Annual Fuel Cost −
Provides an estimated annual fuel
cost, based on 15,000 miles (20,000
km) per year multiplied by the cost

304

2011 Accord Sedan

per gallon (based on EPA fuel cost
data) divided by the combined fuel
economy.
For more information on fuel
economy ratings and factors that
affect fuel economy, visit
www.fueleconomy.gov

(Canada: Visit www.vehicles.gc.ca ).

10/06/18 16:22:06 31TA5630_310

Fuel Economy

Improving Fuel Economy
Vehicle Maintenance

A properly maintained vehicle
maximizes fuel economy. Poor
maintenance can significantly reduce
fuel economy. Always maintain your
vehicle according to the maintenance
messages displayed on the
information display (see Owner’s
Maintenance Checks on page 348 ).
For example:

Use the recommended viscosity
motor oil, displaying the API
Certification Seal (see page
353).
Maintain proper tire inflation
− An underinflated tire increases
‘‘rolling resistance,’’ which reduces
fuel economy.
Avoid carrying excess weight in
your vehicle − It puts a heavier
load on the engine, increasing fuel
consumption.
Keep your vehicle clean − In
particular, a build-up of snow or
mud on your vehicle’s underside
adds weight and rolling resistance.
Frequent cleaning helps your fuel
economy.

Drive Efficiently

Drive moderately − Rapid
acceleration, abrupt cornering,
and hard braking increase fuel
consumption.
Observe the speed limit −
Aerodynamic drag has a big effect
on fuel economy at speeds above
45 mph (75 km/h). Reduce your
speed and you reduce the drag.
Trailers, car top carriers, roof
racks and bike racks are also big
contributors to increased drag.
Always drive in the highest gear
possible − If your vehicle has a
manual transmission, you can
boost your fuel economy by up
shifting as early as possible.
Avoid excessive idling − Idling
results in 0 miles per gallon (0 kms
per liter).

CONTINUED

305

2011 Accord Sedan

Before Driving

Fuel Economy Factors
The following factors can lower your
vehicle’s fuel economy:
Aggressive driving (hard
acceleration and braking)
Excessive idling, accelerating and
braking in stop-and-go traffic
Cold engine operation (engines
are more efficient when warmed
up)
Driving with a heavy load or the
air conditioner running
Improperly inflated tires

10/06/18 16:22:15 31TA5630_311

Fuel Economy
Minimize the use of the air
conditioning system − The A/C
puts an extra load on the engine
which makes it use more fuel. Use
the fresh-air ventilation when
possible.
Plan and combine trips −
Combine several short trips into
one. A warmed-up engine is more
fuel efficient than a cold one.

Checking Your Fuel Economy

Miles driven

Gallons of
fuel

Miles per
Gallon

100

Liter

Kilometers

Calculating Fuel Economy
Measuring Techniques

Direct calculation is the
recommended source of information
about your actual fuel economy.
Using frequency of fill-ups or taking
fuel gauge readings are NOT
accurate measures of fuel economy.
Fuel economy may improve over the
first several thousand miles
(kilometers).

1) Fill the fuel tank until the nozzle automatically clicks off.
2) Reset trip counter to zero.
3) Record the total gallons (liters) needed to refill.
4) Follow one of the simple calculations above.

306

2011 Accord Sedan

L per 100 km

10/06/18 16:22:24 31TA5630_312

Accessories and Modifications
Modifying your vehicle, or installing
some non-Honda accessories, can
make your vehicle unsafe. Before
you make any modifications or add
any accessories, be sure to read the
following information.

Although non-Honda accessories
may fit on your vehicle, they may not
meet factory specifications, and
could adversely affect your vehicle’s
handling, stability, and reliability.

Improper accessories or
modifications can affect your
vehicle’s handling, stability, and
performance, and cause a
crash in which you can be hurt
or killed.
Follow all instructions in this
owner’s manual regarding
accessories and modifications.
When properly installed, cellular
phones, alarms, two-way radios, and
low-powered audio systems should
not interfere with your vehicle’s
computer controlled systems, such
as your airbags, anti-lock brakes, and
tire pressure monitoring system.

Make sure the accessory does not
obscure any lights, or interfere
with proper vehicle operation or
performance.
Be sure electronic accessories do
not overload electrical circuits
(see page 408 ) or interfere with
the proper operation of your
vehicle.
Before installing any electronic
accessory, have the installer
contact your dealer for assistance.
If possible, have your dealer
inspect the final installation.
Do not install accessories on the
side pillars or across the rear
windows. Accessories installed in
these areas may interfere with
proper operation of the side
curtain airbags.

307

2011 Accord Sedan

Before Driving

Accessories
Your dealer has Honda accessories
that allow you to personalize your
vehicle. These accessories have
been designed and approved for your
vehicle, and are covered by warranty.

Before installing any accessory:

10/06/18 16:22:31 31TA5630_313

Accessories and Modifications
Modifying Your Vehicle
Removing parts from your vehicle,
or replacing components, with
non-Honda components could
seriously affect your vehicle’s
handling, stability, and reliability.

Non-Honda wheels, because they
are a universal design, can cause
excessive stress on suspension
components, and are not
compatible with the tire pressure
monitoring system (TPMS).

Here are some examples:

Larger or smaller wheels and tires
can interfere with the operation of
your vehicle’s anti-lock brakes and
other systems.

Lowering the vehicle with a nonHonda suspension kit that
significantly reduces ground
clearance can allow the
undercarriage to hit speed bumps
or other raised objects, which
could cause the airbags to deploy.
Raising your vehicle with a
non-Honda suspension kit can
affect the handling, stability, and
reliability.

Modifying your steering wheel or
any other part of your vehicle’s
safety features can make the
systems ineffective.
If you plan to modify your vehicle,
consult your dealer.

308

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:22:39 31TA5630_314

Carrying Cargo

CONSOLE COMPARTMENT
CENTER POCKETS

DOOR POCKETS

Your vehicle has several convenient
storage areas:
Glove box
Door and seat-back pockets
Center pockets
Console compartment

Roof-rack (if installed)
However, carrying too much cargo,
or improperly storing it, can affect
your vehicle’s handling, stability,
stopping distance, and tires, and
make it unsafe. Before carrying any
type of cargo, be sure to read the
following pages.
GLOVE BOX

TRUNK

SEAT-BACK POCKETS

309

2011 Accord Sedan

Before Driving

Trunk, including the rear seat
when folded down

10/06/18 16:22:50 31TA5630_315

Carrying Cargo
Load Limits
The maximum load for your vehicle
is 850 lbs (385 kg).
See Tire And Loading Information
label attached to the driver’s
doorjamb.
Label Example

This figure includes the total weight
of all occupants, cargo, and
accessories, and the tongue load if
you are towing a trailer.

Overloading or improper
loading can affect handling and
stability and cause a crash in
which you can be hurt or killed.
Follow all load limits and other
loading guidelines in this
manual.
Steps for Determining Correct Load
Limit −
(1)Locate the statement ‘‘The
combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX
kg or XXX lbs.’’ on your vehicle’s
placard.
(2)Determine the combined weight
of the driver and passengers that
will be riding in your vehicle.
(3)Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from
XXX kg or XXX lbs.

310

2011 Accord Sedan

(4)The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For
example, if the ‘‘XXX’’ amount
equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be
five 150 lb. passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available
cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs.
(1,400 − 750 (5 × 150) = 650 lbs.)
(5)Determine the combined weight
of luggage and cargo being loaded
on the vehicle. That weight may
not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
(6)If your vehicle will be towing a
trailer, load from your trailer will
be transferred to your vehicle.
Consult this manual to determine
how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of
your vehicle.

10/06/18 16:22:56 31TA5630_316

Carrying Cargo

Example 1
Passenger Weight
150 lbs x 2 = 300 lbs
(68 kg x 2 = 136 kg)

Cargo Weight
550 lbs
(249 kg)

Max Load 850 lbs
(385 kg)

Passenger Weight
150 lbs x 4 = 600 lbs
(68 kg x 4 = 272 kg)

Cargo Weight
250 lbs
(113 kg)

Max Load 850 lbs
(385 kg)

Passenger Weight
150 lbs x 5 = 750 lbs
(68 kg x 5 = 340 kg)

Cargo Weight
100 lbs
(45 kg)

Before Driving

Max Load 850 lbs
(385 kg)

In addition, the total weight of the
vehicle, all occupants, accessories,
cargo, and trailer tongue load must
not exceed the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). Both
are on a label on the driver’s
doorjamb.

Example 2

Example 3

311

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:23:03 31TA5630_317

Carrying Cargo
Carrying Items in the Passenger
Compartment
Store or secure all items that could
be thrown around and hurt
someone during a crash.

Keep the glove box closed while
driving. If it is open, a passenger
could injure their knees during a
crash or sudden stop.

Carrying Cargo in the Trunk
Distribute cargo evenly on the
floor of the trunk, placing the
heaviest items on the bottom and
as far forward as possible.

Do not put any items on top of the
trunk panel. They can block your
view and be thrown around the
vehicle during a crash.

If you fold down the back seat, tie
down items that could be thrown
about the vehicle during a crash or
sudden stop.

Be sure items placed on the floor
behind the front seats cannot roll
under the seats and interfere with
the driver’s ability to operate the
pedals, the operation of the seats,
or the operation of the sensors
under the seats.

If you carry large items that
prevent you from closing the trunk
lid, exhaust gas can enter the
passenger area. To avoid the
possibility of carbon monoxide
poisoning, follow the instructions
on page 51 .

Keep all cargo below the bottom
of the windows. If it is higher, it
could interfere with the proper
operation of the side curtain
airbags.

312

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:23:08 31TA5630_318

Carrying Cargo
Cargo Net
Optional

The cargo net can be used to help
hold down items stored in the trunk.

Before Driving

313

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:23:10 31TA5630_319

314

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:23:13 31TA5630_320

Driving
This section gives you tips on
starting the engine under various
conditions, and how to operate the
manual and automatic transmissions.
It also includes important
information on parking your vehicle,
the braking system, the vehicle
stability assist (VSA ) system, the
tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS), and facts you need if you
are planning to tow a trailer.

315

2011 Accord Sedan

Driving

Preparing to Drive ......................... 316
Starting the Engine........................ 317
Manual Transmission.................... 318
Automatic Transmission............... 320
Parking ............................................ 325
Braking System.............................. 326
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) ................ 327
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA ),
aka Electronic Stability Control
(ESC), System........................ 329
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) ......................... 331
Towing a Trailer ............................ 334

10/06/18 16:23:24 31TA5630_321

Preparing to Drive
You should do the following checks
and adjustments before you drive
your vehicle.
1. Make sure all windows, mirrors,
and outside lights are clean and
unobstructed. Remove frost, snow,
or ice.

6. On models with power adjustable
seats

Check the seat adjustment (see
page 92 ).
On models with manual adjustable
seats

Check the seat adjustment (see
page 93 ).

2. Check that the hood is fully closed.
3. Check that the trunk is fully
closed.
4. Visually check the tires. If a tire
looks low, use a gauge to check its
pressure.
5. Check that any items you may be
carrying are stored properly or
fastened down securely.

7. Check the adjustment of the
inside and outside mirrors (see
pages 104 and 105 ).
8. Check the steering wheel
adjustment (see page 75 ).
9. Make sure the doors are securely
closed and locked.
10. Fasten your seat belt. Check that
your passengers have fastened
their seat belts (see page 14 ).

316

2011 Accord Sedan

11.When you start the engine, check
the gauges and indicators in the
instrument panel (see page 55 ).

10/06/18 16:23:31 31TA5630_322

Starting the Engine
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. In cold weather, turn off all
electrical accessories to reduce
the drain on the battery.
3. Manual transmission:
Press the clutch pedal down all the
way. The START (III) position
does not function unless the clutch
pedal is pressed.
Make sure the shift lever is in
Park. Press on the brake pedal.

The engine is harder to start in cold
weather. Also, the thinner air f ound at
altitudes above 8,000 f eet (2,400
meters) adds to this problem.

The immobilizer system protects your
vehicle f rom thef t. If an improperly
coded key (or other device) is used, the
engine’s f uel system is disabled. For
more inf ormation, see page 77 .

Driving

Automatic transmission:

4. Without touching the accelerator
pedal, turn the ignition key to the
START (III) position. Do not hold
the key in the START (III)
position for more than 15 seconds
at a time. If the engine does not
start right away, pause for at least
10 seconds before trying again.

317

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:23:37 31TA5630_323

Manual Transmission
When shifting up or down, make
sure you push the clutch pedal down
all the way, shift to the next gear,
and let the pedal up gradually. When
you are not shifting, do not rest your
foot on the clutch pedal. This can
cause your clutch to wear out faster.

The manual transmission is
synchronized in all forward gears for
smooth operation. It has a lockout so
you cannot shift directly from fifth to
reverse.

Come to a full stop before you shift
into reverse. You can damage the
transmission by trying to shift into
reverse with the vehicle moving.
Push down the clutch pedal, and
pause for a few seconds before
shifting into reverse, or shift into one
of the forward gears for a moment.
This stops the gears so they won’t
‘‘grind.’’

When slowing down, you can get
extra braking from the engine by
shifting to a lower gear. This extra
braking can help you maintain a safe
speed and prevent your brakes from
overheating while going down a
steep hill. Before downshifting,
make sure the engine speed will not
go into the tachometer’s red zone in
the lower gear.

Rapid slowing or speeding up
can cause loss of control on
slippery surfaces. If you crash,
you can be injured.
Use extra care when driving on
slippery surfaces.

318

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:23:42 31TA5630_324

Manual Transmission
Recommended Shift Points
Drive in the highest gear that lets
the engine run and accelerate
smoothly. This will give you good
fuel economy and effective
emissions control. The following
shift points are recommended:
Normal acceleration

1st to 2nd
2nd to 3rd
3rd to 4th
4th to 5th

15 mph (24 km/h)
28 mph (45 km/h)
41 mph (66 km/h)
52 mph (84 km/h)

Before downshifting, make sure the
engine will not go into the
tachometer’s red zone.

Driving

Shift up

Engine Speed Limiter
If you exceed the maximum speed
for the gear you are in, the engine
speed will enter into the tachometer’s
red zone. If this occurs, you may feel
the engine cut in and out. This is
caused by a limiter in the engine’s
computer controls. The engine will
run normally when you reduce the
rpm below the red zone.

319

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:23:48 31TA5630_325

Automatic Transmission
Shift Lever Position Indicators

The ‘‘D’’ indicator comes on for a
few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. If it flashes while driving (in
any shift position), it indicates a
possible problem in the transmission.
If the malfunction indicator lamp
comes on along with the ‘‘D’’
indicator, there is a problem with the
automatic transmission control
system. Avoid rapid acceleration, and
have the transmission checked by
your dealer as soon as possible.

These indicators between the
tachometer and speedometer show
which position the shift lever is in.

Shifting
SHIFT LEVER

RELEASE BUTTON

To shift from Park to any position,
press firmly on the brake pedal, and
press the release button on the front
of the shift lever, then move the
lever. You cannot shift out of Park
when the ignition switch is in the
LOCK (0) or ACCESSORY (I)
position.

320

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:23:54 31TA5630_326

Automatic Transmission
To shift from:
P to R

Press the shift lever release
button.

Move the shift lever.

Park (P) − This position mechanically locks the transmission. Use
Park whenever you are turning off or
starting the engine. To shift out of
Park, you must press on the brake
pedal and have your foot off the
accelerator pedal. Press the release
button on the front of the shift lever
to move it.
If you have done all of the above and
still cannot move the lever out of
Park, see Shift Lock Release on
page 323 .
You must also press the release
button to shift into Park. To avoid
transmission damage, come to a
complete stop before shifting into
Park. The shift lever must be in Park
before you can remove the key from
the ignition switch.

Reverse (R) − Press the brake
pedal and the release button on the
front of the shift lever to shift from
Park to reverse. To shift from
reverse to neutral, come to a
complete stop, and then shift. Press
the release button before shifting
into reverse from neutral.
Neutral (N) − Use neutral if you
need to restart a stalled engine, or if
it is necessary to stop briefly with
the engine idling. Shift to the Park
position if you need to leave your
vehicle for any reason. Press on the
brake pedal when you are moving
the shift lever from neutral to
another gear.

CONTINUED

321

2011 Accord Sedan

Driving

R to P
N to R
D to D3
D3 to 2
2 to 1
1 to 2
2 to D3
D3 to D
D to N
N to D
R to N

Do this:
Press the brake pedal and
press the shift lever release
button.

10/06/18 16:24:01 31TA5630_327

Automatic Transmission
Drive (D) − Use this position for
your normal driving. The
transmission automatically selects a
suitable gear (1 through 5) for your
speed and acceleration. You may
notice the transmission shifting up at
higher engine speeds when the
engine is cold. This helps the engine
warm up faster.
Drive (D3) − To shift from D to D3,
press the shift lever release button.
This position is similar to D, except
only the first three gears are
selected. Use D3 when towing a
trailer in hilly terrain, or to provide
engine braking when going down a
steep hill. D3 can also keep the
transmission from cycling between
third and fourth gears in stop-and-go
driving.

Second (2) − To shift to second,
press the release button on the front
of the shift lever. This position locks
the transmission in second gear. It
does not downshift to first gear
when you come to a stop.
Use second gear:
For more power when climbing.
To increase engine braking when
going down steep hills.
For starting out on a slippery
surface or in deep snow.
To help reduce wheel spin.
When driving downhill with a
trailer.

322

2011 Accord Sedan

First (1) − To shift from second to
first, press the release button on the
front of the shift lever. This position
locks the transmission in first gear.
By upshifting and downshifting
through 1, 2, D3, and D, you can
operate this transmission much like
a manual transmission without a
clutch pedal.

10/06/18 16:24:10 31TA5630_328

Automatic Transmission
Engine Speed Limiter
If you exceed the maximum speed
for the gear you are in, the engine
speed will enter into the tachometer’s
red zone. If this occurs, you may feel
the engine cut in and out. This is
caused by a limiter in the engine’s
computer controls. The engine will
run normally when you reduce the
rpm below the red zone.

Shift Lock Release
This allows you to move the shift
lever out of Park if the normal
method of pushing on the brake
pedal and pressing the release
button does not work.

COVER

1. Set the parking brake.
2. Remove the key from the ignition
switch.

4. Insert the key in the shift lock
release slot.

CONTINUED

323

2011 Accord Sedan

Driving

3. Put a cloth on the edge of the shift
lock release slot cover to prevent
scratches. Use a small flat-tip
screwdriver or metal fingernail file
to carefully pry up the edge of the
cover and remove it from the slot.

10/06/18 16:24:14 31TA5630_329

Automatic Transmission
RELEASE BUTTON

SHIFT LOCK RELEASE SLOT

6. Remove the key from the shift
lock release slot, then reinstall the
cover. Make sure the notch on the
cover is on the right side. Insert
the key into the ignition switch,
press the brake pedal, and restart
the engine.
If you need to use the shift lock
release, it means your vehicle is
developing a problem. Have it
checked by your dealer.

5. Push down on the key while you
press the release button on the
front of the shift lever and move
the shift lever out of Park to
neutral.

324

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:24:22 31TA5630_330

Parking
Always use the parking brake when
you park your vehicle. Make sure
the parking brake is set firmly, or
your vehicle may roll if it is parked
on an incline.

Turn off the lights.
Place any packages, valuables, etc.,
in the trunk or take them with you.
Lock the doors.
Except LX

Check the indicator on the
instrument panel to verify that the
security system is set.

If the vehicle is facing uphill, turn
the front wheels away from the
curb. If your vehicle has a manual
transmission, put it in first gear.
If the vehicle is facing downhill,
turn the front wheels toward the
curb. If your vehicle has a manual
transmission, put it in reverse gear.
Make sure the parking brake is
fully released before driving away.
Driving with the parking brake
partially set can overheat or
damage the rear brakes.

Never park over dry leaves, tall
grass, or other flammable
materials. The hot three way
catalytic converter could cause
these materials to catch on fire.

325

2011 Accord Sedan

Driving

If your vehicle has an automatic
transmission, set the parking brake
before you put the transmission in
Park. This keeps the vehicle from
moving and putting pressure on the
parking mechanism in the
transmission.

Parking Tips
Make sure the moonroof (if
equipped) and the windows are
closed.

10/06/18 16:24:30 31TA5630_331

Braking System
Your vehicle is equipped with disc
brakes at all four wheels. A power
assist helps reduce the effort needed
on the brake pedal. The emergency
brake assist system increases the
stopping force when you depress the
brake pedal hard in an emergency
situation. The anti-lock brake system
(ABS) helps you retain steering
control when braking very hard.
Resting your foot on the pedal keeps
the brakes applied lightly, builds up
heat, reduces their effectiveness and
reduces brake pad life. In addition,
fuel economy can be reduced. It also
keeps your brake lights on all the
time, confusing drivers behind you.

Constant application of the brakes
when going down a long hill builds
up heat and reduces their effectiveness. Use the engine to assist the
brakes by taking your foot off the
accelerator and downshifting to a
lower gear.
Check the brakes after driving
through deep water. Apply the
brakes moderately to see if they feel
normal. If not, apply them gently and
frequently until they do. Be extra
cautious in your driving.

Braking System Design
The hydraulic system that operates
the brakes has two separate circuits.
Each circuit works diagonally across
the vehicle (the left-front brake is
connected with the right-rear brake,
etc.). If one circuit should develop a
problem, you will still have braking
at two wheels.
Brake Pad Wear Indicators
The front and rear disc brakes on all
models have audible brake pad wear
indicators.
If the brake pads need replacing, you
will hear a distinctive, metallic
screeching sound when you apply
the brake pedal. If you do not have
the brake pads replaced, they will
screech all the time. It is normal for
the brakes to occasionally squeal or
squeak when you apply them.

326

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:24:36 31TA5630_332

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
The anti-lock brake system (ABS)
helps prevent the wheels from
locking up, and helps you retain
steering control by pumping the
brakes rapidly, much faster than a
person can do it.

ABS Indicator
If this indicator comes on, the antilock function of the braking system
has shut down. The brakes still work
like a conventional system, but
without anti-lock. You should have
your dealer inspect your vehicle as
soon as possible.
If the ABS indicator comes on while
driving, test the brakes as shown on
page 407 .

You should never pump the brake pedal.

Let the ABS work for you by always
keeping firm, steady pressure on the
brake pedal. This is sometimes
referred to as ‘‘stomp and steer.’’

CONTINUED

327

2011 Accord Sedan

Driving

The electronic brake distribution
(EBD) system, which is part of the
ABS, also balances the front-to-rear
braking distribution according to
vehicle loading.

You will feel a pulsation in the brake
pedal when the ABS activates, and
you may hear some noise. This is
normal: it is the ABS rapidly
pumping the brakes. On dry
pavement, you will need to press on
the brake pedal very hard before the
ABS activates. However, you may
feel the ABS activate immediately if
you are trying to stop on snow or ice.

10/06/18 16:24:42 31TA5630_333

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
If the ABS indicator and the brake
system indicator come on together,
and the parking brake is fully
released, the EBD system may also
be shut down.
Test your brakes as instructed on
page 407 . If the brakes feel normal,
drive slowly and have your vehicle
repaired by your dealer as soon as
possible. Avoid sudden hard braking
which could cause the rear wheels to
lock up and possibly lead to a loss of
control.

Important Safety Reminders

ABS does not reduce the time or
distance it takes to stop the
vehicle. It only helps with the
steering control during braking.
ABS will not prevent a skid that
results from changing direction
abruptly, such as trying to take a
corner too fast or making a sudden
lane change. Always drive at a safe
speed for the road and weather
conditions.
ABS cannot prevent a loss of
stability. Always steer moderately
when you are braking hard. Severe
or sharp steering wheel movement
can still cause your vehicle to veer
into oncoming traffic or off the road.

328

2011 Accord Sedan

A vehicle with ABS may require a
longer distance to stop on loose
or uneven surfaces, such as gravel
or snow, than a vehicle without
anti-lock.

10/06/18 16:24:51 31TA5630_334

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA ), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System
The vehicle stability assist (VSA)
system helps to stabilize the vehicle
during cornering if the vehicle turns
more or less than desired. It also
assists you in maintaining traction
while accelerating on loose or
slippery road surfaces. It does this
by regulating the engine’s output and
by selectively applying the brakes.

The VSA system cannot enhance the
vehicle’s driving stability in all
situations and does not control your
vehicle’s entire braking system. It is
still your responsibility to drive and
corner at reasonable speeds and to
leave a sufficient margin of safety.

When VSA is off, the VSA off
indicator comes on as a reminder.
Vehicle Stability Assist
(VSA) System Indicator
When VSA activates, you will see the
VSA system indicator blink.
If this indicator comes on while
driving, pull to the side of the road
when it is safe, and turn off the
engine. Reset the system by
restarting the engine. If the VSA
system indicator stays on or comes
back on while driving, have the VSA
system inspected by your dealer.

If the low tire pressure indicator or
TPMS indicator comes on, the VSA
system automatically turns on even if
the VSA system is turned off by
pressing the VSA OFF switch (see
page 330 ). If this happens, you
cannot turn the VSA system off by
pressing the VSA OFF switch again.
Without VSA, your vehicle will have
normal braking and cornering ability,
but it will not have VSA traction and
stability enhancement.

NOTE: The main function of the
VSA system is generally known as
Electronic Stability Control (ESC).
The system also includes a traction
control function.

329

2011 Accord Sedan

Driving

When VSA activates, you may notice
that the engine does not respond to
the accelerator in the same way it
does at other times. There may also
be some noise from the VSA
hydraulic system. You will also see
the VSA system indicator blink.

VSA Off Indicator

10/06/18 16:25:00 31TA5630_335

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA ), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System
VSA OFF Switch
VSA OFF SWITCH

This switch is under the driver’s side
vent. To turn the VSA system on and
off, press and hold it until you hear
a beep.
When VSA is off, the VSA off
indicator comes on as a reminder.
Press and hold the switch again. It
turns the system back on.

VSA is turned on every time you
start the engine, even if you turned
it off the last time you drove
the vehicle.
In certain unusual conditions when
your vehicle gets stuck in shallow
mud or fresh snow, it may be easier
to free it with the VSA temporarily
switched off. When the VSA system
is off, the traction control system is
also off. You should only attempt to
free your vehicle with the VSA off if
you are not able to free it when the
VSA is on.
Immediately after freeing your
vehicle, be sure to switch the VSA on
again. We do not recommend driving
your vehicle with the VSA and
traction control systems switched off.

330

2011 Accord Sedan

VSA and Tire Sizes
Driving with varying tire or wheel
sizes may cause the VSA to
malfunction. When replacing tires,
make sure they are of the same size
and type as your original tires (see
page 385 ).
If you install winter tires, make
sure they are the same size as
those that were originally
supplied with your vehicle.
Exercise the same caution
during winter driving as you
would if your vehicle was not
equipped with VSA.

10/06/18 16:25:08 31TA5630_336

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Your vehicle is equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that turns on every time you start the
engine and monitors the pressure in
your tires while driving.

If you think you can safely drive a
short distance to a service station,
proceed slowly, and inflate the tire to
the recommended pressure shown
on the driver’s doorjamb.

Driving on a significantly under
inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Underinflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
Because tire pressure varies by
temperature and other conditions,
the low tire pressure indicator may
come on unexpectedly.

If the tire is flat, or if the tire
pressure is too low to continue
driving, replace the tire with the
compact spare tire (see page 392 ).
If you cannot make the low tire
pressure indicator go out after
inflating the tires to the specified
values, have your dealer check the
system as soon as possible.

CONTINUED

331

2011 Accord Sedan

Driving

Each tire has its own pressure
sensor (not including the spare tire).
If the air pressure of a tire becomes
significantly low while driving, the
sensor in that tire immediately sends
a signal that causes the low tire
pressure indicator to come on.

Low Tire Pressure
Indicator
When the low tire pressure indicator
is on, one or more of your tires is
significantly underinflated. You
should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them to
the proper pressure as indicated on
the vehicle’s tire information placard.

10/06/18 16:25:15 31TA5630_337

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
For example, if you check and fill
your tires in a warm area, then drive
in extremely cold weather, the tire
pressure will be lower than
measured and could be underinflated
and cause the low tire pressure
indicator to come on. Or, if you
check and adjust your tire pressure
in cooler conditions, and drive into
extremely hot conditions, the tire
may become overinflated. However,
the low tire pressure indicator will
not come on if the tires are
overinflated.
Refer to page 380 for tire inflation
guidelines.
Although your tire pressure is
monitored, you must manually check
the tire pressures monthly.

information label and in the owner’s
manual (see page 381 ).
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) Indicator
This indicator comes on and stays on
if there is a problem with the tire
pressure monitoring system.
If this happens, the system will shut
off and no longer monitor tire
pressures. Have the system checked
by your dealer as soon as possible.
If the low tire pressure indicator or
TPMS indicator comes on, the VSA
system automatically turns on even if
the VSA system is turned off by
pressing the VSA OFF switch (see
page 330 ). If this happens, you
cannot turn the VSA system off by
pressing the VSA OFF switch again.

Each tire, including the spare, should
be checked monthly when cold, and
set to the recommended inflation
pressure as specified on the tire

332

2011 Accord Sedan

When you restart the vehicle with
the compact spare tire, the TPMS
indicator may also come on and stay
on after driving several miles
(kilometers).

10/06/18 16:25:23 31TA5630_338

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Changing a Tire with TPMS
If you have a flat tire, the low tire
pressure indicator will come on.
Replace the flat tire with the
compact spare tire (see page 392 ).

Never use a puncture-repairing agent
in a flat tire. If used, you will have to
replace the tire pressure sensor.
Have the flat tire repaired by your
dealer as soon as possible.

After you replace the flat tire with
the compact spare tire, the low tire
pressure indicator stays on. This is
normal; the system is not monitoring
the spare tire pressure. Manually
check the spare tire pressure to be
sure it is correct. After several miles
(kilometers) driving with the
compact spare tire, the TPMS
indicator comes on and the low tire
pressure indicator goes off.

333

2011 Accord Sedan

Driving

Each wheel (except the compact
spare tire wheel) is equipped with a
tire pressure sensor. You must use
TPMS specific wheels. It is
recommended that you always have
your tires serviced by your dealer or
qualified technician.

The low tire pressure indicator or
the TPMS indicator will go off, after
several miles (kilometers) driving,
when you replace the spare tire with
the specified regular tire equipped
with the tire pressure monitor sensor.

10/06/18 16:25:29 31TA5630_339

Towing a Trailer
Your vehicle has been designed
primarily to carry passengers and
their cargo. You can also use it to
tow a trailer if you carefully observe
the load limits, use the proper
equipment, and follow the guidelines
in this section.
Break-In Period

Avoid towing a trailer during your
vehicle’s first 600 miles (1,000 km)
(see page 296 ).

Load Limits
Exceeding any load limit or
improperly loading your vehicle
and trailer can cause a crash in
which you can be seriously hurt
or killed.
Check the loading of your
vehicle and trailer carefully
before starting to drive.

Total Trailer Weight: The
maximum allowable weight of the
trailer and everything in or on it
must not exceed 1,000 lbs (450 kg).
Towing a load that is too heavy
can seriously affect your vehicle’s
handling and performance. It can
also damage the engine and
drivetrain.

334

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:25:36 31TA5630_340

Towing a Trailer
To achieve a proper tongue load,
start by loading 60% of the load
toward the front of the trailer and
40% toward the rear, then re-adjust
the load as needed.

SE:

1,970 kg
EX and EX-L:

2,030 kg
V6 models:

2,090 kg

Driving

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR):
The maximum allowable weight of
the vehicle, all occupants, all
accessories, all cargo, and the
tongue load is:

Canadian models

U.S. models
Tongue Load: The weight that the
tongue of a fully-loaded trailer puts
on the hitch should be approximately
10% of the total trailer weight. Too
much tongue load reduces front-tire
traction and steering control. Too
little tongue load can make the
trailer unstable and cause it to sway.

LX, LX-P and SE:

4,299 lbs (1,950 kg)
EX and EX-L:

4,431 lbs (2,010 kg)
V6 models:

4,575 lbs (2,075 kg)

CONTINUED

335

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:25:45 31TA5630_341

Towing a Trailer
Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR):
The maximum allowable weight at
the vehicle axles is:
U.S. models
LX, LX-P and SE:

2,337 lbs (1,060 kg)
on the front axle
2,017 lbs (915 kg)
on the rear axle
EX and EX-L:

2,403 lbs (1,090 kg)
on the front axle
2,061 lbs (935 kg)
on the rear axle
V6 models:

Canadian models
SE:

1,065 kg
on the front axle
920 kg
on the rear axle
EX and EX-L:

1,095 kg
on the front axle
950 kg
on the rear axle
V6 models:

1,175 kg
on the front axle
950 kg
on the rear axle

2,557 lbs (1,160 kg)
on the front axle
2,061 lbs (935 kg)
on the rear axle

336

2011 Accord Sedan

Checking Loads
The best way to confirm that all
loads are within limits is to check
them at a public scale. For public
scales in your area, check your local
phone book, or contact your trailer
dealer or rental agency for
assistance.
If you cannot get to a public scale,
you can estimate the total trailer
weight by adding the weight of your
trailer (as quoted by the
manufacturer) with everything in or
on the trailer.
If you normally pull the same load
each time you tow a trailer, you can
use a suitable scale or a special
tongue load gauge to check the
tongue load the first time you set up
a towing combination (a fully loaded
vehicle and trailer), then recheck the
tongue load whenever the conditions
change.

10/06/18 16:25:54 31TA5630_342

Towing a Trailer
Towing Equipment and
Accessories
Towing can require a variety of
equipment, depending on the size of
your trailer, how it will be used, how
much load you are towing, and
where you tow.

Trailer Brakes

There are two common types of
trailer brakes: surge and electric.
Surge brakes are common for boat
trailers, since the brakes will get wet.

Safety Chains

Always use safety chains when you
tow a trailer. Make sure the chains
are secured to the trailer and hitch,
and that they cross under the tongue
and can catch the trailer if it
becomes unhitched. Leave enough
slack to allow the trailer to turn
corners easily, but do not let the
chains drag on the ground.

If you choose electric brakes, be
sure they are electronically actuated.
Do not attempt to tap into your
vehicle’s hydraulic system. No
matter how successful it may seem,
any attempt to attach trailer brakes
to your vehicle’s hydraulic system
will lower braking effectiveness and
create a potential hazard.
See your trailer dealer or rental
agency for more information on
installing electric brakes.

CONTINUED

337

2011 Accord Sedan

Driving

Discuss your needs with your trailer
sales or rental agency, and follow the
guidelines in this section. Also make
sure that all equipment is properly
installed and maintained, and that it
meets federal, state, province,
territory, and local regulations.

Hitches

Any hitch used on your vehicle must
be properly bolted to the underbody.

10/06/18 16:26:03 31TA5630_343

Towing a Trailer
Trailer Lights

Additional Towing Equipment

Trailer lights and equipment must
comply with federal, state, province,
territory, and local regulations.
Check with your local trailer sales or
rental agencies for the requirements
in the area where you plan to tow,
and use only equipment designed for
your vehicle.

Many states and Canadian
provinces/territories require special
outside mirrors when towing a trailer.
Even if they don’t, you should install
special mirrors if you cannot clearly
see behind you, or if the trailer
creates a blind spot.

Since lighting and wiring vary by
trailer type and brand, you should
have a qualified technician install a
suitable connector between the
vehicle and the trailer. Improper
equipment or installation can cause
damage to your vehicle’s electrical
system and affect your vehicle
warranty.

Ask your trailer sales or rental
agency if any other items are
recommended or required for your
towing situation.

Pre-Tow Checklist
When preparing to tow, and before
driving away, be sure to check the
following:
The vehicle has been properly
serviced, and the suspension and
the cooling system are in good
operating condition.
The trailer has been properly
serviced and is in good condition.
All weights and loads are within
limits.
The hitch, safety chains, and any
other attachments are secure.
All items in or on the trailer are
properly secured and cannot shift
while you drive.

338

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:26:11 31TA5630_344

Towing a Trailer
The lights and brakes on your
vehicle and the trailer are working
properly.
Your vehicle tires and spare are
properly inflated, and the trailer
tires and spare are inflated as
recommended by the trailer
maker.

Driving Safely With a Trailer
The added weight, length, and
height of a trailer will affect your
vehicle’s handling and performance,
so driving with a trailer requires
some special driving skills and
techniques.

Towing Speeds and Gears

Drive slower than normal in all
driving situations, and obey posted
speed limits for vehicles with trailers.
If you have an automatic
transmission, use the D position
when towing a trailer on level roads.
D3 is the proper shift lever position
to use when towing a trailer in hilly
terrain. (See ‘‘Driving on Hills’’ in the
next column for additional gear
information.)

Driving on Hills

When climbing hills, closely watch
your temperature gauge. If it nears
the red (Hot) mark, turn the air
conditioning off, reduce speed and, if
necessary, pull to the side of the
road to let the engine cool.
If the automatic transmission shifts
frequently while going up a hill, shift
to D3.

CONTINUED

339

2011 Accord Sedan

Driving

For your safety and the safety of
others, take time to practice driving
maneuvers before heading for the
open road, and follow the guidelines
in this section.

Making Turns and Braking

Make turns more slowly and wider
than normal. The trailer tracks a
smaller arc than your vehicle, and it
can hit or run over something the
vehicle misses. Allow more time and
distance for braking. Do not brake or
turn suddenly as this could cause the
trailer to jackknife or turn over.

10/06/18 16:26:19 31TA5630_345

Towing a Trailer
When driving down hills, reduce
your speed, and shift down to second
gear. Do not ‘‘ride’’ the brakes, and
remember, it will take longer to slow
down and stop when towing a trailer.
If you must stop when facing uphill,
use the foot brake or parking brake.
Do not try to hold the vehicle in
place by pressing on the accelerator,
as this can cause the automatic
transmission to overheat.
Handling Crosswinds and Buffeting

Crosswinds and air turbulence
caused by passing trucks can disrupt
your steering and cause the trailer to
sway. When being passed by a large
vehicle, keep a constant speed, and
steer straight ahead. Do not try to
make quick steering or braking
corrections.

Backing Up

Always drive slowly and have
someone guide you when backing up.
Grip the bottom of the steering wheel,
then turn the wheel to the left to get
the trailer to move to the left. Turn
the wheel to the right to move the
trailer to the right.
Parking

Follow all normal precautions when
parking, including firmly setting the
parking brake and putting the
transmission in Park (automatic) or
in 1st or reverse (manual). Also,
place wheel chocks at each of the
trailer’s tires.

340

2011 Accord Sedan

Towing Your Vehicle
Your vehicle is not designed to be
towed behind a motor home. If your
vehicle needs to be towed in an
emergency, see page 415 .

10/06/18 16:26:24 31TA5630_346

Maintenance
This section explains why it is
important to keep your vehicle well
maintained and how to follow basic
maintenance safety precautions.
This section also includes
instructions on how to read the
Maintenance Minder messages on
the information display, and
instructions for simple maintenance
tasks you may want to take care of
yourself.

U.S. Vehicles:
Maintenance, replacement, or
repair of emissions control
devices and systems may be done
by any automotive repair
establishment or individual using
parts that are ‘‘certified’’ to EPA
standards.

341

2011 Accord Sedan

Maintenance

If you have the skills and tools to
perform more complex maintenance
tasks on your vehicle, you may want
to purchase the service manual. See
page 439 for information on how to
obtain a copy, or see your dealer.

Maintenance Safety ....................... 342
Maintenance MinderTM.................. 343
Fluid Locations............................... 350
Adding Engine Oil ......................... 352
Changing the Engine Oil and
Filter ............................................ 354
Engine Coolant ............................... 356
Windshield Washers ..................... 358
Transmission Fluid ........................ 359
Automatic Transmission........... 359
Manual Transmission ............... 361
Brake and Clutch Fluid ................. 362
Brake Fluid ................................. 362
Clutch Fluid ................................ 363
Power Steering Fluid ..................... 363
Timing Belt ..................................... 364
Lights .............................................. 365
Cleaning the Seat Belts ................. 375
Floor Mats ...................................... 375
Dust and Pollen Filter ................... 376
Wiper Blades .................................. 377
Tires ................................................ 380
Checking the Battery .................... 388
Vehicle Storage .............................. 389
Interior Care ................................... 390

10/06/18 16:26:34 31TA5630_347

Maintenance Safety
All service items not detailed in this
section should be performed by a
certified technician or other qualified
mechanic.
Important Safety Precautions
To eliminate potential hazards, read
the instructions before you begin,
and make sure you have the tools
and skills required.
Make sure your vehicle is parked
on level ground, the parking brake
is set, and the engine is off.
To clean parts, use a commercially
available degreaser or parts
cleaner, not gasoline.
To reduce the possibility of fire or
explosion, keep cigarettes, sparks,
and flames away from the battery
and all fuel-related parts.
Wear eye protection and
protective clothing when working
with the battery or compressed air.

Improperly maintaining this
vehicle, or failing to correct a
problem before driving can
cause a crash in which you can
be seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the inspection
and maintenance
recommendations and
schedules in this owner’s
manual.
Potential Vehicle Hazards
Carbon Monoxide poison
from engine exhaust. Be sure
there is adequate ventilation
whenever you operate the
engine.
Burns from hot parts. Let the
engine and exhaust system cool
down before touching any parts.

342

2011 Accord Sedan

Injury from moving parts. Do
not run the engine unless
instructed to do so.

Failure to properly follow
maintenance instructions and
precautions can cause you to
be seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the procedures
and precautions in this owner’s
manual.
Some of the most important safety
precautions are given here. However,
we cannot warn you of every
conceivable hazard that can arise in
performing maintenance. Only you
can decide whether or not you
should perform a given task.

10/06/18 16:26:42 31TA5630_348

Maintenance MinderTM
Your vehicle displays engine oil life
and maintenance service items on
the information display to show you
when you should have your dealer do
engine oil replacement and indicated
maintenance service.
Based on the engine operating
conditions, the onboard computer in
your vehicle calculates the remaining
engine oil life and displays it as a
percentage.

Engine Oil Life Display
SELECT/RESET KNOB

ENGINE OIL LIFE INDICATOR
U.S. model is shown.

Calculated
Engine Oil Life (%)
100 % − 91 %
90 % − 81 %
80 % − 71 %
70 % − 61 %
60 % − 51 %
50 % − 41 %
40 % − 31 %
30 % − 21 %
20 % − 16 %
15 % − 11 %
10 % − 6 %
5%−1%
0%

Displayed
Engine Oil Life (%)
100 %
90 %
80 %
70 %
60 %
50 %
40 %
30 %
20 %
15 %
10 %
5%
0%

CONTINUED

343

2011 Accord Sedan

Maintenance

To see the current engine oil life,
turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position, then press and release
the select/reset knob repeatedly
until the engine oil life indicator
appears (see page 64 ).

The remaining engine oil life is
shown on the display according to
this table:

10/06/18 16:26:49 31TA5630_349

Maintenance MinderTM
MAINTENANCE MINDER INDICATOR

ENGINE OIL LIFE INDICATOR
MAINTENANCE ITEM CODE(S)
U.S. model is shown.

If the remaining engine oil life is 15
to 6 percent, you will see the engine
oil life indicator every time you turn
the ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. The Maintenance Minder
indicator will also come on, and the
maintenance item code(s) for other
scheduled maintenance items
needing service will be displayed
next to the engine oil life indicator.

The 15 and 10 percent oil life
indicators remind you that your
vehicle will soon be due for
scheduled maintenance.

344

2011 Accord Sedan

When the remaining engine oil life is
5 to 1 percent, you will see a
‘‘SERVICE’’ message along with the
same maintenance item code(s),
every time you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position.

10/06/18 16:26:58 31TA5630_350

Maintenance MinderTM
The maintenance item code or codes
indicate the main and sub items
required at the time of the oil change
(see page 349 ).
You can switch the information
display from the engine oil life
display to the odometer or the trip
meter. Press and release the select/
reset knob on the instrument panel.

When you see this message, have
the indicated maintenance
performed by your dealer as soon as
possible.

NEGATIVE DISTANCE TRAVELED

When the remaining engine oil life is
0 percent, the engine oil life indicator
will blink. The display comes on
every time you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position. The
Maintenance Minder indicator
(
) also comes on and remains
on in the instrument panel. When
you see this message, immediately
have the indicated maintenance done
by your dealer.

If you do not perform the indicated
maintenance, negative distance
traveled is displayed and begins to
blink after the vehicle has been
driven 10 miles (10 km) or more.
Negative distance traveled means
your vehicle has passed the
maintenance required point.
Immediately have the indicated
maintenance done by your dealer.
CONTINUED

345

2011 Accord Sedan

Maintenance

When the engine oil life is 15 to 1
percent, the Maintenance Minder
indicator (
) comes on every
time you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, then it goes out
if you switch the information display.

10/06/18 16:27:08 31TA5630_351

Maintenance MinderTM
To change the information display
from the engine oil life display to the
odometer or the trip meter, press
and release the select/reset knob.

Maintenance Main Items and Sub
Items
MAINTENANCE
MINDER INDICATOR

MAINTENANCE
MAIN ITEM

When the engine oil life is 0 percent
or negative distance traveled, the
Maintenance Minder indicator
(
) remains on even if you
change the information display.
Immediately have the service
performed, and make sure to reset
the display as described as follows.

MAINTENANCE SUB ITEM(S)
U.S. model is shown.

All maintenance items displayed on
the information display are in code.
For an explanation of these
maintenance codes, see page 349 .

346

2011 Accord Sedan

Resetting the Engine Oil Life
Display
Your dealer will reset the display
after completing the required
maintenance service. You will see
‘‘OIL LIFE 100%’’ on the
information display the next time
you turn the ignition switch to the
ON (II) position.
If maintenance service is done by
someone other than your dealer,
reset the Maintenance Minders
as follows:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position.
2. Press the select/reset knob
repeatedly until the engine oil life
indicator is displayed.

10/06/18 16:27:15 31TA5630_352

Maintenance MinderTM
Important Maintenance
Precautions
If you have the required service
done but do not reset the display, or
reset the display without doing the
service, the system will not show the
correct maintenance intervals. This
can lead to serious mechanical
problems because you will no longer
have an accurate record of when
maintenance is needed.
4. Press the select/reset knob for
another 5 seconds. The
maintenance item code(s) will
disappear, and the engine oil life
will reset to ‘‘100.’’

Your authorized Honda dealer
knows your vehicle best and can
provide competent, efficient service.

CONTINUED

347

2011 Accord Sedan

Maintenance

3. Press the select/reset knob for
about 10 seconds. The engine oil
life and the maintenance item
code(s) will blink.

10/06/18 16:27:24 31TA5630_353

Maintenance MinderTM
However, service at a dealer is not
mandatory to keep your warranties
in effect. Maintenance may be done
by any qualified service facility or
person who is skilled in this type of
automotive service. Make sure to
have the service facility or person
reset the display as previously
described. Keep all receipts as proof
of completion, and have the person
who does the work fill out your
Honda Service History or Canadian
Maintenance Log. Check your
warranty booklet for more
information.
We recommend using Honda parts
and fluids whenever you have
maintenance done. These are
manufactured to the same high
quality standards as the original
components, so you can be confident
of their performance and durability.

U.S. Vehicles:
According to state and federal
regulations, failure to perform
maintenance on the items marked
with ＃ will not void your emissions
warranties. However, all
maintenance services should be
performed in accordance with the
intervals indicated by the
information display.

Automatic transmission − Check
the fluid level monthly. See
page 359 .

Owner’s Maintenance Checks
You should check the following
items at the specified intervals. If
you are unsure of how to perform
any check, turn to the appropriate
page listed.

Lights − Check the operation of
the headlights, parking lights,
taillights, high-mount brake light,
and license plate lights monthly.
See page 365 .

Engine oil level − Check every
time you fill the fuel tank. See
page 302 .
Engine coolant level − Check the
radiator reserve tank every time
you fill the fuel tank. See page 303 .

348

2011 Accord Sedan

Brakes − Check the fluid level
monthly. See page 362 .
Tires − Check the tire pressure
monthly. Examine the tread for
wear and foreign objects. See
page 380.

10/06/18 16:27:31 31TA5630_354

Maintenance MinderTM
Symbol
A
B

＃:

NOTE:

Symbol
1
2

3
4

If the message ‘‘SERVICE’’ does not appear more than 12 months after the
display is reset, change the engine oil every year.
See information on maintenance and emissions warranty in the center
column on page 348 .
Independent of the Maintenance Minder information, replace the brake
fluid every 3 years.

Maintenance Sub Items
Rotate tires
Replace air cleaner element
If you drive in dusty conditions, replace every 15,000
miles (24,000 km).
Replace dust and pollen filter
If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high
concentrations of soot in the air from industry and from
diesel-powered vehicles, replace every 15,000 miles
(24,000 km).
Inspect drive belt
Replace transmission fluid
Replace spark plugs
Replace timing belt and inspect water pump
(V6 engine only)
If you drive regularly in very high temperatures (over
110°F, 43°C), or in very low temperatures (under −20°F,
−29°C), replace every 60,000 miles (U.S.)/100,000 km
(Canada).
Inspect valve clearance
Replace engine coolant

Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000 km).
Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 only if they are noisy.

349

2011 Accord Sedan

Maintenance Minder

＊1 :

Maintenance Main Items
Replace engine oil＊1
Replace engine oil＊1 and oil filter
Inspect front and rear brakes
Check parking brake adjustment
Inspect these items:
Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and boots
Suspension components
Driveshaft boots
Brake hoses and lines (including ABS/VSA)
All fluid levels and condition of fluids
Exhaust system＃
Fuel lines and connections＃

10/06/18 16:27:35 31TA5630_355

Fluid Locations
4-cylinder models
BRAKE FLUID
(Black cap)

CLUTCH FLUID
(Manual
Transmission only)
(Light gray cap)

ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK
(Orange handle)
ENGINE OIL FILL CAP
POWER STEERING FLUID
(Red cap)
AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
FLUID DIPSTICK
(Yellow loop)

WASHER FLUID
(Blue cap)

ENGINE COOLANT
RESERVOIR

RADIATOR CAP

350

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:27:39 31TA5630_356

Fluid Locations
V6 models

ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK
(Orange loop)

BRAKE FLUID
(Black cap)

ENGINE OIL FILL CAP
POWER STEERING FLUID
(Red cap)

Maintenance

AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
FLUID DIPSTICK
(Yellow loop)

WASHER FLUID
(Blue cap)

ENGINE COOLANT
RESERVOIR

RADIATOR CAP

351

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:27:45 31TA5630_357

Adding Engine Oil
ENGINE OIL FILL CAP

4-cylinder models

Unscrew and remove the engine oil
fill cap on top of the valve cover.
Pour in the oil slowly and carefully so
you do not spill any. Clean up any
spills immediately. Spilled oil could
damage components in the engine
compartment.

ENGINE OIL FILL CAP

V6 models

Reinstall the engine oil fill cap, and
tighten it securely. Wait a few
minutes, and recheck the oil level on
the engine oil dipstick. Do not fill
above the upper mark; you could
damage the engine.

352

2011 Accord Sedan

Recommended Engine Oil
Oil is a major contributor to your
engine’s performance and longevity.
Always use a premium-grade 0W-20
detergent oil displaying the API
Certification Seal. This seal indicates
the oil is energy conserving, and that
it meets the American Petroleum
Institute’s latest requirements.

10/06/18 16:27:53 31TA5630_358

Adding Engine Oil
Honda Motor Oil is the preferred
0W-20 lubricant for your vehicle. It is
highly recommended that you use
Honda Motor Oil in your vehicle for
optimum engine protection. Make
sure the API Certification Seal says
‘‘For Gasoline Engines’’.

The oil viscosity or weight is
provided on the container’s label.
0W-20 oil is formulated for yearround protection of your vehicle to
improve cold weather starting and
fuel economy.

Synthetic Oil
You may use a synthetic motor oil if
it meets the same requirements
given for a conventional motor oil: it
displays the API Certification Seal,
and it is the proper weight. You must
follow the oil and filter change
intervals shown on the information
display.

Ambient Temperature
API CERTIFICATION SEAL

353

2011 Accord Sedan

Maintenance

Engine Oil Additives
Your vehicle does not require any oil
additives. Additives may adversely
affect the engine or transmission
performance and durability.

10/06/18 16:28:01 31TA5630_359

Changing the Engine Oil and Filter
Always change the oil and filter
according to the maintenance
messages shown on the information
display. The oil and filter collect
contaminants that can damage your
engine if they are not removed
regularly.
Changing the oil and filter requires
special tools and access from
underneath the vehicle. The vehicle
should be raised on a service stationtype hydraulic lift for this service.
Unless you have the knowledge and
proper equipment, you should have
this maintenance done by a skilled
technician.

WASHER

4-cylinder models

WASHER

OIL DRAIN BOLT

2. Open the hood, and remove the
engine oil fill cap. Remove the oil
drain bolt and washer from the
bottom of the engine. Drain the oil
into an appropriate container.

1. Run the engine until it reaches
normal operating temperature,
then shut it off.

V6 models

OIL DRAIN BOLT

3. Remove the oil filter and let the
remaining oil drain. A special
wrench (available from your
dealer) is required.
Make sure the oil filter gasket is
not stuck to the contacting surface
of the engine. If it is, remove it
before installing a new oil filter.

354

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:28:11 31TA5630_360

Changing the Engine Oil and Filter
OIL FILTER

OIL FILTER

7. Reinstall the engine oil fill cap.
Start the engine. The oil pressure
indicator should go out within 5
seconds. If it does not, turn off the
engine, and check your work.
8. Let the engine run for several
minutes, then check the drain bolt
and oil filter for leaks.

4-cylinder models

5. Put a new washer on the drain bolt,
then reinstall the drain bolt.
Tighten the drain bolt to:
29 lbf·ft (39 N·m , 4.0 kgf·m)

6. Refill the engine with the recommended oil.
Engine oil change capacity
(including filter):
4-cylinder models

4.2 US qt (4.0 )
V6 models

4.5 US qt (4.3 )

9. Turn off the engine, let it sit for
several minutes, then check the oil
level on the dipstick. If necessary,
add more oil.

Improper disposal of engine oil can be
harmf ul to the environment. If you
change your own oil, please dispose of
the used oil properly. Put it in a sealed
container and take it to a recycling
center. Do not discard it in a trash bin
or dump it on the ground.

355

2011 Accord Sedan

Maintenance

4. Install a new oil filter according to
the instructions that come with it.
Make sure to clean off any dirt
and dust on the contacting surface
of a new oil filter.

V6 models

10/06/18 16:28:18 31TA5630_361

Engine Coolant
Adding Engine Coolant

V6 models
4-cylinder models

RESERVE TANK

If the coolant level in the reserve
tank is at or below the MIN line, add
coolant to bring it up to the MAX line.
Inspect the cooling system for leaks.

RESERVE TANK

Always use Honda Long-life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2. This coolant
is pre-mixed with 50 percent
antifreeze and 50 percent distilled
water. Never add straight antifreeze
or plain water.

356

2011 Accord Sedan

If Honda antifreeze/coolant is not
available, you may use another
major-brand non-silicate coolant
as a temporary replacement. Make
sure it is a high-quality coolant
recommended for aluminum
engines. Continued use of any nonHonda coolant can result in
corrosion, causing the cooling
system to malfunction or fail. Have
the cooling system flushed and
refilled with Honda antifreeze/
coolant as soon as possible.
4-cylinder models only

If you regularly drive your vehicle
under severe conditions in very low
temperature (under −31°F, −35°C), a
higher concentration of coolant should
be used. Consult your Honda dealer
f or more inf ormation on the proper
coolant.

10/06/18 16:28:28 31TA5630_362

Engine Coolant
If the reserve tank is completely
empty, you should also check the
coolant level in the radiator.

RADIATOR CAP

Removing the radiator cap
while the engine is hot can
cause the coolant to spray out,
seriously scalding you.

1. Make sure the engine and radiator
are cool.
2. Relieve any pressure in the cooling
system by turning the radiator cap
counterclockwise, without
pressing down.
3. Remove the radiator cap by
pushing it down and turning it
counterclockwise.

4-cylinder models

4. The coolant level should be up to
the base of the filler neck. Add
coolant if it is low.
Pour the coolant slowly and
carefully so you do not spill any.
Clean up any spill immediately; it
could damage components in the
engine compartment.
5. Put the radiator cap back on, and
tighten it fully.

V6 models

RADIATOR CAP

6. Pour coolant into the reserve tank.
Fill it to halfway between the MAX
and MIN marks. Put the cap back
on the reserve tank.
Do not add any rust inhibitors or
other additives to your vehicle’s
cooling system. They may not be
compatible with the coolant or
engine components.

357

2011 Accord Sedan

Maintenance

Always let the engine and
radiator cool down before
removing the radiator cap.

10/06/18 16:28:35 31TA5630_363

Windshield Washers
LEVEL GAUGE

LEVEL GAUGE

Do not use engine antif reeze or a
vinegar/water solution in the
windshield washer reservoir. Antif reeze
can damage your vehicle’s paint, while
a vinegar/water solution can damage
the windshield washer pump. Use only
commercially-available windshield
washer f luid.
4-cylinder models

Check the level in the windshield
washer reservoir at least monthly
during normal use.
Check the fluid level by removing
the cap and looking at the level
gauge.
Canadian models only

The washer level indicator will
come on when the level is low (see
page 62 ).

V6 models

Fill the reservoir with a good-quality
windshield washer fluid. This
increases the cleaning capability and
prevents freezing in cold weather.
When you refill the reservoir, clean
the edges of the windshield wiper
blades with windshield washer fluid
on a clean cloth. This will help to
condition the blade edges.

358

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:28:42 31TA5630_364

Transmission Fluid
Automatic Transmission

DIPSTICK
DIPSTICK

UPPER
MARK
LOWER
MARK
V6 models
4-cylinder models

3. Insert the dipstick all the way into
the transmission securely as
shown in the illustration.

1. Park the vehicle on level ground.
Start the engine, let it run until the
radiator fan comes on, then shut
off the engine. For accurate
results, wait about 60 seconds (but
no longer than 90 seconds) before
doing step 2.
CONTINUED

359

2011 Accord Sedan

Maintenance

Check the fluid level with the engine
at normal operating temperature.

2. Remove the dipstick (yellow loop)
from the transmission, and wipe it
with a clean cloth.

4-cylinder models

10/06/18 16:28:50 31TA5630_365

Transmission Fluid
Pour the fluid slowly and carefully
so you do not spill any. Clean up
any spill immediately; it could
damage components in the engine
compartment.
UPPER
MARK
LOWER
MARK
V6 models

Always use Honda ATF DW-1
(automatic transmission fluid).
6. Insert the dipstick all the way back
into the transmission securely as
shown in the illustration.

4. Remove the dipstick and check
the fluid level. It should be
between the upper and lower
marks.

The transmission should be drained
and refilled with new fluid according
to the Maintenance MinderTM (see
page 349 ).

5. If the level is below the lower
mark, add fluid into the dipstick
hole to bring it to the level
between the upper and lower
marks.

If you are not sure how to add fluid,
contact your dealer.

360

2011 Accord Sedan

Use only Honda ATF DW-1 (automatic
transmission f luid). Do not mix with
other transmission f luids.
Using transmission f luid other than
Honda ATF DW-1 may cause
deterioration in transmission operation
and durability, and could result in
damage to the transmission.
Damage resulting f rom the use of
transmission f luid other than Honda
ATF DW-1 is not covered by the Honda
new vehicle warranty.

10/06/21 10:45:38 31TA5630_366

Transmission Fluid
Manual Transmission

FILLER BOLT

Correct level
CLIP

UNDER COVER

To check the transmission fluid level,
remove the under cover holding clips
with a flat-tip screwdriver, then
remove the under cover carefully.

The fluid level should be up to the
edge of the bolt hole. If it is not, add
Honda Manual Transmission Fluid
(MTF) until it starts to run out of the
hole. Reinstall the filler bolt, and
tighten it securely.

If Honda MTF is not available, you
may use an SAE 10W-30 or 10W-40
viscosity motor oil with the API
Certification Seal that says ‘‘FOR
GASOLINE ENGINES’’ as a
temporary replacement. However,
motor oil does not contain the proper
additives, and continued use can
cause stiffer shifting. Replace as
soon as it is convenient.
The transmission should be drained
and refilled with new fluid according
to the Maintenance MinderTM (see
page 343 ).
If you are not sure how to check and
add fluid, contact your dealer.

361

2011 Accord Sedan

Maintenance

4-cylinder models

Check the fluid level with the
transmission at normal operating
temperature and the vehicle sitting
on level ground.

Remove the transmission filler bolt,
and carefully feel inside the bolt hole
with your finger.

Reinstall the under cover and put the
holding clips back in place. Make
sure the under cover is installed
under the edge of the front bumper.

10/06/18 16:29:06 31TA5630_367

Brake and Clutch Fluid
Check the fluid level in the
reservoirs monthly. There are up to
two reservoirs, depending on the
model. They are:
Brake fluid reservoir (all models)
Clutch fluid reservoir
(manual transmission only)
Independent of the Maintenance
Minder information, replace the
brake fluid every 3 years.

Always use Honda Heavy Duty
Brake Fluid DOT 3. If it is not
available, you should use only DOT 3
or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealed
container, as a temporary
replacement.
Using any non-Honda brake fluid can
cause corrosion and decrease the life
of the system. Have the brake
system flushed and refilled with
Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid
DOT 3 as soon as possible.
Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not
compatible with your vehicle’s
braking system and can cause
extensive damage.

362

2011 Accord Sedan

Brake Fluid
MAX

MIN

The fluid level should be between
the MIN and MAX marks on the side
of the reservoir. If the level is at or
below the MIN mark, your brake
system needs attention. Have the
brake system inspected for leaks or
worn brake pads.

10/06/18 16:29:13 31TA5630_368

Brake and Clutch Fluid, Power Steering Fluid
Clutch Fluid
On models with manual transmission

A low fluid level can indicate a leak
in the clutch system. Have this
system inspected as soon as possible.

Power Steering Fluid
UPPER LEVEL

MAX

4-cylinder models

LOWER LEVEL

Check the level on the side of the
reservoir when the engine is cold.
The fluid should be between the
UPPER LEVEL and LOWER LEVEL.
If not, add power steering fluid to the
UPPER LEVEL.

The fluid level should be between
the MIN and MAX marks on the side
of the reservoir. If it is not, add
brake fluid to bring it up to that level.
Use the same fluid specified for the
brake system.

CONTINUED

363

2011 Accord Sedan

Maintenance

MIN

10/06/21 10:45:45 31TA5630_369

Power Steering Fluid, Timing Belt
UPPER LEVEL

V6 models

LOWER LEVEL

Pour the fluid slowly and carefully
so you do not spill any. Clean up
any spills immediately; it could
damage components in the engine
compartment.

Always use Honda Power Steering
Fluid. You may use another power
steering fluid as an emergency
replacement, but have the power
steering system flushed and refilled
with Honda PSF as soon as possible.
A low power steering fluid level can
indicate a leak in the system. Check
the fluid level frequently, and have
the system inspected as soon as
possible.

Turning the steering wheel to f ull lef t
or right lock and holding it there can
damage the power steering pump.

364

2011 Accord Sedan

Timing Belt
V6 models

The timing belt should be replaced
according to the Maintenance
MinderTM (see page 343 ).
Replace the timing belt every 60,000
miles (U.S.) or every 100,000 km
(Canada) if you regularly drive your
vehicle in any of the following
conditions:
In very high temperatures
(over 110°F, 43°C).
In very low temperatures
(under −20°F, −29°C).
If you frequently tow a trailer.

10/06/18 16:29:27 31TA5630_370

Lights
Headlight Aiming
The headlights were properly aimed
when your vehicle was new. If you
regularly carry heavy items in the
trunk or pull a trailer, readjustment
may be required. Adjustments
should be done by your dealer or
another qualified technician.

Replacing a Headlight Bulb
Your vehicle has halogen headlight
bulbs. When replacing a bulb, handle
it by its base, and protect the glass
from contact with your skin or hard
objects. If you touch the glass, clean
it with denatured alcohol and a clean
cloth.

4-cylinder models

STAY

Maintenance

Halogen headlight bulbs get very hot
when lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratch
on the glass can cause the bulb to
overheat and shatter.

High Beam Headlight

1. Open the hood.
To change a bulb on the
passenger’s side, remove the
engine coolant reserve tank by
pulling it out of its stay.

CONTINUED

365

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:29:34 31TA5630_371

Lights
FASTENER

V6 models

STAY

V6 models

AIR INTAKE COVER

DUCT

V6 models

To change a bulb on the driver’s side,
undo the fastener and remove the air
intake cover by pushing the tab.
Then remove the duct.

BULB

TAB

2. Remove the electrical connector
from the bulb by pushing on the
tab to unlock it, then slide the
connector off the bulb.
3. Remove the bulb by turning it
approximately one-quarter turn
counterclockwise.

366

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:29:45 31TA5630_372

Lights
4. Install the new bulb, and turn it
one-quarter turn clockwise to lock
it in place.

Low Beam Headlight

BULB

HOLDING CLIPS

5. Push the electrical connector onto
the bulb.
TAB

6. Turn on the headlights to test the
new bulb.

Passenger’s side

Reinstall the engine coolant
reserve tank.

1. To change the passenger’s side
bulb, start the engine, turn the
steering wheel all the way to the
left, and turn off the engine. To
change the driver’s side bulb, turn
the steering wheel to the right.
2. Use a flat-tip screwdriver to
remove the two holding clips from
the inner fender.

3. Pull the inner fender cover away
from the fender and bumper.
4. Remove the bulb by turning it
approximately one-quarter turn
counterclockwise.
5. Remove the electrical connector
from the bulb by pushing on the
tab to unlock it, then slide the
connector off the bulb.
CONTINUED

367

2011 Accord Sedan

Maintenance

7. Driver’s side on V6 models
Reinstall the air intake cover and
duct securely. Reinstall the
fastener and secure it by pushing
on the head until it locks.

10/06/18 16:29:56 31TA5630_373

Lights
6. Install the new bulb, and turn it
one-quarter turn clockwise to lock
it in place.

Replacing a Front Turn Signal/
Parking Light Bulb

7. Push the electrical connector onto
the bulb.
8. Turn on the headlights to test the
new bulb.
9. Put the inner fender cover in place.
Install the two holding clips. Lock
each one in place by pushing on
the center.

BULB
V6 model is shown.

STAY

1. Open the hood.
To change the turn signal bulb on
the passenger’s side, remove the
engine coolant reserve tank by
pulling it out of its stay.
Driver’s side on V6 models

Remove the air intake duct (see
page 366 ).

368

2011 Accord Sedan

2. Remove the socket from the
headlight assembly by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
3. To remove the burned out bulb,
push it in and turn it
counterclockwise until it unlocks.

10/06/18 16:30:06 31TA5630_374

Lights
4. Install the new bulb and turn it
clockwise to lock it in place.

Replacing a Front Side Marker
Light Bulb

5. Insert the socket back into the
headlight assembly. Turn it
clockwise to lock it in place.

HOLDING CLIPS

BULB

6. Turn on the lights to make sure
the new bulb is working.
7. Passenger’s side
Reinstall the coolant reserve tank.
Reinstall the air intake cover and
duct securely. Reinstall the
fastener and secure it by pushing
on the head until it locks.

1. To change the bulb on the driver’s
side, start the engine, turn the
steering wheel all the way to the
right, then turn off the engine. To
change the bulb on the passenger’s
side, turn the steering wheel to the
left.
2. Use a flat-tip screwdriver to
remove the two holding clips from
the inner fender.

3. Remove the socket from the
headlight assembly by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
4. Pull the burned out bulb straight
out of its socket.
Push the new bulb straight into
the socket until it bottoms.

CONTINUED

369

2011 Accord Sedan

Maintenance

Driver’s side on V6 models

10/06/18 16:30:17 31TA5630_375

Lights
5. Insert the socket back into the
headlight assembly. Turn it
clockwise to lock it in place.

Replacing Rear Bulbs

BULB

SOCKET

6. Turn on the lights to make sure
the new bulb is working.
7. Reinstall the inner fender cover.
Then reinstall the holding clips,
and lock them in place by pushing
on their centers.
SCREW

1. Open the trunk.
Remove the screw in the center of
the fastener on the side of the
trunk lining. Pull the lining back.
2. Determine which of the three
bulbs is burned out: stop/taillight,
back-up light or turn signal light.

370

2011 Accord Sedan

3. Remove the socket by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
4. Pull the bulb straight out of its
socket. Push the new bulb straight
into the socket until it bottoms.
5. Insert the socket back into the
light assembly. Turn it clockwise
to lock it in place.

10/06/18 16:30:23 31TA5630_376

Lights
6. Turn on the lights to make sure
the new bulb is working.

Replacing a High-mount Brake
Light Bulb

7. Push the trunk lid trim back into
position.

3. Reinstall the socket. Turn it
clockwise until it locks. Make sure
the new bulb is working.

BULB

8. Put the fastener into the hole on
the side of the trunk lining.
Reinstall the screw.

Maintenance

SOCKET

1. Open the trunk, and remove the
socket from the light assembly by
turning it one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
2. Pull the bulb straight out of its
socket. Push the new bulb straight
into the socket until it bottoms.

371

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:30:31 31TA5630_377

Lights
Rear License Plate Light Bulbs
The license plate has two lights
above it. The bulbs should be
replaced by your dealer.

Replacing a Fog Light Bulb
If equipped

Your vehicle uses halogen light
bulbs. When replacing a bulb, handle
it by its plastic case, and protect the
glass from contact with your skin or
hard objects. If you touch the glass,
clean it with denatured alcohol and a
clean cloth.
HOLDING CLIPS

Halogen light bulbs get very hot when
lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratch on
the glass can cause the bulb to overheat
and shatter.
The fog lights were properly aimed
when your vehicle was new. If you
regularly carry heavy items in the
trunk or pull a trailer, readjustment
may be required. Adjustment should
be done by your dealer or another
qualified technician.

372

2011 Accord Sedan

1. Passenger’s side
Remove the three holding clips
with a flat-tip screwdriver.
Pull down the under cover from
the bumper carefully.

10/06/18 16:30:40 31TA5630_378

Lights

HOLDING CLIPS

TAB
ELECTRICAL
CONNECTOR

ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR

TAB

3. Remove the bulb by turning it
about one-quarter turn
counterclockwise.

4. Driver’s side
To change the bulb, start the
engine, turn the steering wheel all
the way to the right, then turn off
the engine.
5. Use a flat-tip screwdriver to
remove the two holding clips from
the inner fender, and pull the inner
fender cover back.

6. Remove the electrical connector
from the bulb by pushing on the
tab and pulling the connector
down.
7. Remove the bulb from the fog
light assembly by turning it onequarter turn counterclockwise.

CONTINUED

373

2011 Accord Sedan

Maintenance

2. Remove the electrical connector
from the bulb by pushing on the
tab to unlock it, then slide the
connector off the bulb.

10/06/18 16:30:46 31TA5630_379

Lights
8. Insert the new bulb into the hole,
and turn it one-quarter turn
clockwise to lock it in place.
9. Push the electrical connector back
onto the bulb. Make sure it is on
all the way.
10.Turn on the fog lights to test the
new bulb.
11.Passenger’s side
Reinstall the under cover and put
the holding clips back in place.
Driver’s side

Reinstall the inner fender. Make
sure it is installed under the edge
of the front bumper.
Reinstall the holding clips, and
push in the head of each clip.

374

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:30:53 31TA5630_380

Cleaning the Seat Belts, Floor Mats
Cleaning the Seat Belts
OPENING

Dirt build-up around the openings of
the seat belt anchors can cause the
belts to retract slowly. Wipe the
openings with a clean cloth
dampened in mild soap and warm
water or isopropyl alcohol.

The driver’s floor mat that came
with your vehicle hooks over the
floor mat anchors. This keeps the
floor mat from sliding forward and
possibly interfering with the pedals.

CONTINUED

375

2011 Accord Sedan

Maintenance

If your seat belts get dirty, use a soft
brush with a mixture of mild soap
and warm water to clean them. Do
not use bleach, dye, or cleaning
solvents. Let the belts air-dry before
you use the vehicle.

Floor Mats

10/06/18 16:30:58 31TA5630_381

Floor Mats, Dust and Pollen Filter
If you remove a floor mat, make sure
to re-anchor it when you put it back
in your vehicle.
If you use a non-Honda floor mat,
make sure it fits properly and that it
can be used with the floor mat
anchors. Do not put additional floor
mats on top of the anchored mat.
Make sure the front passenger and
rear floor mats are properly
positioned. If not, the floor mat will
interfere with the seat operation and
make the front passenger’s weight
sensors ineffective.

Dust and Pollen Filter
This filter removes the dust and
pollen that is brought in from the
outside through the heating and
cooling system/climate control
system.
Have your dealer replace this filter
when this service is indicated by a
maintenance message on the
information display. It should be
replaced every 15,000 miles (24,000
km) if you drive primarily in urban
areas that have high concentrations
of soot in the air, or if the airflow
from the heating and cooling
system/climate control system
becomes less than usual.

376

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:31:06 31TA5630_382

Wiper Blades
Check the condition of the wiper
blades at least every six months.
Replace them if you find signs of
cracking in the rubber, areas that are
getting hard, or if they leave streaks
and unwiped areas when used.

WIPER ARMS

LOCK TAB

1. Raise the wiper arm off the
windshield. Raise the driver’s side
first, then the passenger’s side.

2. Disconnect the blade assembly
from the wiper arm:
Put a cloth on the edge of the lock
tab to prevent scratches, then
push up on the lock tab carefully
with a flat-tip screwdriver.

Do not open the hood when the wiper
arms are raised, or you will damage the
hood and wiper arms.
CONTINUED

377

2011 Accord Sedan

Maintenance

To replace a wiper blade:

10/06/18 16:31:11 31TA5630_383

Wiper Blades

WIPER ARM

Pivot the blade assembly toward
the wiper arm until it releases
from the wiper arm.
When replacing a wiper blade,
make sure not to drop the wiper
blade or wiper arm down on the
windshield.

BLADE

3. Remove the blade from its holder
by grabbing the tabbed end of the
blade. Pull firmly until the tabs
come out of the holder.

378

2011 Accord Sedan

4. Examine the new wiper blades. If
they have no plastic or metal
reinforcement along the back
edge, remove the metal
reinforcement strips from the old
wiper blade, and install them in
the slots along the edge of the
new blade.

10/06/18 16:31:18 31TA5630_384

Wiper Blades
6. Slide the wiper blade assembly
onto the wiper arm. Push down
the lock tab. Make sure the wiper
blade assembly locks in place.

REINFORCEMENT
BLADE
TOP
TAB

7. Lower the wiper arm down against
the windshield, the passenger’s
side first, then the driver’s side.
INDENT

5. Place the top of the wiper blade on
the end of the blade assembly, and
slide the blade onto the assembly
in the direction pointed to by the
arrow.

Maintenance

Make sure the three rubber tabs
inside the blade fit to each notch of
the reinforcement, as shown.

Make sure the tab on the blade
assembly fits in the indent of the
wiper blade and the blade is
completely installed.

379

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:31:26 31TA5630_385

Tires
To safely operate your vehicle, your
tires must be the proper type and
size, in good condition with adequate
tread, and correctly inflated.
The following pages give more
detailed information on how to take
care of your tires and what to do
when they need to be replaced.

Using tires that are excessively
worn or improperly inflated can
cause a crash in which you can
be seriously hurt or killed.
Follow all instructions in this
owner’s manual regarding tire
inflation and maintenance.

Inflation Guidelines
Keeping the tires properly inflated
provides the best combination of
handling, tread life, and riding
comfort.
Underinflated tires wear unevenly,
adversely affect handling and fuel
economy, and are more likely to
fail from being overheated.
Overinflated tires can make your
vehicle ride harshly, are more
prone to damage from road
hazards, and wear unevenly.
The tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS) warns you when a tire
pressure is low. See page 331 for
more information.

380

2011 Accord Sedan

Even though your vehicle is
equipped with TPMS, we
recommend that you visually check
your tires every day. If you think a
tire might be low, check it
immediately with a tire gauge.
Use a gauge to measure the air
pressure in each tire at least once a
month. Even tires that are in good
condition may lose 1 to 2 psi (10 to
20 kPa, 0.1 to 0.2 kgf/cm ) per
month. Remember to check the
spare tire at the same time.
Check the air pressures when the
tires are cold. This means the
vehicle has been parked for at least 3
hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6
km). Add or release air, if needed, to
match the recommended cold tire
pressures on the next page.

10/06/18 16:31:38 31TA5630_386

Tires
If you check air pressures when the
tires are hot (driven for several
miles/kilometers), you will see
readings 4 to 6 psi (30 to 40 kPa, 0.3
to 0.4 kgf/cm ) higher than the cold
readings. This is normal. Do not let
air out to match the recommended
cold air pressure. The tire will be
underinflated.

4-cylinder models
Tire Size
P225/50R17 93V ＊1

P215/60R16 94H ＊2

Cold Tire Pressure
for Normal Driving
Front/Rear:
32 psi (220 kPa ,
2.2 kgf/cm )
Front/Rear:
30 psi (210 kPa ,
2.1 kgf/cm )

＊1 : EX, EX-L
＊2 : LX, LX-P, SE

V6 models
Tire Size
P225/50R17 93V

Cold Tire Pressure
for Normal Driving
Front/Rear:
32 psi (220 kPa ,
2.2 kgf/cm )

The compact spare tire pressure is:
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
For convenience, the recommended
tire sizes and cold tire pressures are
on a label on the driver’s doorjamb.
Maintenance

You should get your own tire
pressure gauge and use it whenever
you check your tire pressures. This
will make it easier for you to tell if a
pressure loss is due to a tire problem
and not due to a variation between
gauges.

Recommended Tire Pressures
The following chart shows the
recommended cold tire pressures for
most normal driving conditions.

For additional information about
your tires, see page 424 .

While tubeless tires have some
ability to self-seal if they are
punctured, you should look closely
for punctures if a tire starts losing
pressure.

381

2011 Accord Sedan

10/07/09 15:58:20 31TA5630_387

Tires
High Speed Driving
We strongly recommend that you do
not drive faster than the posted
speed limits and conditions allow. If
you ever drive in a sanctioned
competitive event at sustained high
speeds (over 118 mph or 190 km/h),
be sure to adjust the cold tire
pressures as shown below. If you do
not, excessive heat can build up and
cause sudden tire failure.
Tire Size
P225/50R17 93V
P215/60R16 94H

Cold Tire Pressure
35 psi (240 kPa ,
2.4 kgf/cm )

Tire Inspection
Every time you check inflation, you
should also examine the tires for
damage, foreign objects, and wear.

INDICATOR LOCATION MARKS

You should look for:
Bumps or bulges in the tread or
side of the tire. Replace the tire if
you find either of these conditions.
Cuts, splits, or cracks in the side
of the tire. Replace the tire if you
can see fabric or cord.
Excessive tread wear.

TREAD WEAR INDICATOR

Your tires have wear indicators
molded into the tread. When the
tread wears down, you will see a 1/2
inch (12.7 mm) wide band across the
tread. This shows there is less than
1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread left on
the tire.
A tire this worn gives very little
traction on wet roads. You should
replace the tire if you can see three
or more tread wear indicators.

382

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:31:55 31TA5630_388

Tires
Tire Service Life
The service life of your tires is
dependent on many factors,
including, but not limited to, driving
habits, road conditions, vehicle
loading, inflation pressure,
maintenance history, speed, and
environmental conditions (even
when the tires are not in use).

The last four digits of the TIN (tire
identification number) are found on
the sidewall of the tire and indicate
the date of manufacture (See Tire
Labeling on page 426 ).

Tire Maintenance
In addition to proper inflation,
correct wheel alignment helps to
decrease tire wear. If you find a tire
is worn unevenly, have your dealer
check the wheel alignment.

In addition to your regular
inspections and inflation pressure
maintenance, it is recommended that
you have annual inspections
performed once the tires reach five
years old. It is also recommended
that all tires, including the spare, be
removed from service after 10 years
from the date of manufacture,
regardless of their condition or state
of wear.

CONTINUED

383

2011 Accord Sedan

Maintenance

Have your dealer check the tires if
you feel a consistent vibration while
driving. A tire should always be
rebalanced if it is removed from the
wheel. When you have new tires
installed, make sure they are
balanced. This increases riding
comfort and tire life. For best
results, have the installer perform a
dynamic balance.

10/06/18 16:32:00 31TA5630_389

Tires
On models with aluminum wheels

Tire Rotation
Front

Front

Improper wheel weights can damage
your vehicle’s aluminum wheels. Use
only Honda wheel weights f or
balancing.

(For Non-directional (For Directional
Tires and Wheels) Tires and Wheels)

To help increase tire life and
distribute wear more evenly, rotate
the tires according to the
maintenance messages displayed on
the information display.
Move the tires to the positions
shown in the illustration each time
they are rotated. If you purchase
directional tires, rotate only front-toback.

384

2011 Accord Sedan

When the tires are rotated, make
sure the air pressures are checked.

10/06/18 16:32:07 31TA5630_390

Tires
Replacing Tires and Wheels
Replace your tires with radial tires of
the same size, load range, speed
rating, and maximum cold tire
pressure rating (as shown on the
tire’s sidewall).

It is best to replace all four tires at
the same time. If that is not possible
or necessary, replace the two front
tires or two rear tires as a pair.
Replacing just one tire can seriously
affect your vehicle’s handling.

Mixing radial and bias-ply tires on
your vehicle can reduce braking
ability, traction, and steering
accuracy. Using tires of a different
size or construction can cause the
ABS and vehicle stability assist
system (VSA) to work inconsistently.

If you ever replace a wheel, make
sure that the wheel’s specifications
match those of the original wheels.

Always use the size and type of
tires recommended in this
owner’s manual.

Also be sure you use only TPMS
specific wheels. If you do not, the
tire pressure monitoring system will
not work on that tire.

Maintenance

The ABS and VSA system work by
comparing the speed of each wheel.
When replacing tires, use the same
size originally supplied with the
vehicle. Tire size and construction
can affect wheel speed and may
cause the system to activate.

Installing improper tires on your
vehicle can affect handling and
stability. This can cause a crash
in which you can be seriously
hurt or killed.

Replacement wheels are available at
your dealer.

385

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:32:19 31TA5630_391

Tires
Wheel and Tire Specifications
Wheels
LX, LX-P and SE:
16 x 6 1/2J
EX and EX-L:
17 x 7 1/2J
V6 models:
17 x 7 1/2J
Tires
LX, LX-P and SE:
P215/60R16 94H
EX and EX-L:
P225/50R17 93V
V6 models:
P225/50R17 93V
See page 424 for DOT tire quality
grading information, and page
426 for tire size information.

Winter Driving
Tires marked ‘‘M ＋ S’’ or ‘‘All
Season’’ on the sidewall have an allweather tread design suitable for
most winter driving conditions.

Mount tire chains on your tires when
required by driving conditions or
local laws. Install them only on the
front tires.

For the best performance in snowy
or icy conditions, you should install
snow tires or tire chains. They may
be required by local laws under
certain conditions.

Because your vehicle has limited tire
clearance, Honda strongly
recommends using the chains listed
below, made by Security Chain
Company (SCC).

Tire Chains

Snow Tires

LX, LX-P and SE

If you mount snow tires on your
vehicle, make sure they are radial
tires of the same size and load range
as the original tires. Mount snow
tires on all four wheels. The traction
provided by snow tires on dry roads
may be lower than your original tires.
Check with the tire dealer for
maximum speed recommendations.

Cable-type: SCC Radial Chain
SC1034

386

2011 Accord Sedan

EX, EX-L and V6 models

Cable-type: SCC Radial Chain
SC1036

10/06/18 16:32:25 31TA5630_392

Tires
When installing chains, follow the
manufacturer’s instructions, and
mount them as tight as you can.
Make sure they are not contacting
the brake lines or suspension. Drive
slowly with them installed. If you
hear them coming into contact with
the body or chassis, stop and
investigate. Remove them as soon as
you begin driving on cleared roads.

Using the wrong chains, or not
properly installing chains, can
damage the brake lines and
cause a crash in which you can
be seriously injured or killed.
Follow all instructions in this
owner’s manual regarding the
selection and use of tire chains.

If equipped

Aluminum alloy wheels have a
protective clear-coat that keeps the
aluminum from corroding and
tarnishing. Cleaning the wheels with
harsh chemicals (including some
commercial wheel cleaners) or a stiff
brush can damage the clear-coat. To
clean the wheels, use a mild
detergent and a soft brush or sponge.

387

2011 Accord Sedan

Maintenance

Traction devices that are the wrong
size or improperly installed can
damage your vehicle’s brake lines,
suspension, body, and wheels. Stop
driving if they are hitting any part of
the vehicle.

Wheels
Clean the wheels as you would the
rest of the exterior. Wash them with
the same solution, and rinse them
thoroughly.

10/06/18 16:32:32 31TA5630_393

Checking the Battery
TEST INDICATOR WINDOW

TEST INDICATOR WINDOW

If additional battery maintenance is
needed, see your dealer or a
qualified mechanic.
WARNING: Battery posts,
terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds.
Wash your hands after handling.

4-cylinder models

Check the condition of the battery
monthly by looking at the test
indicator window. The label on the
battery explains the test indicator’s
colors.
The location of the test indicator
window varies between
manufacturers.

V6 models

Check the terminals for corrosion (a
white or yellowish powder). To
remove it, cover the terminals with a
solution of baking soda and water. It
will bubble up and turn brown. When
this stops, wash it off with plain
water. Dry off the battery with a
cloth or paper towel. Coat the
terminals with grease to help prevent
future corrosion.

388

2011 Accord Sedan

If you need to connect the battery to
a charger, disconnect both cables to
prevent damaging your vehicle’s
electrical system. Always disconnect
the negative (−) cable first, and
reconnect it last.

10/06/18 16:32:41 31TA5630_394

Checking the Battery, Vehicle Storage

The battery gives off explosive
hydrogen gas during normal
operation.

If your vehicle’s battery is
disconnected, or goes dead, the time
setting may be lost. To reset the time,
see page 254 .
Except LX, LX-P and U.S. SE

A spark or flame can cause the
battery to explode with enough
force to kill or seriously hurt you.

On models with navigation system

The navigation system will also
disable itself. The next time you turn
on the ignition switch, the system
will require you to enter a PIN
before it can be used. Refer to the
navigation system manual.

Fill the fuel tank.
Wash and dry the exterior
completely.
Clean the interior. Make sure the
carpeting, floor mats, etc., are
completely dry.

CONTINUED

389

2011 Accord Sedan

Maintenance

Wear protective clothing and a
face shield, or have a skilled
technician do the battery
maintenance.

If your vehicle’s battery is
disconnected or goes dead, the audio
system may disable itself. The next
time you turn on the radio, you will
see ‘‘ENTER CODE’’ in the
frequency display. Use the preset
buttons to enter the code (see page
page 253).

Vehicle Storage
If you need to park your vehicle for
an extended period (more than 1
month), there are several things you
should do to prepare it for storage.
Proper preparation helps prevent
deterioration and makes it easier to
get your vehicle back on the road. If
possible, store your vehicle indoors.

10/06/18 16:32:49 31TA5630_395

Vehicle Storage, Interior Care
Leave the parking brake off. Put
the transmission in reverse
(manual) or Park (automatic).

Support the front wiper blade
arms with a folded towel or rag so
they do not touch the windshield.

Block the rear wheels.

To minimize sticking, apply a
silicone spray lubricant to all door
and trunk seals. Also, apply a
vehicle body wax to the painted
surfaces that mate with the door
and trunk seals.

If the vehicle is to be stored for a
longer period, it should be
supported on jackstands so the
tires are off the ground.
Leave one window
open slightly (if the vehicle is
being stored indoors).
Disconnect the battery.

Cover the vehicle with a
‘‘breathable’’ cover, one made
from a porous material such as
cotton. Non-porous materials, such
as plastic sheeting, trap moisture,
which can damage the paint.
If possible, periodically run the
engine until it reaches full
operating temperature (the
cooling fans cycle on and off
twice). Preferably, do this once
a month.

390

2011 Accord Sedan

Leather
If equipped

Vacuum dirt and dust from the
leather frequently. Pay close
attention to the pleats and seams.
Clean the leather with a soft cloth
dampened with a 90% water and 10%
neutral wool detergent solution.
Then buff it with a clean, dry cloth.
Remove any dust or dirt on leather
surfaces immediately.

10/06/18 16:32:52 31TA5630_396

Taking Care of the Unexpected
This section covers the more
common problems that motorists
experience with their vehicles. It
gives you information about how to
safely evaluate the problem and what
to do to correct it. If the problem has
stranded you on the side of the road,
you may be able to get going again.
If not, you will also find instructions
on getting your vehicle towed.

Compact Spare Tire....................... 392
Changing a Flat Tire ..................... 393
If the Engine Won’t Start .............. 398
Jump Starting ................................. 400
If the Engine Overheats ............... 403
Low Oil Pressure Indicator .......... 405
Charging System Indicator........... 405
Malfunction Indicator Lamp ........ 406
Brake System Indicator ................ 407
Fuses ............................................... 408
Fuse Locations ............................... 412
Emergency Towing ....................... 415

Taking Care of the Unexpected

391

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:33:01 31TA5630_397

Compact Spare Tire
Use the compact spare tire as a
temporary replacement only. Get
your regular tire repaired or replaced,
and put it back on your vehicle as
soon as you can.
Check the air pressure of the
compact spare tire every time you
check the other tires. It should be
inflated to:
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

Follow these precautions:

INDICATOR LOCATION MARK

Never exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
This tire gives a harsher ride and
less traction on some road
surfaces. Use greater caution
while driving.
Do not mount snow chains on the
compact spare tire.
Do not use your compact spare
tire on another vehicle unless it is
the same make and model.
The low tire pressure indicator
comes on and stays on after you
replace the flat tire with the
compact spare tire. After several
miles (kilometers) driving with the
compact spare tire, the TPMS
indicator comes on and the low
tire pressure indicator goes off.

392

2011 Accord Sedan

TREAD WEAR INDICATOR BAR

Replace the tire when you can see
the tread wear indicator bars. The
replacement should be the same size
and design tire, mounted on the
same wheel. The spare tire is not
designed to be mounted on a regular
wheel, and the spare wheel is not
designed for mounting a regular tire.

10/06/18 16:33:09 31TA5630_398

Changing a Flat Tire
If you have a flat tire while driving,
pull over safely. Drive slowly along
the shoulder until you get to an area
far away from traffic lanes.

TRUNK FLOOR

TOOL KIT

3. The tools are in the trunk. Open
the trunk and raise the trunk floor
by lifting up on the back edge.

The vehicle can easily roll off
the jack, seriously injuring
anyone underneath.
SPARE TIRE

JACK

1. Park the vehicle on firm, level, and
non-slippery ground. Put the
transmission in Park (automatic)
or reverse (manual). Apply the
parking brake.

4. Take the tool kit out of the trunk.
5. Unscrew the wing bolt and take
the spare tire out of its well.

CONTINUED

393

2011 Accord Sedan

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Follow the directions for
changing a tire exactly, and
never get under the vehicle
when it is supported only by the
jack.

2. Turn on the hazard warning lights,
and turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position. Have all
passengers get out of the vehicle
while you change the tire.

10/06/18 16:33:15 31TA5630_399

Changing a Flat Tire
JACK

WHEEL NUT

JACKING POINTS

6. Take the jack out of the tool kit
case.

7. Loosen each wheel nut 1/2 turn
with the wheel nut wrench.

394

2011 Accord Sedan

8. Place the jack under the jacking
point nearest the tire you need to
change. Turn the end bracket
clockwise until the top of the jack
contacts the jacking point. Make
sure the jacking point tab is
resting in the jack notch.

10/06/18 16:33:23 31TA5630_400

Changing a Flat Tire

WHEEL NUT

WHEEL WRENCH

EXTENSION

10.Remove the wheel nuts, then
remove the flat tire. Handle the
wheel nuts carefully; they may be
hot from driving. Place the flat tire
on the ground with the outside
surface facing up.

Do not attempt to forcibly pry the
wheel cover off with a screwdriver or
other tool. The wheel cover cannot
be removed without first removing
the wheel nuts.

BRAKE HUB

11.Before mounting the spare tire,
wipe any dirt off the mounting
surface of the wheel and hub with
a clean cloth. Wipe the hub
carefully; it may be hot from
driving.

CONTINUED

395

2011 Accord Sedan

Taking Care of the Unexpected

9. Use the extension and the wheel
nut wrench as shown to raise the
vehicle until the flat tire is off the
ground.

WHEEL COVER

10/06/18 16:33:29 31TA5630_401

Changing a Flat Tire
12.Put on the spare tire. Put the
wheel nuts back on finger-tight,
then tighten them in a crisscross
pattern with the wheel nut wrench
until the wheel is firmly against
the hub. Do not try to tighten the
wheel nuts fully.
13.Lower the vehicle to the ground,
and remove the jack.
CENTER CAP

14.Tighten the wheel nuts securely in
the same crisscross pattern. Have
the wheel nut torque checked at
the nearest automotive service
facility.
Tighten the wheel nuts to:
80 lbf·ft (108 N·m , 11 kgf·m)

396

2011 Accord Sedan

15.Remove the center cap (if
equipped) before storing the flat
tire in the trunk well.

10/06/18 16:33:40 31TA5630_402

Changing a Flat Tire
WING BOLT

SPACER CONE

19.Store the jack and tools in the tool
kit case. Place the tool kit case in
the flat tire.

Loose items can fly around the
interior in a crash and could
seriously injure the occupants.
For compact For normal
spare tire
tire
SPACER CONE

16.Place the flat tire face down in the
spare tire well.

To remove the spacer cone, squeeze
the tabs on the wing bolt to
disengage it from the center of the
spacer cone, then pull the bolt
downward.
To install the wing bolt to the spacer
cone, reverse this procedure.
18.Secure the flat tire by screwing
the wing bolt back into its hole.

Store the wheel, jack, and tools
securely before driving.
20.Store the wheel cover or center
cap in the trunk. Make sure it does
not get scratched or damaged.
21.Lower the trunk floor, then close
the trunk lid.
22.Your vehicle’s original tire has a
tire pressure monitoring system
sensor. To replace a tire, refer to
Changing a Tire with TPMS (see
page 333 ).

397

2011 Accord Sedan

Taking Care of the Unexpected

17.Remove the spacer cone from the
wing bolt, turn it over, and put it
back on the bolt.

TAB

10/06/18 16:33:47 31TA5630_403

If the Engine Won’t Start
Diagnosing why the engine won’t
start falls into two areas, depending
on what you hear when you turn the
ignition switch to the START (III)
position:
You hear nothing, or almost
nothing. The engine’s starter
motor does not operate at all, or
operates very slowly.
You can hear the starter motor
operating normally, or the starter
motor sounds like it is spinning
faster than normal, but the engine
does not start up and run.

Nothing Happens or the Starter
Motor Operates Very Slowly
When you turn the ignition switch to
the START (III) position, you do not
hear the normal noise of the engine
trying to start. You may hear a
clicking sound, a series of clicks, or
nothing at all.
Check these things:
Check the transmission interlock.
If you have a manual transmission,
the clutch pedal must be pushed
all the way to the floor or the
starter will not operate. With an
automatic transmission, it must be
in Park or neutral.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position. Turn on the
headlights, and check their
brightness. If the headlights are
very dim or do not come on at all,
the battery is discharged. See
Jump Starting on page 400 .

398

2011 Accord Sedan

Turn the ignition switch to the
START (III) position. If the
headlights do not dim, check the
condition of the fuses. If the fuses
are OK, there is probably
something wrong with the
electrical circuit for the ignition
switch or starter motor. You will
need a qualified mechanic to
determine the problem (see
Emergency Towing on page 415 ).
If the headlights dim noticeably or
go out when you try to start the
engine, either the battery is discharged or the connections are
corroded. Check the condition of
the battery connections (see page
388 ). You can then try jump
starting the vehicle from a booster
battery (see page 400 ).

10/06/18 16:33:53 31TA5630_404

If the Engine Won’t Start
The Starter Operates Normally
In this case, the starter motor’s
speed sounds normal, or even faster
than normal, when you turn the
ignition switch to the START (III)
position, but the engine does not run.
Are you using the proper starting
procedure? Refer to Starting the
Engine on page 317 .

There may be an electrical
problem, such as no power to the
fuel pump. Check all the fuses
(see page 408 ).
If you find nothing wrong, you will
need a qualified technician to find
the problem. See Emergency
Towing on page 415 .

Are you using a properly coded
key? An improperly coded key will
cause the immobilizer system
indicator in the instrument panel
to blink rapidly (see page 77 ).
Taking Care of the Unexpected

Do you have fuel? Check the fuel
gauge; the low fuel indicator may
not be working.

399

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:34:00 31TA5630_405

Jump Starting
Although this seems like a simple
procedure, you should take several
precautions.

A battery can explode if you do
not follow the correct procedure,
seriously injuring anyone
nearby.
Keep all sparks, open flames,
and smoking materials away
from the battery.
You cannot start your vehicle with an
automatic transmission by pushing
or pulling it.

To jump start your vehicle:
1. Open the hood, and check the
physical condition of the battery.
In very cold weather, check the
condition of the electrolyte. If it
seems slushy or frozen, do not try
jump starting until it thaws.

If a battery sits in extreme cold, the
electrolyte inside can f reeze.
Attempting to jump start with a f rozen
battery can cause it to rupture.
2. Turn off all the electrical
accessories: heater, A/C, audio
system, lights, etc. Put the
transmission in neutral (manual)
or Park (automatic), and set the
parking brake.

400

2011 Accord Sedan

BOOSTER BATTERY
4-cylinder models

The numbers in the illustrations
show you the order to connect the
jumper cables.

10/06/18 16:34:08 31TA5630_406

Jump Starting

V6 models

BOOSTER BATTERY

4-cylinder models with manual
transmission

4. 4-cylinder models
Connect the second jumper cable
to the negative (−) terminal on
the booster battery. Connect the
other end to the engine mounting
bolt (automatic) or the
transmission mounting bolt
(manual), as shown. Do not
connect this jumper cable to any
other part of the engine.
CONTINUED

401

2011 Accord Sedan

Taking Care of the Unexpected

3. Connect one jumper cable to the
positive (＋) terminal on your
battery. Connect the other end to
the positive (＋) terminal on the
booster battery.

4-cylinder models with automatic
transmission

10/06/18 16:34:14 31TA5630_407

Jump Starting
5. If the booster battery is in another
vehicle, have an assistant start
that vehicle and run it at a fast idle.
6. Start the vehicle. If the starter
motor still operates slowly, check
that the jumper cables have good
metal-to-metal contact.

V6 models

Connect the second jumper cable to
the negative (−) terminal on the
booster battery. Connect the other
end to the engine hanger as shown.
Do not connect this jumper cable to
any other part of the engine.

7. Once your vehicle is running,
disconnect the negative cable from
your vehicle, then from the
booster battery. Disconnect the
positive cable from your vehicle,
then from the booster battery.

402

2011 Accord Sedan

Keep the ends of the jumper cables
away from each other and any metal
on the vehicle until everything is
disconnected. Otherwise, you may
cause an electrical short.

10/06/18 16:34:22 31TA5630_408

If the Engine Overheats
The pointer of the vehicle’s
temperature gauge should stay in
the midrange. If it climbs to the red
mark, you should determine the
reason (hot day, driving up a steep
hill, etc.).
If your vehicle overheats, you should
take immediate action. The only
indication may be the temperature
gauge climbing to or above the red
mark. Or you may see steam or
spray coming from under the hood.

Do not open the hood if steam
is coming out.
1. Safely pull to the side of the road.
Put the transmission in neutral
(manual) or Park (automatic), and
set the parking brake. Turn off all
accessories, and turn on the
hazard warning lights.
2. If you see steam and/or spray
coming from under the hood, turn
off the engine. Wait until you see
no more signs of steam or spray,
then open the hood.

4. If the temperature gauge stays at
the red mark, turn off the engine.
5. Look for any obvious coolant leaks,
such as a split radiator hose.
Everything is still extremely hot,
so use caution. If you find a leak, it
must be repaired before you
continue driving (see Emergency
Towing on page 415 ).

CONTINUED

403

2011 Accord Sedan

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Driving with the temperature gauge
pointer at the red mark can cause
serious damage to the engine.

Steam and spray from an
overheated engine can
seriously scald you.

3. If you do not see steam or spray,
leave the engine running and
watch the temperature gauge. If
the high heat is due to overloading,
the engine should start to cool
down almost immediately. If it
does, wait until the temperature
gauge comes down to the midpoint,
then continue driving.

10/06/18 16:34:28 31TA5630_409

If the Engine Overheats
6. If you do not find an obvious leak,
check the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank. Add coolant
if the level is below the MIN mark.
7. If there was no coolant in the
reserve tank, you may need to add
coolant to the radiator. Let the
engine cool down until the pointer
reaches the middle of the temperature gauge, or lower, before checking the radiator.

Removing the radiator cap
while the engine is hot can
cause the coolant to spray out,
seriously scalding you.

8. Using gloves or a large heavy
cloth, turn the radiator cap
counterclockwise, without
pushing down, to the first stop.
After the pressure releases,
push down on the cap, and turn it
until it comes off.
9. Start the engine, and set the
temperature to maximum heat
(climate control to AUTO at
‘‘
’’). Add coolant to the
radiator up to the base of the filler
neck. If you do not have the
proper coolant mixture available,
you can add plain water.
Remember to have the cooling
system drained and refilled with
the proper mixture as soon as
you can.

Always let the engine and
radiator cool down before
removing the radiator cap.

404

2011 Accord Sedan

10.Put the radiator cap back on
tightly. Run the engine, and check
the temperature gauge. If it goes
back to the red mark, the engine
needs repair (see Emergency
Towing on page 415 ).
11.If the temperature stays normal,
check the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank. If it has
gone down, add coolant to the
MAX mark. Put the cap back
on tightly.

10/06/18 16:34:37 31TA5630_410

Low Oil Pressure Indicator, Charging System Indicator
Low Oil Pressure
Indicator
This indicator should never come on
when the engine is running. If it
starts flashing or stays on, the oil
pressure has dropped very low or
lost pressure. Serious engine
damage is possible, and you should
take immediate action.

2. Let the vehicle sit for a minute.
Open the hood, and check the oil
level (see page 302 ). An engine
very low on oil can lose pressure
during cornering and other driving
maneuvers.
3. If necessary, add oil to bring the
level back to the full mark on the
dipstick (see page 352 ).
4. Start the engine and watch the oil
pressure indicator. If it does not go
out within 10 seconds, turn off the
engine. There is a mechanical
problem that needs to be repaired
before you can continue driving
(see Emergency Towing on page
415 ).

Charging System
Indicator
If the charging system indicator
comes on brightly when the engine
is running, the battery is not being
charged.
Immediately turn off all electrical
accessories. Try not to use other
electrically operated controls such as
the power windows. Keep the engine
running; starting the engine will
discharge the battery rapidly.
Go to a service station or garage
where you can get technical
assistance.

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Running the engine with low oil
pressure can cause serious mechanical
damage almost immediately. Turn of f
the engine as soon as you can saf ely get
the vehicle stopped.

1. Safely pull off the road, and shut
off the engine. Turn on the hazard
warning lights.

405

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:34:44 31TA5630_411

Malfunction Indicator Lamp
If this indicator comes on
while driving, it means one
of the engine’s emissions control
systems may have a problem. Even
though you may feel no difference in
your vehicle’s performance, it can
reduce your fuel economy and cause
increased emissions. Continued
operation may cause serious damage.
If you have recently refueled your
vehicle, the indicator coming on
could be due to a loose or missing
fuel fill cap. Tighten the cap until it
clicks at least once. Tightening the
cap will not turn the indicator off
immediately; it can take several days
of normal driving.

If the indicator comes on repeatedly,
even though it may go off as you
continue driving, have your vehicle
checked by a dealer as soon as
possible.

If you keep driving with the
malf unction indicator lamp on, you can
damage your vehicle’s emissions
controls and engine. Those repairs may
not be covered by your vehicle’s
warranties.
If your vehicle has an automatic
transmission, the malfunction
indicator lamp may also come on
with the ‘‘D’’ indicator.
Readiness Codes
Your vehicle has certain ‘‘readiness
codes’’ that are part of the on-board
diagnostics for the emissions
systems. In some states, part of the
emissions testing is to make sure

406

2011 Accord Sedan

these codes are set. If they are not
set, the test cannot be completed.
If the battery in your vehicle has
been disconnected or gone dead,
these codes may be erased. It
can take several days of
driving under various
conditions to set the codes again.
To check if they are set, turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position, without starting the engine.
The malfunction indicator lamp will
come on for 20 seconds. If it then
goes off, the readiness codes are set.
If it blinks five times, the readiness
codes are not set. If possible, do not
take your vehicle for an emissions
test until the readiness codes are set.
Refer to Emissions Testing for
more information (see page 433 ).

10/06/18 16:34:51 31TA5630_412

Brake System Indicator
The brake system
indicator normally
comes on when
you turn the ignition switch to the
ON (II) position, and as a reminder
to check the parking brake. It will
stay on if you do not fully release the
parking brake.
U.S.

Canada

Slow down by shifting to a lower
gear, and pull to the side of the road
when it is safe. Because of the long
distance needed to stop, it is
hazardous to drive the vehicle. You
should have it towed and repaired as
soon as possible (see Emergency
Towing on page 415 ).
If you must drive the vehicle a short
distance in this condition, drive
slowly and carefully.
If the ABS indicator and the VSA
system indicator come on with the
brake system indicator, have your
vehicle inspected by your dealer
immediately.

If the fluid level is low, take your
vehicle to a dealer, and have the
brake system inspected for leaks or
worn brake pads.

407

2011 Accord Sedan

Taking Care of the Unexpected

If the brake system indicator comes
on while driving, the brake fluid level
is probably low. Press lightly on the
brake pedal to see if it feels normal.
If it does, check the brake fluid level
the next time you stop at a service
station (see page 362 ).

However, if the brake pedal does not
feel normal, you should take
immediate action. A problem in one
part of the system’s dual circuit
design will still give you braking
at two wheels. You will feel the
brake pedal go down much farther
beforethe vehicle begins to slow
down, and you will have to press
harder on the pedal.

10/06/18 16:34:58 31TA5630_413

Fuses
INTERIOR (Driver’s side)

INTERIOR (Passenger’s side)

UNDER-HOOD

NOTCH
FUSE BOX

FUSE LABEL

The vehicle’s fuses are contained in
three fuse boxes.
The driver’s side interior fuse box is
under the dashboard on the driver’s
side. The fuse label is attached to the
side panel.

TAB

The passenger’s side interior fuse
box is on the lower passenger’s side
panel. To remove the fuse box lid,
put your finger in the notch on the
lid, and pull it upward slightly, then
pull it toward you and take it out of
its hinges.

408

2011 Accord Sedan

The under-hood fuse box is on the
driver’s side. To open it, push the
tabs as shown.

10/06/18 16:35:07 31TA5630_414

Fuses
Checking and Replacing Fuses
If something electrical in your
vehicle stops working, the first thing
you should check for is a blown fuse.
Determine from the chart on pages
412 , 413 and 414 , or the diagram on
the fuse box lid or the fuse label,
which fuse or fuses control that
component. Check those fuses first,
but check all the fuses before
deciding that a blown fuse is not the
cause. Replace any blown fuses and
check if the device works.

BLOWN

3. Check each of the large fuses in
the under-hood fuse box by
looking at the wire inside.
Removing these fuses requires a
Phillips-head screwdriver.

BLOWN

Also check the combined fuse box in
the under-hood fuse box.

2. On the under-hood and passenger’s
side interior fuse boxes, remove
the cover from each fuse box.

CONTINUED

409

2011 Accord Sedan

Taking Care of the Unexpected

1. Turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position. Make sure the
headlights and all other
accessories are off.

FUSE

10/06/18 16:35:13 31TA5630_415

Fuses

BLOWN

FUSE PULLER

4. Check the smaller fuses in the
under-hood fuse box and all the
fuses in the interior fuse boxes by
pulling out each one with the fuse
puller provided on the back of the
under-hood fuse box cover.

5. Look for a blown wire inside the
fuse. If it is blown, replace it with
one of the spare fuses of the same
rating or lower.

410

2011 Accord Sedan

SPARE FUSES

Your vehicle has spare fuses on the
back of the under-hood fuse box
cover.

10/06/18 16:35:17 31TA5630_416

Fuses
If you cannot drive the vehicle
without fixing the problem, and you
do not have a spare fuse, take a fuse
of the same rating or a lower rating
from one of the other circuits. Make
sure you can do without that circuit
temporarily (such as the accessory
power socket).
If you replace the blown fuse with a
spare fuse that has a lower rating, it
might blow out again. This does not
indicate that anything is wrong.
Replace the fuse with one of the
correct rating as soon as you can.

Replacing a f use with one that has a
higher rating greatly increases the
chances of damaging the electrical
system. If you do not have a
replacement f use with the proper rating
f or the circuit, install one with a lower
rating.

Taking Care of the Unexpected

6. If the replacement fuse of the
same rating blows in a short time,
there is probably a serious
electrical problem with your
vehicle. Leave the blown fuse in
that circuit, and have your vehicle
checked by a qualified technician.

411

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:35:26 31TA5630_417

Fuse Locations
No. Amps.

UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX

No. Amps.
1 − 1＊1 100 A
1 − 1＊2 120 A
1 − 2 40 A
−
2−1
2 − 2 40 A
2 − 3 30 A
2 − 4 (40 A)
−
2−5

Circuits Protected
Battery
Battery
Passenger’s Side Fuse Box
Not Used
ABS/VSA
ABS/VSA Motor
Passenger’s Side Fuse Box
Not Used

No. Amps.

Circuits Protected

−
2−6
3 − 1＊1
−
3 − 1＊2 30 A
3 − 2 30 A
3 − 3 30 A
3 − 4 30 A
3 − 5 (60 A)
3 − 6 30 A

Not Used
Not Used
Sub Fan Motor
Wiper Motor
Main Fan Motor
Driver’s Side Light Main
Driver’s Side Fuse Box
Passenger’s Side Light Main

3−7
3−8
4
5 ＊1
5 ＊2
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19＊1
19＊2
20
21

(40 A)
50 A
40 A
20 A
−
−
−
40 A
15 A
20 A
−
−
15 A
15 A
10 A
7.5 A
15 A
15 A
−
7.5 A
7.5 A
7.5 A

Circuits Protected
Driver’s Side Fuse Box
IG Main
Rear Defroster
Sub Fan Motor
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Heater Motor
Hazard
Horn, Stop
Not Used
Not Used
IG Coil
FI Sub
Back Up
Interior Lights
FI Main
DBW
Not Used
Back Up, FI ECU
MG Clutch
Fan Relay

＊1 : 4-cylinder models
＊2 : V6 models

412

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:35:34 31TA5630_418

Fuse Locations
No. Amps.

INTERIOR FUSE BOX (Driver’s Side)

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

−
7.5 A
15 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
15 A
7.5 A

Circuits Protected
Not Used
Seat Memory＊
Washer
Wiper
Meter
ABS/VSA
ACG
STS＊

No. Amps.
9
10
11
12

20 A
10 A
10 A
7.5 A

13
14
15

−
10 A
7.5 A

Circuits Protected
Fuel Pump
VB SOL ＊
SRS
ODS (Occupant Detection
System)
Not Used
ACM＊
Daytime Running Lights

7.5 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
15 A
20 A
10 A
10 A
10 A

28
29
30
31

10 A
7.5 A
10 A
−

＊:

Circuits Protected
A/C
Accessory, Key, Lock
Accessory
Driver’s Power Seat Sliding＊
Moonroof ＊
Driver’s Power Seat Reclining＊
Rear Left Power Window
Front Accessory Power Socket
Driver’s Power Window
Driver’s Side Door Lock
Left Front Fog Light＊
Left Side Small Lights
(Exterior)
Left Headlight High Beam
TPMS
Left Headlight Low Beam
Not Used

If equipped

413

2011 Accord Sedan

Taking Care of the Unexpected

No. Amps.

16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

10/06/18 16:35:43 31TA5630_419

Fuse Locations
No. Amps.

INTERIOR FUSE BOX (Passenger’s Side)

16
17
18
19
20
21
22
＊:

No. Amps.
1
2

10 A
10 A

3
4
5
6
7
8

10 A
10 A
−
7.5 A
−
20 A

Circuits Protected
Right Headlight High Beam
Right Side Small Lights
(Exterior)
Right Front Fog Light＊
Right Headlight Low Beam
Not Used
Interior Lights
Not Used
Front Passenger’s Power
Seat Reclining＊

No. Amps.
9

20 A

10
11
12

10 A
20 A
15 A

20 A

14
15

−
20 A

Circuits Protected
Front Passenger’s Power
Seat Sliding＊
Right Side Door Lock
Rear Right Power Window
Rear Accessory Power
Socket
Front Passenger’s Power
Window
Not Used
Premium AMP＊

414

2011 Accord Sedan

−
−
10 A
15 A
−
−
−
If equipped

Circuits Protected
Not Used
Not Used
Lumbar Support＊
Seat Heater＊
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used

10/06/18 16:35:56 31TA5630_420

Emergency Towing
If your vehicle needs to be towed,
call a professional towing service or
organization. Never tow your vehicle
with just a rope or chain. It is very
dangerous.
There are two ways to tow your
vehicle:
Flat-bed Equipment − The operator
loads your vehicle on the back of a
truck. This is the best way to
transport your vehicle.

Manual transmission:

Shift the transmission to neutral.
Leave the ignition switch in the
ACCESSORY (I) position so the
steering wheel does not lock.
Release the parking brake.
Automatic transmission:

Start the engine.

Improper towing preparation will
damage the transmission. Follow the
above procedure exactly. If you cannot
shif t the transmission or start the
engine (automatic transmission), your
vehicle must be transported with the
f ront wheels of f the ground.
With the front wheels on the ground,
do not tow the vehicle more than 50
miles (80 km), and keep the speed
below 35 mph (55 km/h).

Shift to the D position and hold for
5 seconds, then to N.
Turn off the engine.
Leave the ignition switch in the
ACCESSORY (I) position so the
steering wheel does not lock.
Release the parking brake.
CONTINUED

415

2011 Accord Sedan

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Wheel-lift Equipment − The tow
truck uses two pivoting arms that go
under the front tires and lift them off
the ground. The rear tires remain on
the ground. This is an acceptable
way to tow your vehicle.

If, due to damage, your vehicle must
be towed with the front wheels on
the ground, do this:

10/06/18 16:35:59 31TA5630_421

Emergency Towing

Trying to lif t or tow your vehicle by the
bumpers will cause serious damage.
The bumpers are not designed to
support the vehicle’s weight.

The steering system can be damaged if
the steering wheel is locked. Leave the
ignition switch in the ACCESSORY (I)
position, and make sure the steering
wheel turns f reely bef ore you begin
towing.

416

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:36:03 31TA5630_422

Technical Information
The diagrams in this section give
you the dimensions and capacities of
your vehicle and the locations of the
identification numbers. It also
includes information you should
know about your vehicle’s tires and
emissions control systems.

Identification Numbers ................. 418
Specifications
(4-cylinder models) ................... 420
Specifications
(V6 models) ................................ 422
DOT Tire Quality Grading
(U.S. Vehicles) ........................... 424
Tire Labeling .................................. 426
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)−Required Federal
Explanation............................. 428
Emissions Controls........................ 430
Three Way Catalytic
Converters .................................. 432
Emissions Testing ......................... 433

Technical Information

417

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:36:07 31TA5630_423

Identification Numbers
Your vehicle has several identifying
numbers in various places.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)

The vehicle identification number
(VIN) is the 17-digit number your
dealer uses to register your vehicle
for warranty purposes. It is also
necessary for licensing and insuring
your vehicle. The easiest place to
find the VIN is on a plate fastened to
the top of the dashboard. You can
see it by looking through the
windshield on the driver’s side. It is
also on the certification label
attached to the driver’s doorjamb,
and is stamped on the engine
compartment bulkhead. The VIN is
also provided in bar code on the
certification label.

CERTIFICATION LABEL

418

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:36:12 31TA5630_424

Identification Numbers
The engine number is stamped on
the front of the engine block.
The transmission number is on a
label on top of the transmission.

4-cylinder models

ENGINE NUMBER

AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
NUMBER

MANUAL TRANSMISSION NUMBER
V6 models

Technical Information

ENGINE NUMBER

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NUMBER

419

2011 Accord Sedan

10/07/09 15:58:41 31TA5630_425

Specifications (4-cylinder models)
Dimensions
Length
Width
Height
Wheelbase
Track

194.1 in (4,930 mm)
72.7 in (1,847 mm)
58.1 in (1,475 mm)
110.2 in (2,800 mm)
62.6 in (1,590 mm) ＊1
62.2 in (1,580 mm) ＊2

Front/Rear

＊1 : LX, LX-P, SE

Seating Capacities
Total
Front
Rear
Capacities
Fuel tank

＊2 : EX, EX-L

Weights
Gross vehicle weight rating

Air Conditioning
Refrigerant type
Charge quantity
Lubricant type
Engine
Type

Bore x Stroke
Displacement
Compression ratio
Spark plugs (U.S.)
ULEV
PZEV
Spark plugs (Canada)

HFC-134a (R-134a)
14.1−15.9 oz (400−450 g)
ND-OIL8

Water cooled 4-stroke
DOHC i-VTEC 4-cylinder
gasoline engine
3.43 x 3.9 in (87.0 x 99.0 mm)
144 cu-in (2,354 cm )
10.5 : 1
NGK:
ILZKR7B11S
DENSO: SXU22HCR11S
DILZKR7B11GS
NGK:
ILZKR7B11S
NGK:
DENSO: SXU22HCR11S

Approx.
18.5 US gal (70.0 )

Change＊1
1.59 US gal (6.0 )
Manual
Automatic
1.64 US gal (6.2 )
Total
1.90 US gal (7.2 )
Manual
Automatic
1.96 US gal (7.4 )
Engine oil
Change＊2
Including filter 4.2 US qt (4.0 )
4.0 US qt (3.8 )
Without filter
Total
5.4 US qt (5.1 )
2.0 US qt (1.9 )
Manual
Change
2.1 US qt (2.0 )
transmission Total
fluid
Automatic
2.6 US qt (2.5 )
Change
transmission Total
6.50 US qt (6.15 )
fluid
Windshield
U.S.
2.6 US qt (2.5 )
washer
Canada
4.8 US qt (4.5 )
reservoir
＊1 : Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in the
engine
Reserve tank capacity: 0.180 US gal (0.68 )
＊2 : Excluding the oil remaining in the engine
Engine
coolant

See the certification label attached
to the driver’s doorjamb.

5
2
3

420

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:36:53 31TA5630_426

Specifications (4-cylinder models)
Lights
Headlights

High
Low
Front turn signal/parking lights
Front side marker lights
Rear turn signal lights
Back-up lights
Stop/taillights
License plate lights
High-mount brake light
Ceiling light
Spotlights
Trunk light
Front door courtesy lights
Vanity mirror lights

60 W (HB3)
51 W (HB4)
21/5 W
3 CP
21 W (Amber)
21 W
21/5 W
5W
21 W
8W
8W
5W
2 CP
1.4 W

Fuses
Interior

Driver’s side
Passenger’s side

Under-hood

Tires
Size

Front/Rear

Pressure

Spare
Front/Rear
Spare

Battery
Capacity

−
−
−
−
−
−

36 AH/5 HR
38 AH/5 HR
45 AH/20 HR
47 AH/20 HR
52 AH/5 HR ＊
65 AH/20 HR ＊

P215/60R16 94H ＊1
P225/50R17 93V ＊2
T135/80D16 101M
30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm ) ＊1
32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm ) ＊2
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

＊1 : LX, LX-P, SE
＊2 : EX, EX-L
Alignment
Toe-in
Camber

＊ : PZEV engine model, and Canadian models
Caster

Front
Rear
Front
Rear
Front

Technical Information

12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V

See page 413 or the fuse label
attached on the side panel.
See page 414 or the fuse label
attached to the inside of the fuse
box door.
See page 412 or the fuse box
cover.

0.00 in (0.0 mm)
0.08 in (2.0 mm)
0°
−1°
3°48’

421

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:37:10 31TA5630_427

Specifications (V6 models)
Dimensions
Length
Width
Height
Wheelbase
Track

Front/Rear

Weights
Gross vehicle weight rating

Air Conditioning
Refrigerant type
Charge quantity
Lubricant type
Engine
Type

Bore x Stroke
Displacement
Compression ratio
Spark plugs (U.S.)
Spark plugs (Canada)

194.3 in (4,936 mm)
72.7 in (1,847 mm)
58.1 in (1,475 mm)
110.2 in (2,800 mm)
62.2 in (1,580 mm)

See the certification label attached
to the driver’s doorjamb.

HFC-134a (R-134a)
14.1−15.9 oz (400−450 g)
ND-OIL8

Water cooled 4-stroke
SOHC i-VTEC 6-cylinder (V6)
gasoline engine
3.50 x 3.66 in (89.0 x 93.0 mm)
212 cu-in (3,471 cm )
10.5 : 1
ILZKR7B11
NGK:
DENSO: SXU22HCR11
NGK:
ILZKR7B11
DENSO: SXU22HCR11

Seating Capacities
Total
Front
Rear
Capacities
Fuel tank
Change＊1
Total
Change＊2
Including filter
Without filter
Total
Automatic
Change
transmission Total
fluid
Windshield
U.S.
washer
Canada
reservoir
Engine
coolant
Engine oil

5
2
3

Approx.
18.5 US gal (70.0 )
1.74 US gal (6.6 )
2.27 US gal (8.6 )
4.5 US qt (4.3
4.2 US qt (4.0
5.3 US qt (5.0
3.5 US qt (3.3
7.9 US qt (7.5

)
)
)
)
)

2.6 US qt (2.5 )
4.8 US qt (4.5 )

＊1 : Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in the
engine
Reserve tank capacity: 0.180 US gal (0.68 )
＊2 : Excluding the oil remaining in the engine

422

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:37:27 31TA5630_428

Specifications (V6 models)
Lights
Headlights

High
Low
Front turn signal/parking lights
Front side marker lights
Fog lights＊
Rear turn signal lights
Back-up lights
Stop/taillights
License plate lights
High-mount brake light
Ceiling light
Spotlights
Trunk light
Front door courtesy lights
Vanity mirror lights

60 W (HB3)
51 W (HB4)
21/5 W
3 CP
55 W (H11)
21 W (Amber)
21 W
21/5 W
5W
21 W
8W
8W
5W
2 CP
1.4 W

Fuses
Interior

Passenger’s side

Under-hood

Tires
Size
Pressure

Alignment
Toe-in

＊ : If equipped
Camber
12 V − 72 AH/20 HR
12 V − 60 AH/5 HR

Caster

Front/Rear
Spare
Front/Rear
Spare

Front
Rear
Front
Rear
Front

See page 413 or the fuse label
attached on the side panel.
See page 414 or the fuse label
attached to the inside of the fuse
box door.
See page 412 or the fuse box
cover.

P225/50R17 93V
T135/80D16 101M
32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

0.00 in (0.0 mm)
0.08 in (2.0 mm)
0°
−1°
3°48’

Technical Information

Battery
Capacity

Driver’s side

423

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:37:35 31TA5630_429

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
The tires on your vehicle meet all
U.S. Federal Safety Requirements.
All tires are also graded for
treadwear, traction, and temperature
performance according to
Department of Transportation
(DOT) standards. The following
explains these gradings.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall
between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For
example:
Treadwear 200
Traction AA
Temperature A

Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government
test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and onehalf (1 1/2) times as well on the
government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of
tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits,
service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.

All passenger car tires must conform
to Federal Safety Requirements in
addition to these grades.

424

2011 Accord Sedan

Traction
The traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those
grades represent the tire’s ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on
specified government test surfaces
of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction
performance.
Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
traction characteristics.

10/06/18 16:37:40 31TA5630_430

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
Warning: The temperature grade for
this tire is established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading,
either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible
tire failure.

Technical Information

Temperature
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high
temperature can cause the material
of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tire life, and excessive temperature
can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger car
tires must meet under the Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No.
109. Grades B and A represent
higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.

425

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:37:50 31TA5630_431

Tire Labeling
The tires that came on your vehicle
have a number of markings. Those
you should be aware of are described
below.
Tire Labeling Example

Tire Size

Whenever tires are replaced, they
should be replaced with tires of the
same size. Following is an example
of tire size with an explanation of
what each component means.

(1)

P225/50R17 93V
P

− Vehicle type (P indicates
passenger vehicle).

225 − Tire width in millimeters.
50 − Aspect ratio (the tire’s section
height as a percentage of its
width).
(4)

(1)
(3)

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)

− Tire construction code (R
indicates radial).

(2)

Tire Size
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Maximum Tire Pressure
Maximum Tire Load

17 − Rim diameter in inches.

426

2011 Accord Sedan

93 − Load index (a numerical code
associated with the maximum
load the tire can carry).
V

− Speed symbol (an
alphabetical code indicating
the maximum speed rating).

10/06/18 16:38:02 31TA5630_432

Tire Labeling
Tire Identification Number (TIN)

The tire identification number (TIN)
is a group of numbers and letters
that look like the following example.
TIN is located on the sidewall of the
tire.
DOT B97R FW6X 2202
DOT − This indicates that the tire
meets all requirements of
the U.S. Department of
Transportation.
B97R − Manufacturer’s
identification mark.

2202

Load Rating − Means the maximum
load that a tire is rated to carry for a
given inflation pressure.

Recommended Inflation Pressure −
The cold tire inflation pressure
recommended by the manufacturer.
Treadwear Indicators (TWI) −
Means the projections within the
principal grooves designed to give a
visual indication of the degrees of
wear of the tread.

Maximum Inflation Pressure − The
maximum tire air pressure that the
tire can hold.
Maximum Load Rating − Means the
load rating for a tire at the maximum
permissible inflation pressure for
that tire.

Technical Information

FW6X − Tire type code.

Glossary of Tire Terminology
Cold Tire Pressure − The tire air
pressure when the vehicle has been
parked for at least three hours or
driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km).

− Date of manufacture.
Year
Week

427

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:38:09 31TA5630_433

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) − Required Federal Explanation
Each tire, including the spare (if
provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated to
the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label.

As an added safety feature, your
vehicle has been equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure
telltale

Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.

(If your vehicle has tires of a
different size than the size indicated
on the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)

when one or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated.

Please note that the TPMS is not a
substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s
responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS low tire
pressure telltale.

Accordingly, when the low tire
pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them to
the proper pressure.

428

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:38:14 31TA5630_434

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) − Required Federal Explanation
Your vehicle has also been equipped
with a TPMS malfunction indicator
to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is provided by
a separate telltale, which displays the
symbol ‘‘TPMS’’ when illuminated.

Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or
alternate tires and wheels allow the
TPMS to continue to function
properly.

When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated,
the system may not be able to detect
or signal low tire pressure as
intended.

Technical Information

TPMS malfunctions may occur for a
variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly.

429

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:38:22 31TA5630_435

Emissions Controls
The burning of gasoline in your
vehicle’s engine produces several byproducts. Some of these are carbon
monoxide (CO), oxides of nitrogen
(NOx), and hydrocarbons (HC).
Gasoline evaporating from the tank
also produces hydrocarbons. Controlling the production of NOx, CO,
and HC is important to the environment. Under certain conditions of
sunlight and climate, NOx and HC
react to form photochemical ‘‘smog.’’
Carbon monoxide does not contribute to smog creation, but it is a
poisonous gas.

The Clean Air Act
The United States Clean Air Act＊
sets standards for automobile
emissions. It also requires that
automobile manufacturers explain to
owners how their emissions controls
work and what to do to maintain
them. This section summarizes how
the emissions controls work.
＊
In Canada, Honda vehicles comply
with the Canadian emission
requirements, as specified in an
agreement with Environment
Canada, at the time they are
manufactured.

Crankcase Emissions Control
System
Your vehicle has a positive
crankcase ventilation system. This
keeps gasses that build up in the
engine’s crankcase from going into
the atmosphere. The positive
crankcase ventilation valve routes
them from the crankcase back to the

430

2011 Accord Sedan

intake manifold. They are then
drawn into the engine and burned.
Evaporative Emissions Control
System
As gasoline evaporates in the fuel
tank, an evaporative emissions
control canister filled with charcoal
adsorbs the vapor. It is stored in this
canister while the engine is off. After
the engine is started and warmed up,
the vapor is drawn into the engine
and burned during driving.
Onboard Refueling Vapor
Recovery
The onboard refueling vapor
recovery (ORVR) system captures
the fuel vapors during refueling. The
vapors are adsorbed in a canister
filled with activated carbon. While
driving, the fuel vapors are drawn
into the engine and burned off.

10/06/18 16:38:31 31TA5630_436

Emissions Controls
Exhaust Emissions Controls
The exhaust emissions controls
include three or four systems:
PGM-FI, ignition timing control,
exhaust gas recirculation (6-cylinder
models), and three way catalytic
converter. These systems work
together to control the engine’s
combustion and minimize the
amount of HC, CO, and NOx that
come out the tailpipe. The exhaust
emissions control systems are
separate from the crankcase and
evaporative emissions control
systems.
PGM-FI System

Ignition Timing Control System

This system constantly adjusts the
ignition timing, reducing the amount
of HC, CO, and NOx produced.
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR)
System
V6 models

The exhaust gas recirculation (EGR)
system takes some of the exhaust
gas and routes it back into the intake
manifold. Adding exhaust gas to the
air/fuel mixture reduces the amount
of NOx produced when the fuel is
burned.

Three Way Catalytic Converter

The three way catalytic converter is
in the exhaust system. Through
chemical reactions, it converts HC,
CO, and NOx in the engine’s exhaust
to carbon dioxide (CO2), nitrogen
(N2), and water vapor.
Replacement Parts
The emissions control systems are
designed and certified to work together in reducing emissions to
levels that comply with the Clean Air
Act. To make sure the emissions
remain low, you should use only new
Honda replacement parts or their
equivalent for repairs. Using lower
quality parts may increase the
emissions from your vehicle.
The emissions control systems are
covered by warranties separate
from the rest of your vehicle.
Read your warranty manual for
more information.

431

2011 Accord Sedan

Technical Information

The PGM-FI system uses sequential
multiport fuel injection. It has three
subsystems: air intake, engine
control, and fuel control. The
powertrain control module (PCM) in
automatic transmission vehicles or
the engine control module (ECM) in
manual transmission vehicles uses
various sensors to determine how

much air is going into the engine. It
then controls how much fuel to inject
under all operating conditions.

10/06/18 16:38:38 31TA5630_437

Three Way Catalytic Converters
The three way catalytic converters
contain precious metals that serve as
catalysts, promoting chemical
reactions to convert the exhaust
gasses without affecting the metals.
The catalytic converters are referred
to as three-way catalysts, since they
act on HC, CO, and NOx.
Replacement units must be original
Honda parts or their equivalent.
The three way catalytic converters
must operate at a high temperature
for the chemical reactions to take
place. They can set on fire any
combustible materials that come
near them. Park your vehicle away
from high grass, dry leaves, or other
flammables.

THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTERS
4-cylinder models

THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTERS
V6 models

Defective three way catalytic
converters contribute to air pollution,
and can impair your engine’s
performance. Follow these
guidelines to protect your vehicle’s
three way catalytic converters.

Keep the engine well maintained.

Always use unleaded gasoline.
Even a small amount of leaded
gasoline can contaminate the
catalyst metals, making the three
way catalytic converters
ineffective.

432

2011 Accord Sedan

Have your vehicle diagnosed and
repaired if it is misfiring, backfiring, stalling, or otherwise not
running properly.

10/06/18 16:38:46 31TA5630_438

Emissions Testing
Testing of Readiness Codes
If you take your vehicle for an
emissions test shortly after the
battery has been disconnected or
gone dead, it may not pass the test.
This is because of certain ‘‘readiness
codes’’ that must be set in the onboard diagnostics for the emissions
systems. These codes are erased
when the battery is disconnected,
and set again only after several days
of driving under a variety of
conditions.

If the testing facility determines that
the readiness codes are not set, you
will be requested to return at a later
date to complete the test. If you must
get the vehicle retested within the
next two or three days, you can
condition the vehicle for retesting by
doing the following.
1. Make sure the gas tank is nearly,
but not completely, full (around
3/4).
2. Make sure the vehicle has been
parked with the engine off for 6
hours or more.

4. Without touching the accelerator
pedal, start the engine, and let it
idle for 20 seconds.
5. Keep the vehicle in Park
(automatic) or neutral (manual).
Increase the engine speed to 2,000
rpm, and hold it there until the
temperature gauge rises to at least
1/4 of the scale (about 3 minutes).
6. Without touching the accelerator
pedal, let the engine idle for 20
seconds.

CONTINUED

433

2011 Accord Sedan

Technical Information

3. Make sure the ambient
temperature is between 40° and
95°F (4° and 35°C).

10/06/18 16:38:52 31TA5630_439

Emissions Testing
7. Select a nearby lightly traveled
major highway where you can
maintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph
(80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20
minutes. Drive on the highway in
D (automatic) or 5th (manual). Do
not use the cruise control. When
traffic allows, drive for 90 seconds
without moving the accelerator
pedal. (Vehicle speed may vary
slightly; this is okay.) If you cannot
do this for a continuous 90
seconds because of traffic
conditions, drive for at least 30
seconds, then repeat it two more
times (for a total of 90 seconds).

8. Then drive in city/suburban
traffic for at least 10 minutes.
When traffic conditions allow, let
the vehicle coast for several
seconds without using the
accelerator pedal or the brake
pedal.
9. Make sure the vehicle has been
parked with the engine off for 30
minutes.
If the testing facility determines the
readiness codes are still not set, see
your dealer.

434

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:38:55 31TA5630_440

Warranty and Customer Relations
Customer Service Information..... 436
Warranty Coverages ..................... 437
Reporting Safety Defects.............. 438
Authorized Manuals ...................... 439
Warranty and Customer Relations

435

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:39:02 31TA5630_441

Customer Service Information
Honda dealership personnel are
trained professionals. They should
be able to answer all your questions.
If you encounter a problem that your
dealership does not solve to your
satisfaction, please discuss it with
the dealership’s management. The
service manager or general manager
can help. Almost all problems are
solved in this way.

Canadian Owners:

If you are dissatisfied with the
decision made by the dealership’s
management, contact Honda
Customer Service.

In Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin
Islands:

Your name, address, and telephone number

Vortex Motor Corp.
Bella International
P.O. Box 190816
San Juan, PR 00919-0816

A detailed description of the
problem

U.S. Owners:
American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
Automobile Customer Service
Mail Stop 500-2N-7A
1919 Torrance Boulevard
Torrance, California 90501-2746

Honda Canada Inc.
Customer Relations
180 Honda Boulevard
Markham, ON
L6C 0H9
Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9
Fax: 1-877-939-0909
E-Mail: ch_honda_cr@ch.honda.com

Tel: (787) 620-7546

Tel: (800) 999-1009

436

2011 Accord Sedan

When you call or write, please give
us this information:
Vehicle Identification Number
(see page 418 )
Name and address of the dealer
who services your vehicle
Date of purchase
Odometer reading of your vehicle

Name of the dealer who sold the
vehicle to you

10/06/18 16:39:11 31TA5630_442

Warranty Coverages
U.S. Owners
Your new vehicle is covered by these
warranties:

Emissions Control Systems Defects
Warranty and Emissions
Performance Warranty − these two

warranties cover your vehicle’s
emissions control systems. Time,
mileage, and coverage are
conditional. Please read your
warranty booklet for exact
information.

Rust Perforation Limited Warranty

− all exterior body panels are
covered for rust-through from the
inside for the specified time period
with no mileage limit.
Accessory Limited Warranty −

Honda accessories are covered
under this warranty. Time and
mileage limits depend on the type of
accessory and other factors. Please
read your warranty booklet for
details.
Replacement Parts Limited
Warranty − covers all Honda

replacement parts against defects in
materials and workmanship.

Replacement Battery Limited
Warranty − provides prorated

coverage for a replacement battery
purchased from your dealer.
Replacement Muffler Lifetime
Limited Warranty − provides

coverage for as long as the purchaser of the muffler owns the
vehicle.
Restrictions and exclusions apply to
all these warranties. Please read the
2011 Honda warranty information
booklet that came with your vehicle
for precise information on warranty
coverages. Your vehicle’s original
tires are covered by their
manufacturer. Tire warranty
information is in a separate booklet.
Canadian Owners
Please refer to the 2011 warranty
manual that came with your vehicle.

437

2011 Accord Sedan

Warranty and Customer Relations

New Vehicle Limited Warranty −
covers your new vehicle, except for
the emissions control systems and
accessories, against defects in
materials and workmanship.

Seat Belt Limited Warranty − a seat
belt that fails to function properly is
covered by a limited warranty.
Please read your warranty booklet
for details.

10/06/18 16:39:16 31TA5630_443

Reporting Safety Defects
In the US
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which
could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to
notifying American Honda Motor Co., Inc.

In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could
cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform Honda Canada Inc. and you may also
inform Transport Canada.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your dealer, or
American Honda Motor Co., Inc.

If Transport Canada receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect
exists in a group of vehicles, it may lead to a recall and
remedy campaign. However, Transport Canada cannot
become involved in individual problems between you,
your dealer, or Honda Canada Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety
Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153);
go to http://www.saf ercar.gov ;

To contact Transport Canada’s Defect Investigations and
Recalls Division, you may call 1-800-333-0510. For more
information on reporting safety defects or about motor
vehicle safety, go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsaf ety.

or write to:
Administrator,
NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE.,
Washington, DC 20590.
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.saf ercar.gov.

438

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:39:25 31TA5630_444

Authorized Manuals
Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)
The publications shown below can be purchased from Helm
Incorporated. You can order by phone or online:
Call Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356 (credit card orders only)
Go online at www.helminc.com
If you are interested in other years or models, contact Helm Inc.
at 1-800-782-4356.
Publication
Form Number
61TA005

61TA005EL
61TA030
31TA5630
31TA5830
31TA5M30
31TA5Q30
HON-R

2008-2011 Honda Accord 2/4 door L4
Service Manual Base Book
2008-2011 Honda Accord 2/4 door V6
Service Manual Supplement
2011 Honda 2/4 Door L4/V6
Electrical Troubleshooting Manual
2008 Honda 2/4 door Body Repair Manual
2011 Honda Accord 4-door Owner’s Manual
2011 Honda Accord
Navigation System Owner’s Manual
2011 Honda Accord Honda Service History
2011 Honda Accord
4-door Technology Reference Guide
Order Form for Previous Years-Indicate
Year and Model Desired

Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:
Complements the Service Manual by providing in-depth
troubleshooting information for each electrical circuit
in your vehicle.
Body Repair Manual:
Describes the procedures involved in the replacement
of damaged body parts.

439

2011 Accord Sedan

Authorized Manuals

61TA601

Form Description

Service Manual:
Covers maintenance and recommended procedures for
repair to engine and chassis components. It is written
for the journeyman mechanic, but it is simple enough
for most mechanically inclined owners to understand.

10/06/18 16:39:33 31TA5630_446

Index
A

B
Battery
Charging System
Indicator............................ 56, 405
Jump Starting ............................. 400
Maintenance ............................... 388
Specifications ..................... 421, 423
Before Driving ............................... 295
Belts, Seat ..................................... 8, 18
Beverage Holders .......................... 114
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink ......... 270
Booster Seats ................................... 48
Brakes
Anti-lock System (ABS) ............ 327
Break-in, New Linings .............. 296
Bulb Replacement ..................... 370
Fluid ............................................ 362
Parking ........................................ 112

System Indicator .................. 57, 407
Wear Indicators ......................... 326
Braking System.............................. 326
Break-in, New Vehicle .................. 296
Brightness Control, Instruments ... 72
Bulb Replacement
Back-up Lights ........................... 370
Brake Lights............................... 370
Fog Lights .................................. 372
Front Parking Lights ................. 368
Headlights .................................. 365
High-mount Brake Light .......... 371
Rear Lights ................................. 370
Specifications ..................... 421, 423
Turn Signal Lights ............. 368, 370
Bulbs, Halogen ....................... 365, 372

C
Capacities Chart .................... 420, 422
Carbon Monoxide Hazard .............. 51
Carrying Cargo .............................. 309
CAUTION, Explanation of .............. iii
CD Care .......................................... 245
CONTINUED

2011 Accord Sedan

INDEX

Accessories..................................... 307
ACCESSORY
(Ignition Key Position)................ 78
Accessory Power Sockets............. 114
Active Head Restraints ................... 96
Additives, Engine Oil..................... 353
Advanced Airbags............................ 25
Airbag (SRS) ................................ 9, 21
Airbag System Components ........... 21
Air Conditioning System....... 122, 128
Usage .................................. 125, 129
Air Pressure, Tires ................ 380, 381
Antifreeze ....................................... 356
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
Indicator ................................ 58, 327
Operation .................................... 327
Anti-theft, Audio System............... 253
Anti-theft Steering Column Lock .. 78
Audio System ................................. 136
Auto Door Locking/Unlocking ...... 80
Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners .... 19
Automatic Speed Control.............. 263
Automatic Transmission............... 320
Capacity, Fluid ................... 420, 422

Shifting ........................................ 320
Shift Lever Position
Indicators ................................ 320
Shift Lever Positions ................. 320
Shift Lock Release ..................... 323
Auxiliary Input Jack ....................... 252

10/06/18 16:39:37 31TA5630_447

Index
CD Changer ........................... 165, 214
CD Player........................................ 144
Certification Label ......................... 418
Chains ............................................. 386
Changing a Flat Tire ..................... 393
Changing Oil
How to ......................................... 354
When to....................................... 343
Charging System Indicator .... 56, 405
Check Fuel Cap Message ............. 298
Checklist, Before Driving ............. 316
Child Safety ...................................... 33
Booster Seats ............................... 48
Child Seats .............................. 40, 41
Important Safety
Reminders ........................... 33-50
Infants ........................................... 38
Larger Children ........................... 47
LATCH.......................................... 42
Risks with Airbags....................... 34
Small Children.............................. 39
Tether ........................................... 46
Warning Labels ............................ 52
Where Should a Child Sit ........... 34
Child Seats ........................................ 33
LATCH.......................................... 42

Tether Anchorage Points ........... 46
Childproof Door Locks ................... 86
Cleaning the Seat Belts ................. 375
Climate Control System ................ 128
On/Off Button ........................... 130
Clock ............................................... 254
Clutch Fluid .................................... 363
CO in the Exhaust ................... 51, 432
Cold Weather, Starting in ............. 317
Compact Spare ............................... 392
Compass.......................................... 259
Console Compartment .................. 115
Consumer Information.................. 436
Controls, Instruments and .............. 53
Coolant
Adding ......................................... 356
Checking ..................................... 303
Proper Solution .......................... 356
Temperature Gauge .................... 66
Crankcase Emissions Control
System......................................... 430
Cruise Control Indicator ................. 62
Cruise Control Operation ............. 263
Customer Service .......................... 436

2011 Accord Sedan

D
DANGER, Explanation of ................ iii
Dashboard .................................... 3, 54
Daytime Running Lights........... 61, 71
Daytime Running Lights
Indicator ........................................ 61
Dead Battery .................................. 400
Defects, Reporting Safety............. 438
Defogger, Rear Window ................. 74
Defrosting the Windows....... 126, 132
Dimensions ............................. 420, 422
Dimming the Headlights ................ 69
Dipstick
Automatic Transmission........... 359
Engine Oil ................................... 302
Directional Signals ........................... 69
Disc Brake Wear Indicators ......... 326
Disposal of Used Oil ...................... 355
Doors
Auto Door Lock ........................... 80
Auto Door Unlock........................ 83
Childproof Door Locks ............... 86
Locking and Unlocking ............... 79
DOT Tire Quality Grading ........... 424

10/06/18 16:39:42 31TA5630_448

Index
Downshifting, Manual
Transmission .............................. 318
Driver and Passenger Safety ............ 5
Driving ............................................ 315
Economy ..................................... 304
Driving Position Memory
System......................................... 101
Dual Temperature Control ........... 133
Dust and Pollen Filter ................... 376

F
Fan, Interior ........................... 123, 131
Features .......................................... 121
Filling the Fuel Tank ..................... 297
Filters
Dust and Pollen ......................... 376
Oil ................................................ 354
Flashers, Hazard Warning.............. 73
Flat Tire, Changing a .................... 393
Floor Mats ...................................... 375
Fluids
Automatic Transmission........... 359
Brake ........................................... 362
Clutch .......................................... 363
Manual Transmission ............... 361
Power Steering........................... 363
Windshield Washer ................... 358
Fog Lights......................................... 72
Folding Rear Seat ............................ 97
Four-way Flashers ........................... 73
Front Airbags ............................... 9, 23
INDEX

Economy, Fuel ............................... 304
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
System......................................... 329
Emergencies................................... 391
Battery, Jump Starting .............. 400
Brake System Indicator ............ 407
Changing a Flat Tire ................. 393
Charging System Indicator ...... 405
Hazard Warning Flashers .......... 73
Jump Starting ............................. 400
Checking the Fuses................... 408
Low Oil Pressure Indicator ...... 405
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .... 406
Overheated Engine ................... 403

Towing ........................................ 415
Emergency Brake .......................... 112
Emergency Flashers ....................... 73
Emergency Towing ....................... 415
Emissions Controls........................ 430
Emissions Testing ......................... 433
Engine
Adding Engine Coolant ............. 356
Coolant Temperature Gauge ..... 66
If It Won’t Start .......................... 398
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .... 406
Oil Life Indicator........................ 343
Oil Pressure Indicator ............... 405
Oil, What Kind to Use ............... 352
Overheating................................ 403
Specifications ..................... 420, 422
Speed Limiter ..................... 319, 323
Starting........................................ 317
V6 ................................................. 422
4-cylinder .................................... 420
Engine Speed Limiter ........... 319, 323
Ethanol in Gasoline ....................... 297
Evaporative Emissions Controls .. 430
Exhaust Fumes ................................ 51
Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat
Belts by ......................................... 16

CONTINUED

III

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:39:48 31TA5630_449

Index
Fuel .................................................. 296
Check Fuel Cap Message ......... 298
Fill Door and Cap....................... 297
Gauge ............................................ 66
Low Fuel Indicator ...................... 61
Octane Requirement ................. 296
Oxygenated ................................ 297
Tank, Refueling ......................... 297
Fuel Economy ................................ 304
Fuel Economy (ECO) Indicator ..... 59
Fuses, Checking the ...................... 408

G
Gas Mileage, Improving ....... 304, 305
Gasoline .......................................... 296
Gauge ............................................ 66
Low Fuel Indicator ...................... 61
Octane Requirement ................. 296
Tank, Refueling ......................... 297
Gas Station Procedures................. 297
Gauges
Engine Coolant Temperature .... 66
Fuel ................................................ 66
Gearshift Lever Positions
Automatic Transmission........... 320

Manual Transmission ............... 318
Glove Box ....................................... 116
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR) .............................. 311, 335

H
Halogen Headlight Bulbs.............. 365
HandsFreeLink ............................ 270
Hazard Warning Flashers............... 73
Headlights......................................... 69
Aiming ......................................... 365
Automatic Lighting Off ............... 71
Automatic Lighting On ............... 70
Daytime Running Lights............. 71
High Beam Indicator ................... 61
Reminder Chime .......................... 69
Replacing Halogen
Bulbs ............................... 365, 372
Turning on .................................... 69
Head Restraints ......................... 13, 94
Heating and Cooling ...................... 122
Heated Mirrors .............................. 105
Heater, Seat .................................... 100
HomeLink Universal
Transceiver................................. 266

2011 Accord Sedan

Hood, Opening and Closing ......... 300
Hydraulic Clutch ............................ 363

I
Identification Number, Vehicle.... 418
Ignition
Keys............................................... 76
Switch ............................................ 78
Timing Control System ............. 431
Immobilizer System......................... 77
Important Safety Precautions .......... 6

10/06/18 16:39:54 31TA5630_450

Index
VSA Off ......................................... 58
VSA System .................................. 58
Indicators, Instrument Panel .......... 56
Infant Restraint ................................ 38
Infant Seats ....................................... 38
Tether Anchorage Points ........... 46
Inflation, Proper Tire .................... 380
Information Display ......................... 64
Inside Mirror .................................. 104
Inspection, Tire .............................. 382
Installing a Child Seat ..................... 41
Tether Anchorage Points ........... 46
Using LATCH .............................. 42
Instrument Panel ............................. 55
Instrument Panel Brightness ......... 72
Instruments and Controls ............... 53
Interior Lights ................................ 119
Introduction ......................................... i
iPod ........................................ 176, 226

J
Jacking up the Vehicle .................. 394
Jack, Tire ........................................ 394
Jump Starting ................................. 400

K
Keys ................................................... 76

L
Label, Certification ........................ 418
Lane Change, Signaling .................. 69
Lap/Shoulder Belts ................... 14, 19
LATCH System ................................ 42
Lights
Bulb Replacement ..................... 365
Indicator ........................................ 55
Parking .......................................... 69
Turn Signal ............................. 60, 69
LOCK (Ignition Key Position) ....... 78
Locks
Anti-theft Steering Column ........ 78
Childproof Door ........................... 86
Fuel Fill Door ............................. 297
Glove Box ................................... 116
Lockout Prevention ..................... 80
Power Door .................................. 79
Trunk ............................................ 90
CONTINUED

2011 Accord Sedan

INDEX

Indicators .......................................... 56
ABS (Anti-lock Brake) ................ 58
Brake (Parking and Brake
System) ............................. 57, 407
Charging System ................. 56, 405
Cruise Control .............................. 62
Cruise Main .................................. 62
Door and Trunk Open................. 60
DRL (Daytime Running
Lights)....................................... 61
Fog Lights .................................... 62
Fuel Economy Indicator ............. 59
High Beam .................................... 61
Key (Immobilizer System) ......... 62
Lights On ...................................... 60
Low Fuel ....................................... 61
Low Oil Pressure ................. 56, 405
Low Tire Pressure ....................... 59
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .... 406
Security System ........................... 61
Side Airbag Off ............................ 57
Seat Belt ........................................ 56
SRS ................................................ 57
TPMS ............................................ 59
Turn Signal and Hazard
Warning .................................... 60

10/06/18 16:40:00 31TA5630_451

Index
Low Coolant Level ......................... 303
Low Fuel Indicator .......................... 61
Lower Gear, Downshifting to a.... 318
Low Oil Pressure Indicator .... 56, 405
Lower Anchors................................. 42
Lubricant Specifications
Chart ................................... 420, 422
Luggage, Storing (Cargo) ............ 309

Moonroof ........................................ 110
N
Neutral Gear Position.................... 321
New Vehicle Break-in ................... 296
Normal Shift Speeds...................... 319
NOTICE, Explanation of .................... i
Numbers, Identification ................ 418

M
O
Maintenance ................................... 341
Minder......................................... 343
Main Items and Sub
Items ............................... 346, 349
Owner’s Maintenance
Checks .................................... 348
Minder Indicator .......................... 62
Safety........................................... 342
Malfunction Indicator Lamp ........ 406
Manual Transmission.................... 318
Manual Transmission Fluid ......... 361
Meters, Gauges.......................... 55, 63
Methanol in Gasoline .................... 297
Mirrors, Adjusting ......................... 104
Modifications Your Vehicle .......... 308

Octane Requirement, Gasoline .... 296
Odometer .......................................... 64
Oil
Change, How to ......................... 354
Change, When to ....................... 343
Checking Engine ....................... 302
Pressure Indicator ............... 56, 405
Selecting Proper Viscosity
Chart ....................................... 353
ON (Ignition Key Position) ............ 78
Onboard Refueling Vapor
Recovery ..................................... 430
Outside Mirrors ............................. 105
Outside Temperature Indicator ..... 65

2011 Accord Sedan

Overheating, Engine ..................... 403
Owner’s Maintenance Checks ..... 348
Oxygenated Fuels.......................... 297
P
Panel Brightness Control ............... 72
Park Gear Position......................... 321
Parking ............................................ 325
Parking Brake ................................ 112
Parking Brake and Brake
System Indicator .................. 57, 407
Parking Lights.................................. 69
Parking Over Things that Burn ... 432
Passenger Airbag Off Indicator ..... 30
PGM-FI System.............................. 431
Pollen Filter .................................... 376
Power Door Locks ........................... 79
Power Seat Adjustments ................. 92
Power Socket Locations................ 113
Power Windows ............................. 106
Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts .......... 16
Protecting Adults and Teens.......... 11
Additional Safety Precautions .... 17
Advice for Pregnant Women...... 16

10/06/18 16:40:06 31TA5630_452

Index
Protecting Children ......................... 33
General Guidelines ...................... 33
Protecting Infants ........................ 38
Protecting Larger Children ........ 47
Protecting Small Children .......... 39
Using Child Seats with
Tethers...................................... 46
Using LATCH .............................. 42

S
Safety Belts................................... 8, 18
Safety Defects, Reporting............. 438
Safety Features .................................. 7
Airbags ............................................ 9
Seat Belts ........................................ 8
Safety Labels, Location of .............. 52
Safety Messages ............................... iii
Seat Belts ...................................... 8, 18
Additional Information ................ 18

Automatic Seat Belt
Tensioners ................................ 19
Cleaning ...................................... 375
Lap/Shoulder Belt ................. 14, 19
Maintenance ................................. 20
Reminder Indicator and
Beeper ................................. 18, 56
System Components.................... 18
Use During Pregnancy................ 16
Wearing a Lap/Shoulder Belt .... 19
Seats
Adjusting.................................. 92-94
Folding .......................................... 97
Heaters........................................ 100
Security System ............................. 257
Select/Reset Knob .......................... 63
Selecting a Child Seat ...................... 40
Selector Knob (Disc Changer) .... 151
Serial Number ................................ 418
Service Minder ............................... 343
Service Manual＊ ............................ 439
Service Station Procedures .......... 297
Setting the Clock ........................... 254
Shift Lever Position Indicators .... 320

＊ : U.S. only

CONTINUED

VII

2011 Accord Sedan

INDEX

Radiator Overheating .................... 403
Radio/CD Sound System .............. 136
Radio Theft Protection.................. 253
Radio, XM ............................. 159, 207
Readiness Codes ............................ 433
Rear Lights, Bulb Replacement ... 370
Rear Seat, Folding ........................... 97
Rear Ventilation ..................... 127, 135
Rear View Mirror........................... 104
Rear Window Defogger .................. 74
Reclining the Seat Backs .......... 92, 93
Recommended Shift Speeds ........ 319
Refueling ......................................... 297
Reminder Indicators ........................ 56
Remote Transmitter ........................ 86

Replacement Information
Engine Oil and Filter ................. 354
Fuses ........................................... 408
Light Bulbs ................................. 365
Timing Belt ................................. 364
Tires ............................................ 380
Wiper Blades .............................. 377
Replacing Seat Belts After a
Crash ............................................. 20
Reporting Safety Defects.............. 438
Reserve Tank, Coolant.......... 303, 356
Restraint, Child ................................ 33
Reverse Gear Position................... 321
Rotation, Tire ................................. 384

10/06/18 16:40:10 31TA5630_453

Index
Shift Lock Release ......................... 323
Side Airbags ................................. 9, 27
How Your Side Airbags Work.... 27
How the Side Airbag Off
Indicator Works ....................... 30
Side Curtain Airbags ................... 9, 29
How Your Side Curtain
Airbags Work ........................... 29
Signaling Turns ................................ 69
Snow Tires ...................................... 386
Sound System ................................. 136
Spare Tire
Inflating ....................................... 392
Specifications ..................... 421, 423
Spark Plugs............................. 420, 422
Specifications ......................... 420, 422
Speed Control ................................. 263
Speed Limiter ......................... 319, 323
Speedometer .................................... 63
SRS, Additional Information........... 21
Additional Safety Precautions .... 32
Airbag Service .............................. 31
Airbag System Components ....... 21
How the Passenger Airbag Off
Indicator Works ....................... 30

How the Side Airbag Off
Indicator Works ....................... 30
How the SRS Indicator Works ... 29
How Your Front Airbags
Works ........................................ 23
How Your Side Airbags Works .. 27
How Your Side Curtain Airbags
Work.......................................... 29
SRS Indicator.............................. 29, 57
START (Ignition Key Position) ..... 78
Starting the Engine........................ 317
In Cold Weather at High
Altitude ................................... 317
With a Dead Battery ................. 400
Steam Coming from Engine ......... 403
Steering Wheel
Adjustments ................................. 75
Anti-theft Column Lock .............. 78
Steering Wheel Buttons........ 250, 270
Stereo Sound System .................... 136
Sun Visors ....................................... 117
Sunglasses Holder ......................... 116
Supplemental Restraint
System................................... 9, 21
Servicing ....................................... 31
SRS Indicator.......................... 29, 57

VIII

2011 Accord Sedan

System Components.................... 21
Synthetic Oil ................................... 353
T
Taking Care of the Unexpected .. 391
Technical Descriptions
DOT Tire Quality Grading ....... 424
Emissions Control Systems ...... 430
Three Way Catalytic
Converter ................................ 432
Temperature Gauge ........................ 66
Temperature, Outside ..................... 65
Tether Anchorage Points ............... 46
Theft Protection, Radio................. 253
Three Way Catalytic Converter ... 432
Time, Setting the ........................... 254
Timing Belt ..................................... 364
Tire Chains ..................................... 386
Tire, How to Change a Flat .......... 393
Tire Information ............................ 426
Tire Labeling .................................. 426

10/06/18 16:40:16 31TA5630_454

Index
Transmission
Checking Fluid Level,
Automatic ............................... 359
Checking Fluid Level,
Manual .................................... 361
Fluid Selection ................... 360, 361
Identification Number............... 419
Shifting the Automatic .............. 320
Shifting the Manual ................... 318
Treadwear ...................................... 382
Trip Meter ........................................ 65
Trunk................................................. 90
Emergency Opener ..................... 91
Opening the .................................. 90
Open Indicator ............................. 60
Turn Signals ..................................... 69

U
Unexpected, Taking Care of
the ................................................ 391
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..... 424
Unleaded Gasoline......................... 296
USB Adapter
Cable ................... 176, 185, 226, 235
USB Flash Memory Device.. 185, 235

Used Oil, How to Dispose of ........ 355

V
Vanity Mirror ................................. 118
Vehicle Capacity Load .................. 310
Vehicle Dimensions .............. 420, 422
Vehicle Identification Number..... 418
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA )
System..................................... 329
VSA Off Indicator ................ 58, 329
VSA Off Switch .......................... 330
VSA System Indicator ......... 58, 329
Vehicle Storage .............................. 389
Ventilation .............................. 125, 131
VIN .................................................. 418
Viscosity, Oil................................... 353
Voice Control System............ 129, 194

W
WARNING, Explanation of ............. iii
Warning Labels, Location of .......... 52
Warranty Coverages＊ ................... 437

＊ : U.S. only

CONTINUED

2011 Accord Sedan

INDEX

Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) ............. 291, 428
Low Tire Pressure
Indicator............................ 59, 331
Required Federal
Explanation............................. 428
TPMS Indicator ................... 59, 332
Tires ................................................ 380
Air Pressure ............................... 381
Chains ......................................... 386
Checking Wear .......................... 382
Compact Spare ........................... 392
DOT Tire Quality Grading ....... 424
Glossary of Tire Terminology.. 427
Inflation ....................................... 380
Inspection ................................... 382
Replacing .................................... 385
Rotating....................................... 384
Service Life ................................. 383
Snow ............................................ 386
Specifications ..................... 421, 423
Tools, Tire Changing .................... 393
Towing
A Trailer ...................................... 334
Emergency Wrecker ................. 415
Weight Limit .............................. 334

10/06/18 16:40:20 31TA5630_455

Index
Washers, Windshield
Checking the Fluid Level ......... 358
Indicator ........................................ 62
Operation ...................................... 68
Wheels
Adjusting the Steering ................ 75
Alignment and Balance ............. 383
Compact Spare ........................... 392
Wrench, Nut ............................... 394
Windows
Auto Reverse .............................. 107
Operating the Power ................. 106
Rear, Defogger ............................ 74
Windshield
Cleaning ........................................ 68
Defroster ............................ 126, 132
Washers ........................................ 68
Wipers, Windshield
Changing Blades ........................ 377
Operation ...................................... 68
Worn Tires ..................................... 382
Wrecker, Emergency Towing ...... 415

X
XM Radio .............................. 159, 207

2011 Accord Sedan

10/06/18 16:40:37 31TA5630_457

Service Information Summary
Gasoline:
Unleaded gasoline, pump octane
number of 87 or higher.
Fuel Tank Capacity:
18.5 US gal (70.0 )
Recommended Engine Oil:
API Premium grade 0W-20
detergent oil (see page 352 ).
Oil change capacity (including
filter):
4-cylinder models
4.2 US qt (4.0 )
V6 models
4.5 US qt (4.3 )
Automatic Transmission Fluid:
Honda ATF DW-1 (automatic
transmission fluid) (see page 360 ).

Manual Transmission Fluid:
Honda Manual Transmission
Fluid preferred, or an SAE 10W-30
or 10W-40 motor oil as a
temporary replacement (see
page 361 ).
2.0 US qt (1.9 )
Power Steering Fluid:
Honda Power Steering Fluid
preferred, or another brand of
power steering fluid as a
temporary replacement. Do not
use ATF (see page 364 ).
Brake Fluid:
Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid
DOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 or
DOT 4 brake fluid as a temporary
replacement (see page 362 ).

2011 Accord Sedan

Tire Pressure (measured cold):
LX, LX-P and SE
Front/Rear:
30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm )
EX and EX-L
Front/Rear:
32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )
V6 models
Front/Rear:
32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )
Spare Tire Pressure:
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

10/06/18 15:41:06 31TA5630_001

Owner’s Identification
This owner’s manual should be considered
a permanent part of the vehicle and should
remain with the vehicle when it is sold.

OWNER

This owner’s manual covers all models of
the Accord Sedan. You may find
descriptions of equipment and features that
are not on your particular model.

ADDRESS
STREET

CITY

STATE/PROVINCE/TERRITORY

ZIP CODE/
POSTAL CODE

V. I. N.
DELIVERY DATE
(Date sold to original retail purchaser)

DEALER NAME

DEALER NO.

ADDRESS

Images throughout this owner’s manual
(including the front cover) represent
features and equipment that are available on
some, but not all, models. Your particular
model may not have some of these features.
The information and specifications included
in this publication were in effect at the time
of approval for printing. Honda Motor Co.,
Ltd. reserves the right, however, to
discontinue or change specifications or
design at any time without notice and
without incurring any obligation whatsoever.

STREET

CITY

STATE/PROVINCE/TERRITORY

ZIP CODE/
POSTAL CODE

OWNER’S SIGNATURE
DEALER’S SIGNATURE

2011 Accord Sedan

POUR CLIENTS CANADIEN
AVIS IMPORTANT: Si vous avez
besoin d’un Manuel du Conducteur en
français, veuillez demander à votre
concessionnaire de commander le
numéro de pièce 33TA5C30 .

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.6
Linearized                      : No
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 4.0-c321 44.398116, Tue Aug 04 2009 14:24:39
Create Date                     : 2010:06:18 18:15:21Z
Modify Date                     : 2011:08:11 12:47:37-07:00
Metadata Date                   : 2011:08:11 12:47:37-07:00
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 4.05 for Macintosh
Format                          : application/pdf
Document ID                     : uuid:7c26c533-7782-4e9e-9c90-acb4fdd5cb07
Instance ID                     : uuid:0ddde600-7e90-446b-8b1c-12f5f7a6e4e9
Has XFA                         : No
Page Count                      : 454

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Honda 2011 Accord Coupe Owners Manual

Honda-2011-Accord-Sedan-Owners-Manual-107014 honda-2011-accord-sedan-owners-manual-107014

Honda-2011-Accord-Sedan-Owners-Manual-762435 honda-2011-accord-sedan-owners-manual-762435

Owners Manual Pdf TA1111OM 2011 Honda Accord Owners Manual Pdf | Owner's Manual Pdf

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation